Service Manual E87640 - 50 - 60 c05409830 090619
Uploaded by
PabloService Manual E87640 - 50 - 60 c05409830 090619
Uploaded by
PabloHP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640 Series
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87650 Series
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87660 Series
Service Manual
www.hp.com/videos/A3
www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP
E87640 Series
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP
E87650 Series
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP
E87660 Series
Service Manual
Copyright and License Trademark Credits
© Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
L.P. trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and
prior written permission is prohibited, except as Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks
allowed under the copyright laws. of Microsoft Corporation.
The information contained herein is subject to ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are
change without notice. registered U.S. marks.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 8, 4/2019
Conventions used in this guide
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
ENWW iii
iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents
1 Product specifications and description ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Printer views .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2
Printer front view ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Printer back view .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Interface ports ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
Control-panel view ............................................................................................................................................... 5
Inner finisher view ................................................................................................................................................ 6
Stapler/stacker finisher view .............................................................................................................................. 6
Booklet finisher view ........................................................................................................................................... 7
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Supported operating systems ......................................................................................................................... 13
Printer dimensions ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Mobile printing solutions .................................................................................................................................. 15
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ................................................... 16
Environmental specifications .......................................................................................................................... 16
General specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 16
Print specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 19
Scan specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 21
Copy specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 23
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
Maintenance parts ............................................................................................................................................. 26
Paper handling specifications .......................................................................................................................... 27
Network and software specifications ............................................................................................................. 33
Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 35
Feeding system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Feeding system overview ................................................................................................................................ 43
Main components and functions ..................................................................................................................... 44
Cassette .............................................................................................................................................................. 48
Pickup unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 49
Registration unit ................................................................................................................................................ 49
Tray 1 feeder assembly .................................................................................................................................... 50
ENWW v
Fuser unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 52
Fuser unit overview ........................................................................................................................................... 52
Fuser unit drive .................................................................................................................................................. 53
Fuser unit temperature control ....................................................................................................................... 53
Loop control ....................................................................................................................................................... 54
Image creation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Printing process overview ................................................................................................................................ 56
Imaging unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
Toner cartridge ................................................................................................................................................... 60
Dynamic security ............................................................................................................................................... 61
Intermediate transfer belt unit ........................................................................................................................ 61
Toner reservoir unit ........................................................................................................................................... 63
Laser scanner assembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 65
Laser scanner assembly overview .................................................................................................................. 65
Laser scanning optical path ............................................................................................................................. 65
Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................................................ 66
Automatic CPR adjustment .............................................................................................................................. 67
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................................................... 71
Pickup and cassette lift drive ........................................................................................................................... 71
Feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................... 72
Registration drive .............................................................................................................................................. 73
Fuser release/exit drive .................................................................................................................................... 74
Drive motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 74
Main drive unit motors ...................................................................................................................................... 76
Toner supply/reservoir drive ........................................................................................................................... 77
Engage transfer roller drive ............................................................................................................................. 78
TCU drive ............................................................................................................................................................. 78
Flatbed Scanner System ....................................................................................................................................................... 79
Flatbed scanner system overview .................................................................................................................. 79
Scanning system components ........................................................................................................................ 81
Caution for moving the scanner ...................................................................................................................... 87
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) du bundles (LX) ........................................................................................................ 89
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) (LX) overview ....................................................................................... 89
Electrical parts location .................................................................................................................................... 89
LX ADF Registration .......................................................................................................................................... 90
LX ADF drive system ......................................................................................................................................... 90
LX ADF Scanning position ................................................................................................................................. 93
LX ADF Specification .......................................................................................................................................... 93
Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) ................................................................................. 94
Flow ADF overview ............................................................................................................................................ 94
Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................... 95
vi ENWW
Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM) ............................................................................................................................ 96
Flow ADF drive system ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Flow ADF Registration ....................................................................................................................................... 98
Flow ADF Scanning Position ............................................................................................................................. 98
Mixed Size Original (MSO) ................................................................................................................................. 99
Dual sensor cleaning method ....................................................................................................................... 100
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) ................................................................................................................................ 101
Hardware configuration ...................................................................................................................................................... 102
Main controller ................................................................................................................................................. 104
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5) ......................................................................................... 116
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R) ...................................................................................... 118
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) ......................................................................................... 120
Fuser drive assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 121
High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA ....................................................................................................... 122
Eraser PCA ........................................................................................................................................................ 126
Fuser PCA ......................................................................................................................................................... 126
Waste Sensor PCA ........................................................................................................................................... 126
Paper Size sensor PCA ................................................................................................................................... 127
Flow ADF PCA ................................................................................................................................................... 127
Scan joint PCA .................................................................................................................................................. 128
CCDM PCA ......................................................................................................................................................... 129
WLED IF PCA ..................................................................................................................................................... 129
WLED PCA ......................................................................................................................................................... 130
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................................. 131
High capacity input tray (HCI) ............................................................................................................................................. 135
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) ................................................................................................................................... 139
2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement .................................................................................................................................... 143
HP service and support ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
Additional service and support for channel partners ................................................................................ 144
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel ....................................................................... 144
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................................................ 146
Ordering ............................................................................................................................................................ 146
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................................... 146
How to use the parts list and diagrams ........................................................................................................................... 146
ESD precautions ................................................................................................................................................................... 147
Service approach ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Precautions when replacing parts ................................................................................................................ 147
Before performing service ............................................................................................................................. 148
After performing service ................................................................................................................................ 148
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................................. 149
ENWW vii
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................................... 150
Machine cleaning for maintenance .............................................................................................................. 150
Main parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 158
Main assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 158
Exit assembly ................................................................................................................................................... 402
Tray 2/3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 424
Main frame assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 426
Registration assembly .................................................................................................................................... 440
ACR frame assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 463
Toner reservoir (CMYK) ................................................................................................................................... 465
Rear frame assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 478
Drive system .................................................................................................................................................... 482
Main frame pickup 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ 546
Sub-Main frame pickup .................................................................................................................................. 582
Cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 588
Right door ......................................................................................................................................................... 627
Tray 1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 697
Right door guide .............................................................................................................................................. 722
Right door side exit ......................................................................................................................................... 724
T2 transfer assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 726
ADF (LX/du models) ........................................................................................................................................ 728
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX/du models) ............................................................................................ 766
ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models) ................................................................................................ 779
Flow ADF (GX/sGX) .......................................................................................................................................... 802
ADF open cover (GX/sGX) ............................................................................................................................... 820
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX) .................................................................................................................. 832
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) ............................................................................................................................ 841
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) .................................................................................................................... 855
Image scanner ................................................................................................................................................. 918
Image scanner, lower ..................................................................................................................................... 930
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................................. 944
DCF main .......................................................................................................................................................... 944
DCF frame ......................................................................................................................................................... 968
DCF rear frame ................................................................................................................................................ 973
Opt feed drive .................................................................................................................................................. 977
DCF second pickup .......................................................................................................................................... 983
2000-sheet HCI (department) ........................................................................................................................................... 986
2K HCI main ...................................................................................................................................................... 986
2K HCI drive ...................................................................................................................................................... 988
2K HCI cassette ............................................................................................................................................. 1000
2K HCI frame .................................................................................................................................................. 1002
viii ENWW
2K HCI main pickup ....................................................................................................................................... 1007
3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) ................................................................................................. 1010
3K sHCI main 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 1010
3K HCI main 3 ................................................................................................................................................ 1017
3K HCI main 5 ................................................................................................................................................ 1029
3K HCI main 6 ................................................................................................................................................ 1031
Pickup cover unit ........................................................................................................................................... 1033
3K sHCI frame ................................................................................................................................................ 1035
3 Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1037
Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview ........................................................................... 1038
Error codes ..................................................................................................................................................... 1038
How to search for printer documentation ................................................................................................ 1040
Troubleshooting process ................................................................................................................................................. 1043
Determine the problem source .................................................................................................................. 1043
Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................ 1057
Problem-solving checklist ........................................................................................................................... 1057
Print menu map ............................................................................................................................................ 1060
Print current settings pages ....................................................................................................................... 1060
Print event log ............................................................................................................................................... 1060
Pre-boot menu options ............................................................................................................................... 1062
Control panel menus .................................................................................................................................... 1079
Clear paper jams ................................................................................................................................................................ 1151
Paper jam locations ...................................................................................................................................... 1151
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam ................................................................................................................................ 1151
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam ....................................................................................................... 1152
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI ........................................................................................................... 1155
Service mode (tech mode; du models) .......................................................................................................................... 1157
Entering service mode ................................................................................................................................. 1157
Service mode menu tree ............................................................................................................................. 1158
Information .................................................................................................................................................... 1163
Maintenance counts ..................................................................................................................................... 1164
Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................................... 1165
Service functions .......................................................................................................................................... 1194
Print quality troubleshooting guide ................................................................................................................................ 1198
Image quality problems and solutions ...................................................................................................... 1198
Other errors ................................................................................................................................................... 1215
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models) ................................................................................................................ 1229
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew .......................................................................................................................................... 1231
ENWW ix
4 Connection diagrams ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1235
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER) .................................................................................................. 1236
Connection Diagram (Scanner) ........................................................................................................................................ 1237
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) ........................................................................................ 1238
Connection Diagram (Side/Tray 1/Feed/Registration/Pickup) .................................................................................. 1239
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock) ................................................................................................................... 1240
Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) ......................................................................................................................... 1241
5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ................................................................................................................................................ 1243
Product specification and description ............................................................................................................................ 1244
Finisher system ............................................................................................................................................. 1244
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................................... 1257
Precautions when replacing parts ............................................................................................................. 1257
Before performing service .......................................................................................................................... 1258
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1259
After performing service ............................................................................................................................. 1259
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................... 1259
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ..................................................................................................... 1259
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) ........................ 1261
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1262
Top output bin ............................................................................................................................................... 1263
Right top cover .............................................................................................................................................. 1265
Top cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 1268
Front door ...................................................................................................................................................... 1272
Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 1279
Front cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 1284
Front lower cover .......................................................................................................................................... 1292
Booklet tray ................................................................................................................................................... 1301
Caster cover ................................................................................................................................................... 1304
Lower shield assembly ................................................................................................................................ 1308
Upper shield assembly ................................................................................................................................ 1321
Controller PCA ............................................................................................................................................... 1337
Stapler unit .................................................................................................................................................... 1343
Dummy feed guide ....................................................................................................................................... 1355
Top jam access cover ................................................................................................................................... 1361
Top lower feed assembly ............................................................................................................................ 1372
Ejector unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 1385
Front tamper unit ......................................................................................................................................... 1410
Rear tamper unit ........................................................................................................................................... 1435
Feed entrance motor (M1) .......................................................................................................................... 1460
Feed exit motor (M2) .................................................................................................................................... 1466
x ENWW
Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3) ......................................................................................................... 1472
Front tamper motor (M6) ............................................................................................................................ 1480
Rear tamper motor (M7) .............................................................................................................................. 1506
SCU motor (M10) ........................................................................................................................................... 1532
Main tray moving motor (M11) ................................................................................................................... 1550
Booklet finisher front cover ......................................................................................................................... 1560
Booklet finisher ............................................................................................................................................. 1562
Booklet finisher PCA ..................................................................................................................................... 1573
Booklet finisher fold stopper unit .............................................................................................................. 1585
Booklet feed entrance motor (M13) .......................................................................................................... 1597
TE presser motor (M14) ............................................................................................................................... 1600
Stopper moving motor (M16) ..................................................................................................................... 1603
Separate pawl motor (M17) ........................................................................................................................ 1607
Folding roller motor (M18) .......................................................................................................................... 1610
Blade motor (M19) ........................................................................................................................................ 1616
C fold motor (M20) ....................................................................................................................................... 1620
Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................. 1627
Control panel message document (CPMD) ............................................................................................... 1627
Clear paper jams ........................................................................................................................................... 1627
Finisher system diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 1641
Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher .............................................................................................................. 1642
Booklet finisher 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 1642
Booklet finisher 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 1644
Booklet finisher 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 1646
Booklet finisher 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 1648
Booklet finisher 5 .......................................................................................................................................... 1650
Booklet finisher 6 .......................................................................................................................................... 1652
Booklet finisher 7 .......................................................................................................................................... 1654
Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold exit ........................................................ 1656
Low exit, hb motor, and top guide ............................................................................................................. 1658
SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide ............................................................................................. 1660
Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor ................................................................. 1662
Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam .......................................................................................................... 1664
FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade ...................................................................................... 1666
Fold roller, main blade, and top frame ...................................................................................................... 1668
Three fold blade ............................................................................................................................................ 1670
Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide ................................................................................... 1672
Entrance guide, mid jam, and main exit .................................................................................................... 1674
Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor ........................................................ 1676
Front alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................ 1678
Rear alignment (tamper) ............................................................................................................................. 1680
ENWW xi
Shield .............................................................................................................................................................. 1682
PCA bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle ................................................................................................ 1684
Finisher sub booklet ..................................................................................................................................... 1686
Bridge Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 1688
6 Inner finisher ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1691
Product Specification and Description ........................................................................................................................... 1692
Specification .................................................................................................................................................. 1692
Finisher System ............................................................................................................................................. 1696
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................................... 1701
Before performing service .......................................................................................................................... 1701
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1701
After performing service ............................................................................................................................. 1701
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................... 1701
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ..................................................................................................... 1702
Removal and replacment (inner finisher) ...................................................................................................................... 1703
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1704
Entrance sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 1705
Entrance motor ............................................................................................................................................. 1709
Exit sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 1715
Exit motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 1720
Front Jogger Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 1723
Front Jogger Home Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 1735
Rear Jogger Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 1747
Rear Jogger Home Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 1756
Stapler ............................................................................................................................................................ 1762
Stapler position sensor assembly .............................................................................................................. 1765
Traverse Motor .............................................................................................................................................. 1776
Stacker Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 1781
Stacker Encoder Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 1788
Stacker Lower Limit Switch ......................................................................................................................... 1795
Stack Beam Sensor ...................................................................................................................................... 1802
Stack Position Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 1807
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid .................................................................................................................... 1817
Paper Support Motor .................................................................................................................................... 1825
Paper Support Home Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 1834
Ejector Motor assembly ............................................................................................................................... 1846
Main Paddle Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 1860
Main Paddle Home Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 1862
Main Paddle ................................................................................................................................................... 1864
Ejector assembly .......................................................................................................................................... 1866
xii ENWW
Punch Dust Full Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 1878
End Fence Home Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 1883
Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................. 1885
Control panel message document (CPMD) ............................................................................................... 1627
Block Diagram .................................................................................................................................................................... 1886
Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams .................................................................................................................................. 1888
Sub-inner finisher ......................................................................................................................................... 1888
Sub 1 - Inner finisher .................................................................................................................................... 1890
Sub 7 Inner finisher ...................................................................................................................................... 1892
Sub 8 - Inner finisher .................................................................................................................................... 1894
Appendix A Glossary ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1897
Glossary of terms .............................................................................................................................................................. 1898
Appendix B Revision History ................................................................................................................................................................ 1903
Revision History ................................................................................................................................................................. 1903
Appendix C Certificate of Volatility ..................................................................................................................................................... 1905
Certificate of Volatility ....................................................................................................................................................... 1906
Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1909
ENWW xiii
xiv ENWW
1 Product specifications and description
● Printer views
● Specifications
● Feeding system
● Fuser unit
● Image creation
● Laser scanner assembly
● Drive system
● Flatbed Scanner System
● Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) du bundles (LX)
● Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX)
● Hardware configuration
● Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
● High capacity input tray (HCI)
● Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
ENWW 1
Printer views
● Printer front view
● Printer back view
● Interface ports
● Control-panel view
● Inner finisher view
● Stapler/stacker finisher view
● Booklet finisher view
Printer front view
1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10
12
13
14 11
1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
2 Automatic document feeder width guides
3 Automatic document feeder input tray
4 Automatic document feeder output tray
5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it. (NOTE: Close the keyboard when it is not in
use.)
2 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
7 Right door (access for clearing jams)
8 On/off button
9 Tray 1
10 Power switch
11 Power connection
12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)
13 Tray 2
14 Tray 3
15 Output bin
16 Easy-access USB port. Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer, or to update the printer firmware.
(NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.)
17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)
Printer back view
1 Formatter cover
2 Interface ports
3 Serial number and product number label
ENWW Printer views 3
Interface ports
1 USB port for connecting external USB devices (NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.)
2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port
3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
4 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Control-panel view
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.
The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button on the printer control panel.
NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer configuration.
2 3 4 5
6
1
1 Home button Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.
2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present if users are not logged in.
The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out button is present. Touch the Reset button to
resume and release jobs from the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the quick copy count
in the copy count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the keyboard layout.
3 Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all options to the default
settings.
NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer to require permission
for access to features.
ENWW Printer views 5
4 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several types of printer
information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following information:
● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user session.
● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.
● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer using a phone, tablet, or
other device with Wi-Fi.
● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an optional wireless accessory
is installed).
● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.
● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using HP Web Services
(ePrint).
5 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
The status line provides information about the overall printer status.
6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to access more applications.
NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can configure which applications
appear and the order in which they appear.
7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.
8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The current page is
indicator highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.
Inner finisher view
Stapler/stacker finisher view
6 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Booklet finisher view
ENWW Printer views 7
Specifications
Technical specifications
Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z
Model number E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z
Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A
Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet
capacity)
Tray 2 (520-sheet
capacity)
Tray 3 (520-sheet
capacity)
2 x 520-sheet dual Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
cassette feeder (DCF)
2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
capacity input tray
3,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
capacity input tray
Cabinet stand, Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
department
Stapler/stacker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
finishing accessory
Booklet finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
accessory
Inner finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
accessory
2/3 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
accessory
2/4 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
accessory
Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
accessory
HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Automatic duplex
printing
Connectivity 10/100/1000 Ethernet
LAN connection with
IPv4 and IPv6
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Easy-access USB port
for printing without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware
8 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)
Model number E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z
Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A
Hardware Integration
Pocket for connecting
accessory and third-
party devices
Memory 7 GB base memory
Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure
High-Performance
Hard Disk
Security HP Trusted Platform
Module (embedded)
Control-panel display Color touchscreen
control panel
Retractable keyboard Not supported Not supported Not supported
Print Prints 40 pages per Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and on letter-size
paper.
Prints 50 pages per Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and on letter-size
paper
Prints 60 pages per Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and on letter-size
paper
Easy-access USB
printing (no computer
required)
Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per Not supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and letter-size paper
Scans 120 pages per Not supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and letter-size paper
250-page document
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning
HP EveryPage Not supported Not supported Not supported
Technologies including
ultrasonic multi-feed
detection
ENWW Specifications 9
Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)
Model number E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z
Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A
Embedded optical Not supported Not supported Not supported
character recognition
(OCR) provides the
ability to convert
printed pages into text
that can be edited or
searched using a
computer
SMART Label feature Not supported Not supported Not supported
provides paper-edge
detection for
automatic page
cropping
Automatic page Not supported Not supported Not supported
orientation for pages
that have at least 100
characters of text
Automatic tone Not supported Not supported Not supported
adjustment sets
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each page
Digital Send Send documents to E-
mail, USB, and shared
folders on a network
Send documents to Not supported Not supported Not supported
SharePoint®
Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du
Model number E87640du E87650du E87660du
Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A
Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
Tray 2 (520-sheet capacity)
Tray 3 (520-sheet capacity)
2 x 520-sheet dual cassette feeder Optional Optional Optional
(DCF)
2,000-sheet high-capacity input Optional Optional Optional
tray
3,000-sheet high-capacity input Optional Optional Optional
tray
Cabinet stand, department Optional Optional Optional
Stapler/stacker finishing accessory Optional Optional Optional
10 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du (continued)
Model number E87640du E87650du E87660du
Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A
Booklet finisher accessory Optional Optional Optional
Inner finisher accessory Optional Optional Optional
2/3 hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional
2/4 hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional
Swedish hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional
HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional
Automatic duplex printing
Connectivity 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN
connection with IPv4 and IPv6
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
Easy-access USB port for printing
without a computer and upgrading
the firmware
Hardware Integration Pocket for
connecting accessory and third-
party devices
Memory 7 GB base memory
Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure High-
Performance Hard Disk
Security HP Trusted Platform Module
(embedded)
Control-panel display Color touchscreen control panel
Retractable keyboard Not supported Not supported Not supported
Print Prints 40 pages per minute (ppm) Not supported Not supported
on A4 and on letter-size paper.
Prints 50 pages per minute (ppm) Not supported Not supported
on A4 and on letter-size paper
Prints 60 pages per minute (ppm) Not supported Not supported
on A4 and on letter-size paper
Easy-access USB printing (no
computer required)
Fax Optional Optional Optional
Copy and Scan Scans 80-simplex/160-duplex
images per minute (ipm) on A4 and
letter-size paper (LX du models
only)
ENWW Specifications 11
Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du (continued)
Model number E87640du E87650du E87660du
Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A
100-page document feeder with
dual-head scanning for single-pass
duplex copying and scanning
HP EveryPage Technologies Not supported Not supported Not supported
including ultrasonic multi-feed
detection
Embedded optical character Not supported Not supported Not supported
recognition (OCR) provides the
ability to convert printed pages into
text that can be edited or searched
using a computer
SMART Label feature provides Not supported Not supported Not supported
paper-edge detection for automatic
page cropping
Automatic page orientation for Not supported Not supported Not supported
pages that have at least 100
characters of text
Automatic tone adjustment sets Not supported Not supported Not supported
contrast, brightness, and
background removal for each page
Digital Send Send documents to E-mail, USB,
and shared folders on a network
Send documents to SharePoint® Not supported Not supported Not supported
12 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Supported operating systems
The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for OS X and to the
software installer.
Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer and
installs the “HP PCL.6” version 3 print driver, the “HP PCL 6” version 3 print driver, or the “HP PCL-6” version 4
print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when using the software
installer. Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and the "HP PCL-6"
version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp.
OS X: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/LaserJet
or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy Start is not
included in the HP Software Installer.
1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.
Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on Notes
the web)
Windows® XP SP3, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
installed for this operating system as part of Windows XP in April 2009. HP will continue
the software installation. to provide best effort support for the
discontinued XP operating system. Some
features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.
Windows Vista®, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
installed for this operating system as part of Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will
the software installation. continue to provide best effort support for
the discontinued Vista operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print
driver are not supported.
Windows Server 2003 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will
support website. Download the driver, and continue to provide best effort support for
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to the discontinued Server 2003 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.
Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is
installed for this operating system as part of
the software installation.
Windows 8, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is Windows 8 RT support is provided through
installed for this operating system as part of Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
the software installation.
Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print Windows 8.1 RT support is provided through
driver is installed for this operating system Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
as part of the software installation.
Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print
driver is installed for this operating system
as part of the software installation.
ENWW Specifications 13
Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on Notes
the web)
Windows Server 2008 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2008 in January 2015. HP
support website. Download the driver, and will continue to provide best effort support
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to for the discontinued Server 2008 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.
Windows Server 2008 SP2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.
Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.
Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.
Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.
OS X 10.10 Yosemite, OS X 10.11 El Capitan, To install the print driver, download HP Easy
and OS X 10.12 Sierra Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet. Follow the
steps provided to install the printer
software and print driver.
NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer.
NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go to
www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.
Table 1-4 Minimum system requirements
Windows OS X
● An Internet connection ● Internet connection
● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space
● 2 GB of available hard-disk space
14 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Printer dimensions
2
3 2
3
Table 1-5 Dimensions of the E87640, E87650, E87660
Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions
1. Height dn models: 932.2 mm (36.7 in) dn models: 1389.4 mm (54.7 in)
z models: 932.2 mm (36.7 in) z models: 1389.4 mm (54.7 in)
2. Depth dn models: 771.1 mm (30.3 in) dn models: 1676 mm (66 in)
z models: 771.1 mm (30.3 in) z models: 1676 mm (66 in)
3. Width dn models: 585 mm (23 in) dn models: 1134 mm (47 in)
z models: 585 mm (23 in) z models: 1134 mm (47 in)
Weight dn models: 113.1 kg (249.3 lb)
z models: 113.1 kg (249.3 lb)
NOTE: HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to
make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation.
Mobile printing solutions
HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to www.hp.com/go/
LaserJetMobilePrinting.
● Wi-Fi Direct
● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)
● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)
● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices
ENWW Specifications 15
● HP ePrint software
● Google Cloud Print
● AirPrint
● Android Printing
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
See www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Environmental specifications
● Operating-environment specifications
Operating-environment specifications
Consider the following points before installing the printer:
The following table lists the recommended environment conditions:
Table 1-6 Environmental specifications
Environmental Condition Recommended
Temperature 150 to 300 C (59F to 86F)
Relative Humidity 20% to 80% relative humidity (RH)
General specifications
Table 1-7 General specifications
Item Specification
Processor CPU 1.5 GHz (Quad Core)
User Interface Operational Panel 8 inch touch screen
LED 2 (Power/Status)
Key/Button 1 (Power)
Memory Total 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)
Storage Standard 320 GB HDD
Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)
USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)
USB (EDI) N/A
Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)
Additional Wired LAN Support Yes (optional)
16 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Wireless LAN/NFC ● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC
Active Type)
● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac + BLE +
NFC Active Type)
Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) 23 sec
From Sleep 12 sec
Power Consumption Ready Less than 30 W
Normal operation Less than 900 W
Max/Peak Less than 1300 W
Sleep/Low Power Mode Less than 2.0 W
TEC (Default Mode) ● E87640: 2.1 kWh
● E87650: 2.717 kWh
● E87660: 3.05 kWh
Power Requirement ● Input Voltage (Europe): AC 220–240 V (+-6%)
● Input voltage (USA): AC 110–127 V (+-10%)
● Input Voltage (AP): AC 220–240 V (+-6%)
● Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz (+-2Hz)
Acoustic Noise Level (Sound Power/ Printing Mode Simplex
Pressure)
● E87640, E87650
– Tray 2: Less than 54 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
56 dBA
● E87660
– Tray 2: Less than 56 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
58 dBA
Duplex
● E87640, E87650
– Tray 2: Less than 57 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
59 dBA
● E87660
– Tray 2: Less than 59 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
61 dBA
ENWW Specifications 17
Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Copying Mode Simplex
● E87640
– Tray 2: Less than 58 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
60 dBA
● E87650, E87660
– Tray 2: Less than 59 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
61 dBA
Duplex
● E87640
– Tray 2: Less than 60 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
62 dBA
● E87650
– Tray 2: Less than 61 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
63 dBA
● E87660
– Tray 2: Less than 61 dBA
– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less than
64 dBA
Ready Mode 30 dBA
Dimensions (W x D x H) Set (without stand) ● 585 x 771.1 x 932.2 mm (23 x 30.3 x
36.7 in)
Weight Set (with supplies) ● E87640, E87650, E87660: 113.1 kg
(249.3 lb)
Recommended Monthly Print Volume ● E87640: 40,000 pages
● E87650: 45,000 pages
● E87660: 50,000 pages
Max Monthly Duty Cycle ● E87640: 200,000 pages
● E87650: 250,000 pages
● E87660: 330,000 pages
18 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Print specifications
Table 1-8 Print specifications
Item Specification
Print speed Simplex ● E87640
– Up to 40 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in
Letter)
– Up to 21 ppm in A3 (21 ppm in
11x17)
● E87650
– Up to 50 ppm in A4 (50 ppm in
Letter)
– Up to 26 ppm in A3 (26 ppm in
11x17)
● E87660
– Up to 60 ppm in A4 (50 ppm in
Letter)
– Up to 31 ppm in A3 (31 ppm in
11x17)
Duplex (Simplex to Duplex) ● E87640
– Up to 40 ipm in A4 (40 ipm in
Letter)
– Up to 21 ipm in A3 (21 ipm in
11x17)
● E87650
– Up to 50 ipm in A4 (50 ipm in
Letter)
– Up to 26 ipm in A3 (26 ipm in
11x17)
● E87660
– Up to 60 ipm in A4 (50 ipm in
Letter)
– Up to 31 ipm in A3 (31 ipm in
11x17)
FPOT From Ready ● E87640: as fast as 9.9 s
● E87650: as fast as 8.9 s
● E87660: as fast as 8.3 s
From Sleep ● E87640: as fast as 21.9 s
● E87650: as fast as 20.9 s
● E87660: as fast as 20.3 s
Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi (Full Speed)
ENWW Specifications 19
Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Printer Language PCL5/PCL6(XL)/PostScript Level 3/PDF v1.7
Font PCL 95 scalable fonts (including OCR-A/OCR-
B)/1 Bitmap
PostScript 3 136 scalable fonts
Supporting Operating Systems Windows ● Windows XP (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2003 Server (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows Vista (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2008 Server (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 2008 Server R2 (64–bit)
● Windows 8 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows 8.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Windows Server 2012 (64–bit)
● Windows Server 2012 R2 (64–bit)
Linux ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6 (32–bit,
64–bit)
● Fedora 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● OpenSuSE 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2,
12.3, 13.1 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Ubuntu 10.04, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04,
12.10, 13.04, 13.10, 14.04 (32–bit,
64–bit)
● SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
(32–bit, 64–bit)
● Debian 6, 7 (32–bit, 64–bit)
● Mint 13, 14, 15, 16 (32–bit, 64–bit)
Mac OS Mac OS X 10.6–10.10
20 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS
Print Features ● WSD print
● Secure print
● Stored print
● Booklet
● N-up
● Cover page
● Barcode
● Eco
● Poster
● Glossy
● Watermark
● Tray priority setting
● Auto tray setting
● Tray protection
● USB print
● Secure PDF print
● Google Cloud print
Scan specifications
Table 1-9 Scan specifications
Item Specification
Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and white,
(hardware) gray scale, and color)
● Simplex: 90 ipm @ 300
DPI
● Duplex: 180 ipm @ 300
DPI
Z bundles (black and white,
gray scale, and color)
● Simplex: 120 ipm @ 300
DPI
● Duplex: 240 ipm @ 300
DPI
Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color
ENWW Specifications 21
Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network
SANE
Scan Method MMT
File Formats ● PDF
● Searchable PDF
● Compact PDF
● PDF Encryption
● Digital Signature in PDF
● PDF/A
● Single-Page PDF
● Multi-page PDF
● TIFF
● Single-Page TIFF
● Multi-page TIFF
● XPS
● Single-Page XPS
● Multi-page XPS
● JPEG
Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Optical (Image Scanner) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Enhanced (Image Scanner) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Scan Destinations ● Email
● FTP
● SMB
● HDD
● USB
● WSD
● PC
● Internet FAX
Multi-destinations Yes
22 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/
TLS)
● POP3 (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/
TLS)
● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)
● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)
● WSD
● T4Net
Scan ADF ● Min. A6 SEF 105 mm x
Size 148 mm (4.13 in x 5.83)
● Max. 297 mm x 437 mm
(11.7 in x 17.2 in)
Image Scanner Max. 297 mm x 437 mm
(11.7 in x 17.2 in)
Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo
Copy specifications
Table 1-10 Copy specifications
Item Specification
Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E87640
– Up to 40 cpm in A4
● E87650
– Up to 50 cpm in A4
● E87660
– Up to 60 cpm in A4
Multiple Document Multiple Copy (MDMC) ● E87640
– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 40
cpm in A4/Letter
– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 40 ipm
in A4/Letter
● E87650
– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 50
cpm in A4/Letter
– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 50 ipm
in A4/Letter
● E87660
ENWW Specifications 23
Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 60
cpm in A4/Letter
– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 60 ipm
in A4/Letter
FCOT From Ready ● E87640: 6.1 s
● E87650: 5.1 s
● E87660: 4.5 s
Resolution Flow ADF ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Image Scanner ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Reduce/Enlarge Flow ADF 25–400% in 1% increments
Image Scanner 25–400% in 1% increments
Preset 25% / 50% A3→A5 / 61% A3→B5 / 64%
Ledger→Letter / 70% A3→A4 | B4→B5 |
A4→A5 / 77% Ledger→Legal / 78%
Legal→Letter / 81% B4→A4 | B5→A5 /
86% A3→B4 | A4→B5 / 104%
Executive→Letter / 115% B4→A3 / 121%
Legal→Ledger / 122% A4→B4 / 129%
Letter→Ledger / 141% A4→A3 | A5→A4 /
150% / 200% A5→A3 / 400%
Darkness Control 11 levels
Contrast Control 11 levels
Multi Copy 1–9,999
Duplex Copy Built-in
24 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Copy Original Type ● Text
● Text and Printed Photo
● Text and Glossy Photo
● Newspaper
● Printed Photo
● Glossy Photo
● Copied Original
● Map
● Light Original
Copy Features ● ID Copy
● N-up
● Booklet
● Image Repeat
● Auto Fit
● Book Copy
● Poster Copy
● Watermark
● Image Overlay
● Stamp
● Covers
● Job Build
● Preview
● Erase Edge
● Image Shift
● Image Adjustment
● Background Adjustment
Supplies
Table 1-11 Supplies
Item Product number Average yield
Initial Toner Cartridge1 Black Approx. 54,500 pages
NOTE: Only China, Korea
ENWW Specifications 25
Table 1-11 Supplies (continued)
Item Product number Average yield
Cyan Approx. 52,000 pages
Magenta
Yellow
Toner Cartridge1 Black W9050MC Approx. 45,000 pages
Cyan W9051MC Approx. 30,000 pages
Magenta W9053MC Approx. 30,000 pages
Yellow W9052MC Approx. 30,000 pages
TCU W9058MC Approx. 71,000 pages
Staples
1 Print cartridge life is approximately based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage. Declared cartridge yield value in
accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based on images printed and other factors. For more information, visit
www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies
NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.
Print cartridge life is approximately based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage. Declared
cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based on images printed
and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies
IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as the printer
being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the printer. This is due to
differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the conditions of a specific country/
region.
Maintenance parts
Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.
HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.
Item Product number Life Remark
Developer Unit Yellow Z7Y73A 720,000 pages
Magenta Z7Y72A 720,000 pages
Cyan Z7Y69A 720,000 pages
Black Z7Y68A 720,000 pages
OPC Drum Unit Black W9054MC Approx. 160,000 pages
Cyan W9055MC Approx. 140,000 pages
Magenta
Yellow
26 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Item Product number Life Remark
Fuser Unit 220 V Z7Y76A 360,000 pages
110 V Z7Y75A 360,000 pages
ITB Z7Y78A 430,000 pages NOTE: Clean the CPR
sensor after replacing
the ITB.
ITB Cleaner Z7Y80A 180,000 pages
Transfer Roller Assembly Z7Y90A 360,000 pages
Pick/Feed/Reverse (Separation) Roller (for Trays 2-X) Z9M01A 360,000 pages
Tray 1 Pick/Feed/Reverse (Separation) Roller 200,000 pages
Flow ADF pick roller assembly (GX and sGX z/dn Z8W50A 200,000 pages
models)
Flow ADF reverse (separation) roller assembly (GX Z8W51A 100,000 pages
and sGX z/dn models)
ADF pick roller assy (LX du models) Z7Y64A 200,000 pages
ADF reverse (separation) roller assy (LX du models) Z7Y65A 100,000 pages
NOTE:
● Depending on the print patterns and job mode used, the lifespan can differ.
● See Replacing the maintenance part for further instructions.
Maintenance table
● EM: Emergency Maintenance (as needed)
● C: Clean
● R: Replace
NOTE: The total pages at the top of the table represents the lifespan for each maintenance part.
When replacing the fuser unit, the engineer does not need to replace Paper Path and Flow ADF's material items
such as pickup, feed, separation rollers, and so on.
The usage of fuser unit and pickup, feed, separation roller will be different as the usage of Copy, Scan, and Print
job.
Paper handling specifications
Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications
Item Specification
Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets
Multipurpose 100 sheets
ENWW Specifications 27
Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Maximum 6140 sheets
NOTE: 1 Tray (100) + 2 Tray (1040) + HCI bottom (2000) + sHCI (3000)
Standard Cassette Tray Capacity ● 520 sheets x 2 (Based on Xerox Premier 80g/m2)
● Envelope: 50 sheets (only Tray 2 support)
NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No.10, No. 9
Media Sizes ● Cassette 1: 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 297 mm x 390 mm (3.9 in x 5.5 in —
11.7 in x 15.4 in)
● Cassette 2: 148.5 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457 mm (5.8 in x 7.2 in —
12.6 in x 18 in)
Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Thick Cardstock
● Heavy Cardstock
● Extra Heavy Cardstock 1
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 ,2 ,3 4
● Label
● Transparency
● Envelope (Cassette 1 Only)
28 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/ Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb/ Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m² (Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220 g/m²
● Extra Heavy Weight 2: 221–256 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 3: 257–300 g/m2
● Thick Cardstock: 164–216 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Heavy Cardstock: 217–256 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Cardstock: 257–300 g/m2
● Thick Glossy: 164–216 g/m2
● Heavy Glossy: 217–256 g/m2
● Transparency: 138–146 g/m2
● Label: 120–150 g/m2
● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2 (Only Tray 2 support)
● Thick Envelope: 91–120 g/m2 (Only Tray 2 support)
● Thin Paper: 60-69 g/m² (16-19 lb/ Duplex)
● Cotton paper : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Colored : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Pre-Printed : 71-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Recycled : 60-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Bond Paper: 105-120 g/m² (Duplex)
● Letterhead : 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Hole Punched Paper: 75-90 g/m² (Duplex)
● Thin Cardstock : 105-163 g/m² (Duplex)
● Thin Glossy : 106-163 g/m² (Duplex)
Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect: Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: Yes
ENWW Specifications 29
Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Tray 1 Capacity ● Plain Paper: 100 sheets at 80 g/m2
● Envelopes: 10 sheets at 75 g/m2
NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No. 10, No. 9
● Labels: 20 sheets at 120–159 g/m2
● Thick Paper: 10 sheets at 176 g/m2
Media Sizes 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 1200 mm (3.8 in x 5.5 in — 12.6 in x 47.2 in)
Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2 ,3 ,4
● Envelope
● Transparency
● Label
Media Weight ● 60 to 256 g/m2: Simplex, Duplex
● 257 to 325 g/m2: Simplex
● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2, Simplex
● Label: 120–150 g/m2, Simplex
Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes
Paper Size Detect: Yes
30 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
ADF Capacity GX/sGX - 250 sheets
LX - 100 sheets
Document Size ● Width: 105 mm — 297 mm (5 in — 11.7 in)
● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5in — 17 in)
Document Weight ● Simplex: 60–163 g/m2 (11.25–43.24 lb) (Guarantee) 42–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)
● Duplex: 60–163 g/m2 (13.25–43.25 lb) (Guarantee) 50–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)
Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/Folio/Executive
Image Scanner Document Size ● Width: 140 mm — 297 mm (5.5 in — 11.7 in)
● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5 in — 17 in)
Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down
Maximum 615 sheets [500 sheets (Standard) + 125 sheets (Job Separator)]
Printing Size Maximum Size 320 mm x 457 mm (12.6 in x 18 in)
Minimum Size 98 mm x 139.7 mm (3.8 in x 5.5 in)
Maximum Printing Area Simplex Top: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm
Duplex Top: 4.2 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 2 mm
Duplex Printing Support Built-in
Media Sizes 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457 mm (5.5 in x 7.2 in — 12.6 in x 18 in)
ENWW Specifications 31
Table 1-12 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Thick Glossy
● Heavy Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2
Media weight 16–17 lb (60 to 256 g/m2)
32 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Network and software specifications
Network interface
Table 1-13 Network interface
Item Specifications
Network OS Windows
● XP (32/64 bit)
● 2003 (32/64 bit)
● Vista (32/64 bit)
● Windows 7
● Windows 8
Mac
● Mac OS 10.5 –10.8
Linux
● RedHat 8–9
● Fedora Core 1–4
● Mandrake 9.2–10.1
● SuSE 8.2–9.2
Novell
● Netware 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)
Others
● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SumOS, SCO)
Network Protocols TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,
SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP, IPv6
IPX/SPX No
Ether Talk No
NetBIOS over TCP/IP Yes
Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x
IP Addressing Static IP Yes
Auto IP Yes
BOOTP Yes
DHCP Yes
SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Yes
Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Yes
ENWW Specifications 33
Table 1-13 Network interface (continued)
Item Specifications
Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Yes
Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Yes
Private MIB Yes
HP Compatibility Yes — Partially
SNMP Trap Yes
Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) No
LPR/LPD Yes
IPP Yes
Netware I-Print No
Netware NDPS No
Ether Talk No
Port 9100 Yes
Device Discovery DNS Yes
Dynamic DNS Yes
Multicast DNS (Bonjoure) Yes
WSD (including Print and Scan) Yes (Print and Scan)
SLP Yes
uPNP (SSDP) Yes
Software and solutions
Table 1-14 Software and solutions
Item Specifications
Application Anyweb Print N/A
Easy Printer Manager Windows/Mac
Easy Color Manager Windows/Mac
Easy Document Creator Windows
Net PC Fax Windows/Mac
Direct Printing Utility Windows
Easy Deployment Manager Windows
Easy Eco Driver Windows
Universal Printer Driver Windows
Universal Scan Driver Windows
Mobile Printing Google Cloud Print (GCP) Yes
34 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-14 Software and solutions (continued)
Item Specifications
Airprint Yes
Smart App Smart Workspace Yes
Workbook Composer Yes
Smart Color Manager Yes
Smart Service App Yes
Hancom Office Yes
Solution Device Management Fleet Admin Pro (UniThru)
Output Management CounThru Enterprise/Pro
Document Management and Distribution SmarThru Workflow 3.0
Security SecuThur Pro 1.0
Mobility SCP 1.0 (14.09)
Security Authentication (Local) Yes
Authentication (Network) Yes (SMB/Kerberos/LDAP/IPSec/EAP)
IP Address Filtering Yes (IPv4 Filtering/IPv6 Filtering/MAC
Filtering)
HDD Overwrite (Standard) 9
HDD Overwrite (Maximum Overwrites) Yes
Secure Print Yes
Encrypted Secure Print Yes
Encrypted PDF Mode (Encrypted Scanning) Yes
IP Sec Yes
Smart Card Authentication Yes
Options
Configuration options
HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660
1 2
9
3
8 5
7 6 4
ENWW Specifications 35
Number Component Product number
1 HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 ● E87640
– dn models: X3A87A
– du models: 5CM64A
– z models: X3A86A
● E87650
– dn models: X3A90A
– du models: 5CM65A
– z models: X3A89A
● E87660
– dn models: X3A93A
– du models: 5CM66A
– z models: X3A92A
2 HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G16A
3 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Y1G21A
Department
4 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Feeder Y1F98A
5 HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1G20A
6 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A
The following punch kits are available:
● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3
Accessory
● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4
Accessory
● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish
Accessory
7 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A
The following punch kits are available:
● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3
Accessory
● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4
Accessory
● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish
Accessory
36 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Number Component Product number
8 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A
The following punch kits are available:
● Y1G02A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3
Punch
● Y1G03A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4
Punch
● Y1G04A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish
Punch
9 HP LaserJet Department Job Separator Y1G15A
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Department Y1G22A
NOTE: Not shown in configuration.
The following accessories are also available:
● Y1G22A#BGJ — HP LaserJet Paper Tray
Heaters Accessory Department (110V)
● Y1G22A#B19 — HP LaserJet Paper Tray
Heaters Accessory Department (220V)
Options list
Table 1-15 Options list
Item Part numbers Remark
HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G168
HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A
Feeder
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Y1F21A
Department
HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1F20A
Fax Kit
Fax Multiline Kit
Foreign interface harness (FIH) Kit
HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Y1G01A
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Department Y1G22A For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accessory Y1G22A#BGJ For HCI/sHCI
Department (110V)
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Accessory Y1G22A#B19
Department (220V)
Wireless/NFC Kit
Wireless/NFC/BLE Kit
Additional Network Kit (Dual Network Kit)
ENWW Specifications 37
Table 1-15 Options list (continued)
Item Part numbers Remark
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A
HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Asia, and Africa)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch Y1G04A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Y1G10A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Asia, and Africa)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory Y1G11A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory Y1G12A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
HP LaserJet Inner/Booklet Finisher Staples Y1G13A ● Regular staples for the HP LaserJet
Inner Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher ● Regular saddle staples for the
have two staple slots. HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Staples Y1G14A ● Regular staples for HP LaserJet
Stapler/Stacker Finisher
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher
have two staple slots.
Option specifications
Table 1-16 Option specifications
Item Specification
HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Part number Y1F98A
Feeder
Capacity 520 x 2 sheets
Media Sizes ● Cassette 1: 148.5 mm x 210 mm —
297 mm x 432 mm (5.8 in x 8.2 in —
12 in x 18 in)
● Cassette 2: 148.5 mm x 210 mm —
297 mm x 432 mm (5.8 in x 8.2 in —
12 in x 18 in)
Media Types Plain/Thin/Bond/Hole Punched/Preprinted/
Recycled/Thin Cardstock/Letterhead/Thick/
Cotton/Colored/Archive/Thin Glossy/Heavy
Weight/Extra Heavy Weight
38 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-16 Option specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 71–90 g/m2 (18.5–24 lb/
Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91–105 g/m2 (25–28 lb/
Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper: 106–176 g/m2
(Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 1: 177–216 g/m2
(Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 2: 217–256 g/m2
(Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper 3: 257–300 g/m2
● Thin Paper: 60–69 g/m2 (16–19 lb/
Duplex)
● Cotton Paper: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Colored: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Preprinted: 71–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Recycled: 60–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Bond Paper: 105–120 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Letterhead: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Hole Punched Paper: 75–90 g/m2
(Duplex)
● Thin Cardstock: 105–163 g/m2
(Duplex)
● Thin Glossy: 106–163 g/m2 (Duplex)
Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:
Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: Yes
Dimensions 556 mm x 610 mm x 265 mm (22.3 in x 24
in x 10 in)
Weight Net 20 kg, Packing 23.5 kg
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray Part number Y1G21A
Department
Capacity 2000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,
Punched Paper
ENWW Specifications 39
Table 1-16 Option specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Media Weight 60 to 300 gsm
Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:
Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: No
HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Part number Y1F20A
Capacity 3000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,
Punched Paper
Media weight 60 to 300 gsm
Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:
Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: No
HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Part number Y1G16A
Dimensions 585 mm x 670 mm x 257 mm
Weight (Net) 18 kg
HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Part number Y1G01A
Capacity 125 sheets at (80 g/m2)
HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Part number Y1G00A
Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge
Stacking ● Top Tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80 gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at
80 gsm)
Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 50
sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet
● Stapling Positions: Front flat and
corner (45), Dual, Rear flat and corner
(45)
Saddle Stapling N/A
Offline Stapling N/A
Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes
40 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-16 Option specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Offset at Staple Job N/A
Output Stacking Face Down
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Part number Y1G18A
Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets stacking
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge
Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80
gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 3000 sheets (A4/LT at
80 gsm)
Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 65
sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet
● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners (Single ,
45 degree), Center (Double)
Offline Stapling Yes
Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes
Offset at Staple Job Yes
Output Stacking Face Down
HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Part number Y1G07A
Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge
Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80
gsm)
● Finishing Tray: 2000 sheets (A4/LT at
80 gsm)
Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 65
sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet
● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners (Single),
Center (Double)
Saddle Stapling Maximum Number of Sheets: 25 sheets
stapling with 80 g/m2 sheet
Offline Stapling Yes
Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes
Offset at Staple Job Yes
Output Stacking Face Down
1. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Part numbers 1. Y1G10A
2. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory 2. Y1G11A
3. HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish 3. Y1G12A
Accessory
ENWW Specifications 41
Table 1-16 Option specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
hole, Swedish 4
Paper Wight 52–300 g/m2
1. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G02A
Punch
2. Y1G03A
2. P LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4
Punch 3. Y1G04A
3. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Punch hole, Swedish 4
Paper Wight 52–256 g/m2
42 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Feeding system
Feeding system overview
The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism inside
the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller assembly, and exit
unit.
ENWW Feeding system 43
Main components and functions
Rollers
Figure 1-1 Rollers
1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 feed roller (optional)
2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 trans roller (optional)
3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 feed roller (optional)
4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor
5 Tray 2 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 17 Registration roller
6 Tray 3 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 18 Transfer roller
7 Tray 4 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 19 Exit roller (1st)
8 Tray 5 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 20 Exit roller (2nd)
44 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
9 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 21 Exit roller (trans)
10 Tray 2 feed roller 22 Duplex 1 roller
11 Tray 3 feed roller 23 Duplex 2 roller
12 Tray 3 trans roller 23 Duplex 3 roller
● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.
● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the feed
roller.
● Reverse roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed roller.
When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of the torque
limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of paper. As a
result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.
● Feed roller
– This roller transfers the paper sent from the feed/reverse roller to the registration roller.
● Registration roller
– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.
Table 1-18 Roller period table
Roller Periodic
OPC/Drum 94.5 mm
Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm
Magnetic roller (MR) 32.3 mm
Transfer roller 44.0 mm
Transfer roller (T2) 75.4 mm
Fuser Belt (HR) 110 mm
Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm
ENWW Feeding system 45
Sensor, motor, and solenoid
Figure 1-2 Sensor, motor, solenoid
Table 1-19 Sensor, motor, solenoid
Item Function
Tray 2 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper size
Tray 2 paper empty detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper empty
Tray 2 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 2 upper limit
Tray 2 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 2 paper Lead Edge
sensor
46 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-19 Sensor, motor, solenoid (continued)
Item Function
Tray 3 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper size
Tray 3 paper empty detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper empty
Tray 3 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 3 upper limit
Tray 3 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 3 paper Lead Edge
sensor
Tray 3 paper feed jam detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper feed jam
Tray 4 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper size
sensor
Tray 4 paper empty detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper empty
sensor
Tray 4 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 4 upper limit
sensor
Tray 4 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 4 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor
Tray 4/4 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 4/4 paper feed jam
(option) sensor
Tray 5 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper size detection
sensor
Tray 5 paper empty detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper empty
sensor
Tray 5 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 5 upper limit
sensor
Tray 5 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 5 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor
Paper registration jam detection sensor Detects Paper registration jam
Paper fuser-out jam detection sensor Detects Paper fuser-out jam
Output Tray 2 paper full detection Detects output Tray 2 paper full
sensor
Output 2 tray path and Return path Changes paper path
solenoid
Return motor Controls 2nd output tray and duplex printing
Output Tray 3 paper full detection Detects output Tray 3 paper full
sensor
Output 2 paper return detection sensor Detects Duplex Return position
1st Duplex motor Controls duplex printing
2nd Duplex motor Controls duplex printing
Duplex 1 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 1 jam
Duplex 2 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 2 jam
ENWW Feeding system 47
Table 1-19 Sensor, motor, solenoid (continued)
Item Function
Tray 1 feed assembly paper empty Detects Tray 1 feed assembly: paper empty
detection sensor
NOTE: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, that tray takes priority over trays 2, 3, 4, or 5.
Tray 1 feed assembly Controls Tray 1 feed assembly pickup roller
Tray 1 feed assembly paper width Detects Tray 1 feed assembly paper width
detection sensor
Tray 2 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate
Tray 3 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate
Tray 4 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate
Tray 5 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate
Paper Loop Detection sensor Detects paper loop between transfer Nip and fusing Nip
At warm-up, Detects the fuser jam
Cassette
The cassette stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.
Figure 1-3 Basic cassette
Table 1-20 Basic cassette
Item Description
1 Structure: Drawer Type
2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)
48 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-20 Basic cassette (continued)
Item Description
3 Paper type
● Plain paper: A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, 11 in x 17 in (Ledger), Statement, Legal
● Special Paper: Envelope (Tray 2 Only), Label, Transparency
4 Paper weight
● Plain paper: 60–300 g/m²
5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor
Pickup unit
When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of the
paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down. The feed
and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and that the feed
roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.
NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.
Figure 1-4 Pickup unit 1
Figure 1-5 Pickup unit 2
Registration unit
The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor. The registration roller clutch is located
between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on the transfer belt (for color), and it controls
ENWW Feeding system 49
power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the predetermined
registration point.
Figure 1-6 Registration roller
Tray 1 feeder assembly
The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.
Figure 1-7 Tray 1 feeder assembly
Specification
● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² paper standard)
● Media size: 98 mm x 148 mm – 320 mm x 1200 mm (3.87 in x 5.8 in – 12.6 in x 47.2 in)
● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 320 g/m²
● Feeding speed: 32 ppm, 40 ppm, 48 ppm Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)
50 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Paper separation
Figure 1-8 Paper separation
When the Tray 1 paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 printing job, the Tray
solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.
This machine uses a Feed and Reverse Roller (FRR) system for feeding paper. The friction between the reverse
roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.
ENWW Feeding system 51
Fuser unit
Fuser unit overview
This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.
This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying a combination of
heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This printer uses an instant fusing system (NIF type). The
fuser unit design for this model has improved. The fuser belt has been changed to require less heat capacity and
still fuse the toner properly. Additionally, the life has been improved by incorporating a sub-bush system with a
lubricant storage design.
Figure 1-9 Fuser unit
● Lamp halogen
The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of
axial direction. These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a
different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, the coils on the side heater lamp are
on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When the fusing belt rotates, the lamps do not
rotate.
● Belt fuser
The belt fuser gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The belt fuser
consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warm up and mode changing time. To prevent the
fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There is a nip inside the
fusing belt. Tension springs are used to keep a constant nip area where the fusing belt contacts the
pressure roller.
● Roller fuser pressure
The pressure roller makes sure there is a proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It is
made up of the soft silicone sponge rubber. The pressure roller is driven by the driving system and drives
the fusing belt.
52 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
● Thermistor (NC sensor)
The temperature of the fusing belt is maintained by NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) located
near the center and the end of the fusing belt.
● Thermostats
The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing belt
becomes abnormally hot as a result of a problem, such as a NC sensor malfunction. The thermostat is used
to prevent abnormal operation. When a thermostat is triggered, it must be replaced as well as the other
damaged parts in the fuser unit.
Fuser unit drive
Figure 1-10 Fuser drive
The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the pressure
roller.
Fuser unit temperature control
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors detect
the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.
ENWW Fuser unit 53
Figure 1-11 Fuser unit temperature control
Overheat protection
● The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:
– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 220°C for 20 seconds.
– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 230°C for 3 seconds.
– The relay off works when the belt temperature detected by the NC sensors is higher than 230°C.
● The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:
– Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.
– If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to the
fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens and cuts
power to the fusing lamp.
Loop control
The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.
54 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-12 Loop control
The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor speed
for the paper loop level.
ENWW Fuser unit 55
Image creation
Printing process overview
This printer uses four drum units, four development units, and four laser beams for color printing. Each drum
unit consists of a drum, charge roller, and cleaning blade. Each development unit consists of a magnetic roller
and mixing auger.
Figure 1-13 Printing process overview
The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the light from the laser scanner
assembly (B).
The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The
negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner (real image) on
each OPC drum is moved to the ITB (C) by the positive bias applied to the first transfer roller. All four toners (color
image) are transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the second transfer roller (D).
1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.
3. Development: The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface. This printer uses four independent drum and development units (one for each color).
4. Transfer:
● Image transfer: The first transfer roller opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the
ITB. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.
● Paper transfer: The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the ITB to the media.
5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after
image transfer to the paper.
6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at
the end of every job.
56 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Imaging unit
Imaging unit overview
This printer uses a tandem type drum and development units. It uses four color developing during one paper
path to increase color printing productivity.
The development units are not interchangeable, but the drum units for Y, M, and C color are interchangeable.
The black drum unit is independent. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm with a circumference of about 94.2 mm.
The drum unit has the charge roller to charge the drum surface and cleaning roller to clean the charge roller.
The e-label is the sub part of the drum unit. It stores the count information and other data. If the drum unit is
replaced, the count information stored by the old drum unit will not be kept.
Figure 1-14 Imaging unit
Drum drive
The color OPCs and magnetic roller are driven by each color motor. The OPC drum and magnetic roller are
powered by the coupling.
The Brushless Direct Current (BLDC) motor maintains constant speed. The speed sync for each color depends on
the BLDC motor.
Phase sync for each OPC job prints the pattern on the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) and is adjusted
automatically.
ENWW Image creation 57
Figure 1-15 Drum drive
Developer unit
This printer uses a dual-component development system that has four development units. Each new unit
contains 245 g of magnetic toner carrier (developer powder). The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic
(development) roller (A) by the two mixing augers (B). The diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm.
Each development unit has a toner carrier (TC) sensor (C). The TC sensor is used for controlling the operating
range of toner density.
58 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-16 Developer unit
Developer agitation
Two mixing augers (A) circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to
sufficiently mix the toner and developer.
Figure 1-17 Developer auger
Agitation occurs at the following times:
ENWW Image creation 59
● During the process control self-checking (warm up)
● During toner supply job
● During development job
If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the toner
in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.
Toner cartridge
When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:
● The YMC cartridge contains 570 g of toner and the K cartridge contains 840 g of toner. Additionally, the YMC
cartridge contains 55 g of carrier and K cartridge contains 80 g of carrier.
● The toner in the YMC cartridge is transferred to the Reservoir by the Spring-ETC.
● The toner in the K cartridge is transferred to the Spring-ETC by the Wheel-Paddle Toner and transferred to
the Reservoir by Spring-ETC.
Figure 1-18 Toner cartridge
60 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.
Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip
or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work in the future.
As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues to use
security measures to protect the quality of our customer experiences, maintain the integrity of our printing
systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication methods that change
periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in the future. HP printers and
original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When cartridges are cloned or
counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks, compromising the printing
experience.
*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP cannot
guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are using non-original
HP cartridges, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an original HP security chip or
unmodified HP electronic circuitry.
Intermediate transfer belt unit
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit overview
The toner on the four drums is transferred to the Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) by the first transfer roller.
The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the second transfer roller. The remaining
toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit.
This process is completed with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow above the C and M drums on the following
diagram shows the direction of the ITB rotation. The ITB is rotated by friction between the drive roller and the
ITB. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slipping.
There are three color plane registration (CPR) sensors and one photo sensor. Two CPR sensors are for line
position adjustment and one is for process control. The photo sensor monitors the position of the first transfer
rollers.
Figure 1-19 ITB unit
Table 1-21 ITB unit
1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
2 First Transfer Roller
ENWW Image creation 61
Table 1-21 ITB unit (continued)
3 ITB Drive Roller
4 Tension Roller
5 Photo Sensor
6 Cleaning Blade
7 Color Plane Registration (CPR) Sensor
8 Second Transfer Roller
9 Toner Collection Auger
10 Drum Unit
Transfer belt drive
The drive motor (A) drives the ITB (B) by using gears and the ITB drive roller (C).
The ITB (B) and black OPC (C) is synchronized by the drive motor (A).
Figure 1-20 Transfer belt drive
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaning
The intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner removes toner during printing. Belt cleaning is completed while the
ITB makes one rotation. The ITB drive motor drives the ITB cleaning motor.
The cleaning blade (A) in the ITB cleaner always contacts the ITB (B). The cleaning blade removes the used toner
from the ITB. The toner collection auger (C) transfers the waste toner to the toner collection unit.
The seal (D) on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by the driver roller is
transferred to the tension roller (E). The toner collection auger gear (F) drives the gear (G) and collects the toner.
62 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-21 ITB cleaning
Toner reservoir unit
Main function
● Toner Buffer Space (about 0.6 K page volume) which allows users to continue printing until a new toner
cartridge is delivered from purchase.
● A toner supply unit that is more accurate from the toner full sensing algorithm.
– Minimizes the remaining toner in toner cartridge.
– A uniform toner supply volume per second prevents an abnormal case of toner-density control error
in the development unit.
Working mechanism
● Toner level sensing method in the Reservoir unit:
– The toner level is checked by time with a floating actuator shuttering light sensor (toner full sensor).
● Toner supply to Reservoir unit:
ENWW Image creation 63
– As the toner level (High, Middle, and Low) in the reservoir unit decreases so does the toner bottle
supply motor 1500 ms, 900 ms, and 600 ms.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode and execute the toner dispense motor.
Service Mode > Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine Test Routines > Toner Dispense Motor (Y,M,C,BK)
NOTE: There is no test routine for the toner full sensor in the reservoir unit.
2. Check the gear noise and motor operation.
If the reservoir driving gear is working without abnormal noise, then each reservoir unit does not have a
mechanical problem.
Figure 1-22 Toner reservoir unit
64 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Laser scanner assembly
Laser scanner assembly overview
The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and four laser diodes (LD) units. The Laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of four OPC drums. For this process, the laser scanner assembly
has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, two F-Theta lenses, and two reflective mirrors on an optical path for each
color.
This Laser scanner assembly uses the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser from the rear
to the front. M Color and Y Color scan the laser from the front to the rear.
The laser scanner assembly has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line by step motor.
Figure 1-23 Laser scanner assembly
Laser scanning optical path
The laser from the laser scanner assembly is placed at intervals of 78 mm for each color. All colors use the same
polygon motor for oblique incidence.
The F2 lens (A) determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the secondary
scanning direction. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer. The primary scanning line slope difference is
adjusted by the skew adjustment in the laser scanner assembly.
ENWW Laser scanner assembly 65
Reflective mirrors (B) on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This setting is adjusted by the
manufacturer.
Figure 1-24 Laser scanning optical path
Table 1-22 Laser scanning optical path
Item Specification Remark
LD Unit Laser Diode: Quad Beam LD x 4 (for each color)
Driving IC: Dual LD x 8
P/Motor Speed ● E87640: 22,087 rpm
● E87650: 27,520 rpm
● E87660: 33,071 rpm
Speed ● E87640: 187 mm/s
● E87650: 233 mm/s
● E87660: 280 mm/s
H/W interface Interface with printer: 50 pin + 60 pin + 8 pin FFC + FFC + Wire
Laser synchronizing detectors
The laser scanner assembly has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA includes four sensors). The PD PBAs
are located at each corner of the laser optics housing unit.
The two PD PBAs detect the following:
● (A, B): Scanning start position for K, C
● (C, D): Scanning start position for M, Y
66 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-25 Laser synchronizing detectors
Main scan start detection
The PD PBAs detect four beams at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync) signal.
Data is scanned by Hsync.
The arrow in the previous diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black/Cyan and Yellow/
Magenta use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.
Automatic CPR adjustment
During automatic CPR adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the intermediate transfer
belt (ITB). The spaces between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front, center, and rear
CPR sensors. The controller takes the average of the spaces and then adjusts the following positions and
magnification:
● Sub scan line position for CMY
● Main scan line position for CMY
● Magnification ratio for CMY
● Skew for CMY
The ITB cleaning unit cleans the ITB after the patterns are measured.
ENWW Laser scanner assembly 67
Figure 1-26 Automatic CPR adjustment
● KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.
● KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.
Adjustment
● Sub Scan line position for CMY
The adjustment of the sub scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K (black). The
printer measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gaps
for a color are incorrect, the printer moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do
this, it changes the laser write timing for that color.
● Main Scan line position for CMY
When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the
laser write start timing for each scan line.
● Magnification Adjustment for CMY
When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock
frequency for the required color.
● Skew for CMY
68 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K (black).
Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this function.
Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following:
● ΔT = Temperature change of the laser scanner assembly between the temperature of the previous line
position adjustment and the current temperature.
● Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.
Interval During Print Job
Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions occurs
when the printer checks at the sheet interval:
● ΔT > Temperature threshold (laser scanner assembly temperature: [default 3°C])
● Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)
Toner Collection Unit Not-Installed/Installed
● Line position adjustment starts automatically when toner collection unit is removed and reinstalled.
Drum Unit or Developer Unit Replaced
● When the printer detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically
performed.
ITB Replaced
● When the printer detects a new ITB or other ITB, SVC engineers have to execute the adjustment manually.
ENWW Laser scanner assembly 69
Main Scan Skew Adjustment
Figure 1-27 Main scan skew adjustment
– The skew adjustment assembly (A) consists of the worm gear (1) for adjustment and worm gear (2).
When Color Plane Registration (CPR) executes, it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope
manually.
– The skew adjustment assembly (A) for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2
lens (B). This mechanism corrects main scan skew.
70 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Drive system
Pickup and cassette lift drive
Figure 1-28 Pickup and cassette lift drive
Table 1-23 Pickup and cassette lift drive
Power train Pickup: normal rotation (pickup input) counter rotation (cassette lift input)
● 1 PM STEP → normal rotation → 2 Gear (pickup driving)
● 1 PM STEP → counter rotation → 3 Gear → 4 5 Gear → 6 Gear & Coupler (cassette lift driving)
ENWW Drive system 71
Feed drive
Figure 1-29 Feed drive
Table 1-24 Feed drive
Power Train HP STEP → Feed & Tray 1 drive
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 5 E-Clutch & Gear (Tray 1 driving)
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 6 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 7 Pulley & Coupler (Feed Roller driving)
72 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Registration drive
Figure 1-30 Registration drive
Table 1-25 Registration drive
Power Train HP STEP → Registration driving
● 1 HP STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Registration Roller driving)
ENWW Drive system 73
Fuser release/exit drive
Figure 1-31 Fuser release/exit drive
Table 1-26 Fuser release/exit drive
Power Train BLDC → Fuser and exit driving
PM Step → Fuser release driving
● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser P/R driving)
● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Gear (exit driving)
● 5 PM Step → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Fuser Release driving)
Drive motors
The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.
74 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-32 Drive motor
Table 1-27 Drive motor
Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release driving
2 Fuser and Exit BLDC 1 Fuser and Exit driving
3 Main OPC, Development, BLDC 4 OPC and PTB Belt driving
and ITB
4 Registration assy HP-STEP 1 Registration driving
5 Feed/Tray 1 HP-STEP 1 Feed roller 1, 2, 3 driving
E-CLT 1 Feed/Tray 1 driving control
6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/cassette lift driving
(Reverse driving at cassette lift
driving)
7 Toner Supply and PM-STEP 4 Toner transfer (Reservoir →
Reservoir Development unit)
ENWW Drive system 75
Table 1-27 Drive motor (continued)
Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
8 Engage transfer PM-STEP 1 T1 Engage/Disengage driving
assembly
9 TCU PM-STEP 1 TCU driving
Main drive unit motors
Figure 1-33 Main drive unit motors
Table 1-28 Main drive unit motors
Power Train BLDC → OPC & Development & ITB driving
● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear & Coupler (ITB driving)
● 1 BLDC → 4 Gear & Coupler (K OPC driving)
● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear & Pulley → 5 Gear & Coupler (K Development driving)
● 7 BLDC → 8 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C OPC driving)
● 7 BLDC → 9 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C Development driving)
76 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Toner supply/reservoir drive
Figure 1-34 Toner supply/reservoir drive
Table 1-29 Toner supply/reservoir drive
Power Train PM Step → Toner Supply, Reservoir driving
● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Gear (Y, C Toner Supply driving)
● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 6 Gear (Photo Interrupt) → 7 Gear & Latch → 8 Gear (M, K Toner Supply driving)
● 9 PM Step → 10 Gear (Y, C Toner Reservoir driving)
● 9 PM Step → 11 Gear → 12 Gear (M, K Toner Reservoir driving)
ENWW Drive system 77
Engage transfer roller drive
Figure 1-35 Engage transfer roller drive
Table 1-30 Engage transfer roller drive
Power Train PM Step → Engage transfer roller driving
● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear (Engage transfer roller driving)
TCU drive
Figure 1-36 TCU drive
Table 1-31 TCU drive
Power Train PM Step → TCU driving
● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear (TCU driving)
78 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Flatbed Scanner System
Flatbed scanner system overview
The scanner converts a hardcopy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and Charge
Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage space or transfers
the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.
For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved by a wire.
It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.
The scanner system consists of the three following modules:
● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.
● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.
● Imaging module: Makes an image on the CCD.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap between
the original and the imaging lens.
Figure 1-37 Scanner system overview
The following describes the scan process:
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 79
1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.
2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.
3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.
4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.
To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this gap, the
HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.
Figure 1-38 Scan process
The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.
Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.
The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the green color
from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical image.
80 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to the
processor.
The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor consists of
approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the FR carriage and HR
carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.
Scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Figure 1-39 Image processing
Scanning system components
The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.
To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed. The motor
drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the carriage.
The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 81
Figure 1-40 Scanning system components
● FR Carriage
82 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-41 FR carriage
– LED lamp module
This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module. The
original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the heat sink
is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.
○ Light-guide
The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.
○ White LED
The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat deterioration.
○ Reflection holder
The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.
– Mirror #1
Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.
HR Carriage (mirror unit)
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 83
Figure 1-42 HR carriage
● Mirror #2 and #3
Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light. The
reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.
● Pulley
The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage move.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.
Imaging unit
The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.
Figure 1-43 Imaging unit
● Imaging lens
The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed CCD
sensor and pixel size.
● CCD PCA
The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD consists of
three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the image depends on the
voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal. The digital signal makes the
scanned image.
Wire driving
84 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and releases
the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.
Figure 1-44 Wire driving
Scanner glass (flatbed glass)
The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of tempered glass
and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.
Drive motor
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 85
The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the position and
maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing belt and pulley.
Timing belt
The timing belt has a regular sawtooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.
Figure 1-45 Timing belt
Paper size sensor
The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size sensor
uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.
Home sensor
The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photosensor.
Cover open sensor #1
When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size sensor is on or
off.
Cover open sensor #2
The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.
ADF glass
ADF glass scans the original through the ADF unit. The FR carriage reads the original as it passes. If the original is
contaminated, a horizontal black or white line might appear.
Shading sheet
86 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
The shading sheet detects white color in the base. Before every scan job, the scan module reads the shading
sheet to scan the image with the same color and brightness. If the original is contaminated, a vertical image
might occur.
Figure 1-46 Shading sheet
Caution for moving the scanner
Lock the FR and HR carriages to prevent damage when shipping or moving the printer.
When installing
After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking screw is
not removed scanner failure will occur.
1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.
2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.
Figure 1-47 Remove scan locking screw
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 87
When moving
When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.
1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the home position.
2. Remove the screw cap.
3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.
Figure 1-48 Tighten scan locking screw
88 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) du bundles (LX)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) (LX) overview
Figure 1-49 ADF (LX) overview
R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R7 R8 R9 R10 R11
Table 1-32 ADF (LX) overview
Part Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller
R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit
R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller
R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
Electrical parts location
Figure 1-50 LX ADF electrical parts location
Pick~ Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, RegistraƟon Feed Out
RegistraƟon 5. Paper Width
1. Cover Open
Roller
Exit Roller
7. Exit Idle
Scan In 6. Exit
Scan Out
Scan Scan CCD
ENWW Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) du bundles (LX) 89
Table 1-33 LX ADF electrical parts location
Callout Item Function
1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed
2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path
3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length
5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width
6 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing
7 Exit Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Exit Roller’ rotation
LX ADF Registration
Figure 1-51 LX ADF registration
Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller
ADF (du bundles) (LX)
Registration 1 times registration
LX ADF drive system
The ADF drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.
90 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-52 LX ADF drive system
Pickup Drive secƟon
RegistraƟon Motor secƟon
Feed Drive secƟon
The ADF drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that moves the paper.
● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup
● STEP Motor > Regi
● Clutch > Pickup
There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.
The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide pickup
assembly.
The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and
actuator.
LX ADF original pickup assembly
Figure 1-53 LX ADF pickup assembly
Pickup Drive secƟon
Pickup Drive Assy
Pickup Assy
Guide pickup Assy
After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.
ENWW Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) du bundles (LX) 91
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.
The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY is connected
to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the operation.
The ADF roller and pick roller are connected by the belt.
The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration roller. When
the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.
The normal process is:
● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor and
pickup clutch begin working. The pick roller then moves down and contacts the original in the tray.
● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.
● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters stand-by
status.
LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
Figure 1-54 LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
istraƟon(V)$)/(+'-$%)"
RegistraƟon Motor secƟon
The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper to the
ROLLER FEED.
The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the roller is
rotated for alignment.
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.
92 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
LX ADF Scanning position
Figure 1-55 LX ADF scanning position
Type Simplex Duplex
Scanning DN-LX White Bar White Bar
LX ADF Specification
du bundles (LX)
Capacity 100 pages
Scan Speed 80/160 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Registration 1 times registration
Motor 2 each
Stacker —
Scanning White Bar
MSO —
ENWW Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) du bundles (LX) 93
Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX)
Flow ADF overview
Figure 1-56 Flow ADF overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4
Table 1-34 Flow ADF overview
Part Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOCU F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICKUP ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)
R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)
R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)
R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit
R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the duplex white-roller
R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller
R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
94 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Sensors
Figure 1-57 Flow ADF sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width
9.Pickup 1. Paper Length
Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration
3.LIFT
PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE
6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT
Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER
16. Exit
14. SIM Scan
Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan
11. Pre Registration
10. MSO
Table 1-35 Flow ADF sensors
Callout Item Function
1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length
2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width
3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position
4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation
5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position
7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation
8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed
9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path
10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size
11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path
12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path
13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation
14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path
15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path
16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing
ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) 95
Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM)
Figure 1-58 Flow ADF Ultra Sonic Multifeed
Tx Sensor
Rx Sensor
● This sensor detects multi-feeds.
● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)
● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.
● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.
● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.
Flow ADF drive system
The flow ADF drive system consists of eight motors.
Figure 1-59 Flow ADF drive system
Pre-Registration Drive section
Registration Drive section
Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section
Scan Drive section
Lift Drive section
Scan in Roller Release Drive section
Exit Drive section
The Flow ADF drive system has eight sections: Pickup Release Drive, Pickup Drive, Pre-Regi Drive, Regi Drive,
Scan-in Roller Release Drive, Scan Drive, Exit Drive, and Lift Drive sections.
96 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Flow ADF document lifting drive system
Figure 1-60 Flow ADF document lifting drive system
● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR
● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray
● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray
● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement
● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.
Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System
Figure 1-61 Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System
ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) 97
● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality
● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER
● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper
Flow ADF specification
Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)
Scan Speed 120/240 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Registration 2 times registration
Motor 8 each
Stacker Lifting
Scanning White Roller/White Bar
MSO Support
Flow ADF Registration
Figure 1-62 Flow ADF Registration
Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor
Registration
Roller
The Flow ADF has two times registration.
Flow ADF Scanning Position
Figure 1-63 Flow ADF Scanning Position
98 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Type Simplex Duplex
Scanning Z-GX White Roller White Bar
Mixed Size Original (MSO)
The MSO detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.
Figure 1-64 MSO 1
Figure 1-65 MSO 2
ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) 99
Figure 1-66 MSO 3
Dual sensor cleaning method
● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.
● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.
● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.
● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.
Figure 1-67 Dual sensor cleaning method
Figure 1-68 Dual sensor cleaning method
100 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Flow ADF z bundles (GX)
Model Engine Scanner
Platen DN-sGX Z-GX
Color 40 ppm Same at Scan Speed USM Capacity Scan Speed USM Capacity
whole model
50 ppm 90/180 ipm X 250 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm
Mono 40 ppm
50 ppm
60 ppm
ENWW Flow Automatic Document Feeder (Flow ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) 101
Hardware configuration
The electronic circuit system consists of the following:
● Main controller (main board)
● OPE unit
● ADF (flow ADF/ADF) controller
● HVPS board
● LVPS board
● Fuser drive assembly
Electronic circuit diagram
Figure 1-69 Electronic circuit diagram
The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.
The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives copy data
from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video bitmap data. It
controls all modules required to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN, fuser, and so on.
The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the life of the toner cartridge,
drum, and developer units through I2C.
The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 320 GB SATA HDD to
control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.
A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy saving
algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to display the system
information on the control panel.
102 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user actions or the
main controller.
The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.
The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF controller
communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.
The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls power to the
fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.
Circuit board locations
The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:
ENWW Hardware configuration 103
Figure 1-70 Circuit board locations
Main controller
NOTE: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Take care to
not use the incompatible Main Controller during replacement.
104 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Main controller for previous model
The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 4 GB), Micro SD (4 GB), 1 G Ethernet
PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection,
motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.
The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other device
(such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, Modem) by UART.
Main controller block diagram
Figure 1-71 Block diagram
ENWW Hardware configuration 105
Main controller clock diagram
Figure 1-72 Clock diagram
M 41T81
RTC with IRQ
32.768Khz
CrystalInput
RTS5401
U SB3.0 H U B
12M hz
Crystal
Input
A TSA M D A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
20E15 D D R3 8G b
D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
12M hz K4B8G 1646B
Crystal
Input
RTC D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz)
N .C
D D R3 8G b
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N K4B8G 1646B
12M hz CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
M AC0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1 RTL8211 Input
M AC1 NETWORK OPTION PBA
PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1
PCI_REFCLK_N RTL8211 Input
CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)
U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input Clk1 SC AN0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N
U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)
D CIS
U SB3H _REFCLK_N SC AN1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N
106 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Main controller connection information for previous model
Figure 1-73 Connection information
1 OUTPUT 12 FINISHER 23 Laser scanner 34 CCDM
assembly 1 COLOR
2 FUSER DRIVE 13 OPC E-Label/T1 24 Laser scanner 35 Flow ADF
assembly 2 COLOR
3 FUSER DRAWER 14 OPC HOME SENS 25 HVPS COLOR 36 HDD POWER
4 TB/E-Label 15 OPC BLDC COLOR 26 USB HOST 1/2 37 HDD SIGNAL
5 TONER SUP/RES 16 TC SENS/RES FULL 27 USB DEVICE 38 SIDE FAN
6 CPR/CTD COLOR 17 LVPS TYPE5 28 NETWORK 39 MSOK
7 Registration 18 HVPS POWER/ 29 EFI POWER 40 SD CARD
assembly/T1 POS Laser scanner
SENS assembly SKEW
8 PICKUP 1/2 19 LVPS TYPE4 30 FIH JOINT 41 FAX JOINT
9 FEED/Registration 20 FRONT IF COLOR 31 UI IF 42 2ND NETWORK
assembly MOT
10 SIDE 21 Fuser drive 32 USB HOST/HUB 43 EFI SIGNAL
assembly IF
11 dual cassette 22 Laser scanner 33 DCIS 44 CPU FAN
feeder (DCF) IF assembly PD
ENWW Hardware configuration 107
Information
● Part Number: B5L47-60101
● Part Name: PBA-MAIN
Main controller
The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 6 GB), eMMC (4 GB)1 G Ethernet
PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection,
motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.
The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other device
(such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, and Modem) by UART.
Main controller block diagram
Figure 1-74 Block diagram
O P E IR
IR P B A
C h3
FU S E R
10.1" C h2 PTB SC A N N ER
T FT LC D
TO N ER C R U M
C h1 O PC C R U M D SD F
U S B 3.0 H U B P B A
R TC
W IFI/N FC M O D U LE C h0
D E B U G _M C B
FR O N T 2 nd N W
R T S 5411 C h0 P LA T E N
C A R D R EA D ER U SB D IM M C h1
D E B U G _S C B
4Port H U B H O ST
M S O K /T P M C h2
D E B U G _U I
C h3
E N G IN E P A N E L
LC D C h4
A T S A M D 2E 15
C on. I2C SPI S C A N IF S C A N IF
C h5
CH0 CH1 D SD F
R EA R U SB
U SB H O ST
R T S 5401 3.0
C h6
DCF
1/2 4Port H U B H O ST C h7
FIN IS H E R
C h9
R EA R U SB UART E FI
U SB 3.0 C h10
M O D EM 0
D EVIC E D E V IC E C h11
M O D EM 1
D D R 3 6G B DDRC
FU S E R FU S E R U N IT
O n-board 4G B 800M hz
D IM M 2G B 32bit
N C TH 1 C /D N C TH 2 C /D
M A G IC 12B it AD C A T S A M D 2E 15
IO ExternalAD C 12b A N A LO G M U X
A N A LO G M U X READ M H V YM C K, TH V YM C K
M P SIZE / PAPER SIZE1,2 / ADC TC YM C K / C TD ,AC R / FU SER / W TB
IN N ER, O U TTER, EXIT, LSU TEM P 1.8V
H U M ID ITY, M O D EL SEL, AC Level E FI V ID E O
P C Iex C O N T R O LLE R
Step M otor FB / 24V FB
* C olor m odel
EN G IN E
STEP M O T
PIC KU P1/2, FEED , REG I, T1 EN G AG E,
D R V 8825
X15
A 3000 M AC0 R T L8211E
G igabit phy
R J45
B ASE
D U PLEX_RET/1/2, SKEW Y/M /C , S I-7321M CTRL.
W TB , FU SER RELEASE, TO N ER SU PPLY X2 R T L8211E R J45
YM /C K, TO N ER RESERVO IR YM /C K, M AC1
A N 44061A G igabit phy EXTEN D
C ST LO C K, X1 O PTIO N KIT
FA N SA TA
SEN SO R EXIT1/2/3/4,SM PS(LX/G X), SA TA
2.5", 320G B
EM PTY 1/2, LIFT1/2, PRE FEED 1/2, FEED C PU , LSU , D EVE,SID E,
REG I, M P_EM PTY/SIZEL/W , C U RL2, FU SER O U T CTRL. G P IO
FU SER IN /O U T, B IN _FU LL_EXIT1/2, PW M
D U PLEX_JAM 1/2, D U PLEX_RETU RN , B LD C 4B E A M LS U
PAPER_SIZE1/2, W ASTE_IN STALL, O PC Y,M ,C ,K/ITB , YM CK
O PC _PH ASE Y/M /C /K, RESERVO IR Y/M /C /K, FU SER LS U C CTRL. LD 1,2,3,4
TO N ER SU P YM /C K, ITB H O M E, FU SER PO S, LSU _M O T1
C O VER O PEN FRO N T/SID E, H V PS VD O 1B _YM C K
SC AN H O M E / APS 1,2 SH U TTER AC R, M H V YM C K
VD O 2B _YM C K
PLATEN C O VER O PEN 1,2 D EV D C YM C K H PV C VD O D ATA VD O 3B _YM C K
D EV AC VPP YM C K
VD O 4B _YM C K
S O LE N O ID / C LT D EV AC
C LT : M P D EV AC EN YM C K
SO L : M P / EXIT TH V1 YM C K
TH V2(C V/C C ) / TH V eM M C
DC M OT C LEAN MMC CTRL. 4G B
AC R SH U TTER, C ST LO C K 1/2 SAW / FU SER B IAS B oot D evice
108 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Main controller clock diagram
Figure 1-75 Clock diagram
32.768Khz
M 41T81
Crystal Input RTC w ith IRQ
12M hz
RTS5401 A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
Crystal
U SB3.0 H U B D D R3 2G B
Input D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
(4G b*8*4ea)
RTC D D R3 2G B
(4G b*8*4ea)
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz) D D R3 2G B
N .C
12M hz
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N (4G b*8*4ea)
CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 2G b_tem p
(4G b*8*4ea)
M AC 0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input
PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz)
M AC 1 N ETW O RK O PTIO N PBA
D IF_CLK_P M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
PCI_REFCLK_N N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
D IF_CLK_N M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input
CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)
U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N SC AN 0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N
U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)
D IF_CLK_P
U SB3H _REFCLK_N D CIS
D IF_CLK_N SC AN 1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N
ENWW Hardware configuration 109
Main controller connection information
Figure 1-76 Connection information
1 OUTPUT 12 FINISHER 23 Laser scanner 34 DCIS
assembly 1 COLOR
2 FUSER DRIVE 13 OPC E-Label/T1 24 Laser scanner 35 CCDM
assembly 2 COLOR
3 FUSER DRAWER 14 OPC HOME SENS 25 HVPS COLOR 36 Flow ADF
4 TB/E-Label 15 OPC BLDC COLOR 26 USB HOST 1/2 37 HDD POWER
5 TONER SUP/RES 16 TC SENS/RES FULL 27 USB DEVICE 38 HDD SIGNAL
6 CPR_CTD COLOR 17 LVPS TYPE5 28 NETWORK 39 CPU FAN
7 Registration 18 HVPS POWER/ 29 EFI POWER 40 SIDE FAN
assembly/T1 POS Laser scanner
SENS assembly SKEW
8 PICKUP 1/2 19 LVPS TYPE4 30 FIH JOINT 41 MSOK
9 FEED/Registration 20 FRONT IF COLOR 31 HUB IF 42 FAX JOINT
assembly MOT
10 SIDE 21 Fuser drive 32 USB HOST/HUB 43 EFI SIGNAL
assembly IF
11 dual cassette 22 Laser scanner 33 UI IF 44 2ND NETWORK
110 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description
feeder (DCF) IF assembly PD ENWW
45 DDR3 DIMM
Information
● Part Number: JC92-02958A
● Part Name: PBA-MAIN
Master system operation key (MSOK)
MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM, and a X-E-
Label. The flash memory (4 MB), EEPROM (256 KB) and X-E-Label are used for all system operations such as
system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information.
NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to retain the
system information.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in the
same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.
Figure 1-77 MSOK
1 Main PCA I/F connector
Formatter cabling
Figure 1-78 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX ADF only)
sGX/GX ADF Only Cable Rev A CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN ((J8)) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board g
Engine Control ((J36)) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A
w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) Std sGX/GX
CP Sideband ((J16))
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45
Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0
Opt
2x Host Ports Device
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A
System)
ENWW Hardware configuration 111
Figure 1-79 Formatter cabling E87640 DU (LX) models only
LX ADF Only Cable Rev A
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN ((J8)) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board g
Engine Control ((J36)) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A
CP HDMI (J30)
CP Sideband ((J16))
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45
Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0
Opt
2x Host Ports Device
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A
System)
112 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
ENWW
Cable Rev A
LX ADF Only
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN ((J8)) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control ((J36)) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A
CP HDMI (J30)
CP Sideband ((J16))
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Fan (J47) RJ45
Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0
Figure 1-80 Formatter cabling E87640 (DU (LX) models only
Opt Device
2x Host Ports
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
Hardware configuration 113
Cable Rev A
sGX/GX ADF Only CPS (J28)
Cable
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX
Engine HDMI
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN ((J8)) JC39 - 002567A
Formatter cabling
Controller Board Engine
g Control ((J36)) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)
NA
Jxx
J29
Table 1-39 Formatter cabling
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A
w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) Std sGX/GX
LVPS
From
CP Sideband ((J16))
114 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description
JC39-02583A
Main board
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
Figure 1-81 Formatter cabling (sGX and GX only)
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Fan (J47) RJ45
To
only)
Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0
Opt Device
Formatter
2x Host Ports
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
Accelerator (sGX/GX ADF
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
Purpose
Power for accelerator
High speed print data (JC39-02584A)
ENWW
Table 1-39 Formatter cabling (continued)
Cable Jxx From To Purpose
Engine LAN J8 Main board Formatter High speed print data (JC39-02584A)
Engine control J36 Main board Formatter Low level engine control (JC39-02553A)
HIP2 USB J12 Formatter HIP USB for HIP
Front walk-up USB J20 Formatter Front of printer USB for walk up
CP HDMI J30 Formatter CP Data to CP
CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake lines, display power,
keyboard (JC39-02583A)
Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF
IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from Island of Data
Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory
Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter
1 These cables are bundled together.
ENWW Hardware configuration 115
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5)
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)
The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.
Figure 1-82 LVPS PCA (Type 5)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3/4 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
4 OUTPUT_DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
Specification
● General input/output voltage
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 8.0 A (110 V)/5.0 A (220 V)
– Output power: 275 W
○ DC 5 V: 35 W
○ DC 24 V: 240 W
116 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00249A JC44-00250A
Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H
Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● DC output connector (CN2)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
● DC output connector (CN3)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 +24V1 Power
2 GND 24 V ground
3 +24V2 Power
4 GND 24 V ground
5 +24V3 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V4 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
● Signal Connector (CN4)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND
ENWW Hardware configuration 117
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3R)
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 1 each, Type3 x 1 each)
The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.
Figure 1-83 LVPS PCA (Type 3R)
1 INPUT_AC Power (CON1)
2 Fuser AC Power (CON2)
3 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3 and +5V1 (CON3)
4 Signal_24 V on/off, Relay on, Fuser on (CON4)
Specification
● General input/output voltage
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 10.0 A (110 V)/8.0 A (220 V)
– Output power: 164 W
○ DC 5 V: 20 W
○ DC 24 V: 144 W
118 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00222E JC39-01202A
Part name LVPS 110V Type 3R LVPS 220V Type 3R
Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● Fuser AC Power Connector (CN2)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input for fuser
2 AC_N
● DC output connector (CN3)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 +5V1 DC 5 V
2 GND Ground
3 +24V1 DC 24 V
4 GND Ground
5 +24V2 DC 24 V
6 GND Ground
7 +24V3 DC 24 V
● Signal Connector (CN4)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 GND Ground
2 24 V On/Off Active Low
3 Relay on Active High
4 24 V Bias for photo triac, relay
5 Fuser on Active High
ENWW Hardware configuration 119
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4)
NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)
The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.
Figure 1-84 LVPS PCA (Type 4)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
Specification
● General input/output voltage
– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)
– Output power: 205 W
○ DC 5 V: 25 W
○ DC 24 V: 180 W
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00091D JC44-00092D
Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4
120 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● DC output connector (CN4)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
5 +24V1 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V2 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
9 +24V3 Power
● Signal Connector (CN3)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND
Fuser drive assembly
This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.
ENWW Hardware configuration 121
Figure 1-85 Fuser drive board
1 Option Heater
2 Fuser Lamp
3 Fuser drive assembly I/F
4 LVPS (Type 5)
5 Main Switch
6 AC Inlet
7 Option Heater Switch
8 LVPS (Type 4)
9/10 Reactor
Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00235B JC44-00236B
Part name Fuser Drive Board 110V Fuser Drive Board 220V
High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA
The HVPS board generates 15 high-voltage channels, including ITHV (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER, SAW, and
2THV(+/-).
122 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Figure 1-86 HVPS PCA
Table 1-44 HVPS PCA Connections
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 DETECT
2 PWM_ITHV_C PWM signal
3 PWM_ITHV_K PWM signal
4 PWM_ITHV_M PWM signal
5 READ_ITHV_C Output voltage
6 PWM_ITHV_Y PWM signal
7 READ_ITHV_K Output voltage
8 READ_ITHV_M Output voltage
9 PWM_FUSEBIAS PWM signal
10 READ_ITHV_Y Output voltage
11 PWM_SAW PWM signal
12 READ_MHV_Y Output voltage
13 PWM_THV2_MINUS PWM signal
14 READ_MHV_M Output voltage
15 PWM_THV2_P_CV PWM signal
ENWW Hardware configuration 123
Table 1-44 HVPS PCA Connections (continued)
PIN assign PIN name Description
16 READ_MHV_C Output voltage
17 READ_THV2 Output voltage
18 PWM_MHV_Y PWM signal
19 PWM_DEVE_DC_K PWM signal
20 PWM_MHV_M PWM signal
21 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_K PWM signal
22 PWM_MHV_C PWM signal
23 PWM_DEVE_DC_C PWM signal
24 PWM_MHV_K PWM signal
25 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_C PWM signal
26 PWM_THV2_P_CC PWM signal
27 PWM_DEVE_DC_M PWM signal
28 THV2_CV_SELECT Input signal
29 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_M PWM signal
30 N.C
31 PWM_DEVE_DC_Y PWM signal
32 READ_MHV_K Output voltage
33 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_Y PWM signal
34 PWM_DEVE_AC_VFREQ PWM signal
35 DETECT
CN2
1 24 V Input voltage
2 24 V Input voltage
3 24 V Input voltage
4 3.3 V Input voltage
5 GND GND
6 GND GND
7 GND GND
8 READ_HVPS_24 Output voltage
9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y nEN signal
10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M nEN signal
11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C nEN signal
12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K nEN signal
124 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Table 1-44 HVPS PCA Connections (continued)
PIN assign PIN name Description
Connections
CN3 ITHV Y/M/C/K Output voltage
CN5 2THV +/- Output voltage
CN6 MHV Y Output voltage
CN7 MHV M Output voltage
CN8 MHV C Output voltage
CN9 MHV K Output voltage
CN10 DEVE Y Output voltage
CN11 DEVE M Output voltage
CN12 DEVE C Output voltage
CN13 DEVE K Output voltage
CN4
1 FUSER_BIAS Output voltage
2 SAW_PLATE Output voltage
Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V
● Output voltage:
– MHV Y/M/C/K: -1395 V
– DEVE DC Y/M/C/K: -606 V
– DEV AC Y/M/C/K: Vpp 920 V
– THV1 Y/M/C/K: 45.5 uA
– THV2+(CV): 2020 V
– THV2+(CC): 25.5 uA
– THV2–: –1310 V
– FUSER: 998 V
– SAW: -998 V
Information
● Part number: JC44-00240B
● Part name: HVPS
ENWW Hardware configuration 125
Eraser PCA
The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.
Figure 1-87 Eraser PCA
Fuser PCA
The Fuser PCA includes a CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. The Fuser PCA provides a connection
interface for the pressure sensor.
Figure 1-88 Fuser PCA
1 Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F
2 Pressure Sensor (Not used)
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-FUSER
Waste Sensor PCA
The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.
Figure 1-89 Waste sensor PCA
126 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX
Paper Size sensor PCA
The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.
Figure 1-90 Paper size sensor PCA
Flow ADF PCA
The flow ADF-PCA uses the R5F562TAEDFP (100 MHz Main Clock) for controlling the flow ADF unit and interfaces
with the main board through UART.
The flow ADF-PCA has three motor driver ICs to control the BLDC/step motor and controls one BLDC motor, two
step motors, one clutch, one fan, and 11 sensors.
Figure 1-91 Flow ADF PCA
1 Scan Position 1/2, Registration, Feed Sensor
2 Pickup, Paper Detect, Cover Open Sensor
3 BLDC Motor, Registration Motor, Pickup Clutch
ENWW Hardware configuration 127
4 Output Sensor, Fan
5 Paper Length 1/2, Width Sensor
6 Scan Joint PCA
Information
● Part number: JC92-02964A
● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA
● Part number: JC92-02964B
● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA (sGX)
● Part number: JC92-02962A
● Part name: LX (du models) ADF PCA
Scan joint PCA
The scan joint PCA has a Bipolar Step Motor driving IC and interfaces with the WLED, APS sensor (1, 2), cover
open sensor (1, 2), home position sensor, and main board.
The scan joint PCA also functions as the relay board to interface with the ADF I/F and power board.
Figure 1-92 Scan joint PCA
1 WLED IF PCA
2 MAIN PCA
3 Cover Open 2, Home Sensor
4 ADF/flow ADF PCA
5 Image Scanner Motor
Information
● Part number: JC92-02781A
● Part name: PCA-SCAN JOINT
128 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
CCDM PCA
The CCDM PCA is used in the scanner unit and converts the reflected light from an original document to electrical
signals. The reflected light from an original document is converted to three-color analog signals: red, green, and
blue. The ADC converts each analog signal to digital. For a high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is
converted to a LVDS format with serialization. The CCDM PCA includes the CCD, ADC, Logic IC, and so on.
Figure 1-93 CCDM PCA
1 MAIN PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-CCDM
WLED IF PCA
The WLED IF PCA interfaces with the WLED and sensors inside the Image Scanner unit.
Figure 1-94 WLED IF PCA
1 APS1, APS2 Sensor
2 Cover Open1 Sensor
3 SCAN JOINT PCA
4 WLED PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-WLED IF
ENWW Hardware configuration 129
WLED PCA
The WLED PCA consists of two WLEDs used as scanner light.
Figure 1-95 WLED PCA
1 WLED PCA
Information
● Part number:
● Part name: PBA-WLED
130 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)
Figure 1-96 Paper feeding system
Table 1-51 DCF paper feeding system
Tray number Roller number Roller name Function
4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed
roller.
4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.
roller
4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
4/5 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic
machine.
4/5 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
5 R8 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
5 R9 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed
roller.
5 R10 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.
roller
5 R11 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
5 R12 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 131
Paper path
Figure 1-97 Paper path
132 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Figure 1-98 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Table 1-52 DCF electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Tray number Callouts Description Function
4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 3.
4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of Tray 3.
4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
4/5 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.
5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 4.
5 S6 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of Tray 4.
5 S7 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R9-R10 and
R11-12.
4 S8 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size in
Tray 3.
5 S9 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size in
Tray 4.
4/5 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of right cover.
4 M1 Tray 3 pickup motor
5 M2 Tray 4 pickup motor
4/5 M3 Tray feed motor
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 133
PCA connection
Figure 1-99 PCA connection and DCF
Table 1-53 DCF PCA connection
Connector number Item number Connection
CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F
CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F
CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F
CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F
CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F
CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F
CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE
CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER
CN302 11 SUB I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN501 13 T4 SENSOR
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR
134 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
High capacity input tray (HCI)
Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)
Figure 1-100 Paper feeding system
Table 1-54 HCI paper feeding system
Tray number Roller number Roller name Function
4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed
roller.
4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.
roller
4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
4 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic
machine.
4 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
ENWW High capacity input tray (HCI) 135
Paper path
Figure 1-101 HCI paper path
136 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Figure 1-102 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Table 1-55 HCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Tray number Callouts Description Function
3/4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in main tray.
3/4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main
tray.
3/4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
3/4 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.
3/4 S5 Tray insertion sensor Detects tray insertion.
3/4 S6 Knockup home sensor Detects home position of knock-plate.
3/4 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in
main tray.
3/4 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in
main tray.
3/4 S9 Shift tray no paper sensor Detects paper empty in sub tray.
3/4 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.
3/4 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.
3/4 S12 Shift plate home sensor Detects home position of shift plate.
3/4 S13 Shift plate end sensor Detects end position of shift plate.
3/4 S14 Solenoid home sensor Detects home position of solenoid.
3/4 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of solenoid.
3 M1 Tray pickup motor
3 M2 Tray feed motor
3 M3 Tray lift up motor
3 M4 Paper shift motor
3 A1 Solenoid
ENWW High capacity input tray (HCI) 137
PCA connection
Figure 1-103 HCI PCA connection
Table 1-56 HCI PCA connection
Connector number Item number Connection
CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F
CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F
CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F
CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER
CN302 11 SUB I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR
138 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)
Figure 1-104 Paper feeding system
Table 1-57 sHCI paper feeding system
Roller number Roller name Function
R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.
R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed roller.
R3 Reverse (separation) roller Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.
R4 Idle roller Transports paper to the feed roller.
R5 Feed roller Makes paper transportation smooth.
ENWW Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 139
Paper path
Figure 1-105 sHCI paper path
140 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Figure 1-106 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Table 1-58 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions
Callouts Description Function
S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in tray.
S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main tray.
S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.
S4 Paper level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.
S5 Paper level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.
S6 Install sensor 1 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the basic
machine.
S7 Install sensor 2 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the basic
machine.
SW1 Top door open switch Detects opening of the top door.
M1 Tray pickup motor Drives the pickup roller.
M2 Tray feed motor Drives the feed roller
M3 Tray lift up motor Lifts up the tray.
ENWW Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 141
PCA connection
Figure 1-107 sHCI PCA connection
Table 1-59 sHCI PCA connection
Connector number Item number Connection
CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F
CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/sHCI HOME I/F
CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK
CN301 6 MAIN I/F
CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F
CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F
CN1101 12 BBP I/F
CN501 13 T4 SENSOR
CN502 14 T3 SENSOR
142 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW
2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement
● HP service and support
● Order parts, accessories, and supplies
● How to use the parts list and diagrams
● ESD precautions
● Service approach
● Maintenance
● Main parts
● Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
● 2000-sheet HCI (department)
● 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only)
ENWW 143
HP service and support
Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners
Channel partners, go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based Interactive
Search Engine (WISE).
Access WISE for Channel partners
1. Select Services & Support, and then select Services Delivery.
2. Select Technical Support, and then select Technical Documentation.
Find information about the following topics
● Service manuals
● Service advisories
● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting
● Install and configure
● Printer specifications
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Warranty and regulatory information
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel
HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:
Americas (AMS)
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/ams-enWISE - English
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/ams-esWISE - Spanish
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/ams-ptWISE - Portuguese
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/ams-frWISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/apj-enWISE - English
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/apj-jaWISE - Japanese
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/apj-koWISE - Korean
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/apj-zh-HansWISE - Chinese (simplified)
144 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/apj-zh-HantWISE - Chinese (traditional)
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/apj-thWISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
– https://support.hp.com/wise/home/emea-enWISE - English
ENWW HP service and support 145
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Ordering
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
or
partsurfer.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the
HP SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.
How to use the parts list and diagrams
The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list
table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part
number, and the description of each part. When the part listed in the table has a link and page number, clicking
the link advances you to the Remove and Replace procedures for that part. If a part is not listed in the table, then
it is not a field replacement unit (FRU).
NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components
described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.
146 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
Service approach
Precautions when replacing parts
Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.
● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.
● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.
● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.
● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
Precautions when handling PCA
Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.
● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA
– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
● Precautions when replacing a PCA
– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.
– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.
● Precautions when checking a PCA
ENWW ESD precautions 147
– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.
– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.
– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their
original positions.
– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.
Before performing service
● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.
● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.
● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.
● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.
After performing service
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
148 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:
Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.
4. Print a configuration page.
5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.
6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
Copy-quality test
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.
2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results
Fax-quality test
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.
2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.
3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.
Parts removal order
For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the front of the
printer for correct orientation.
ENWW Service approach 149
Maintenance
Machine cleaning for maintenance
Cleaning the laser scanner assembly window
1. Open the front cover and push both hooks to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
Figure 2-1 Remove the TCU
2. Remove the laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool located on the front cover.
Figure 2-2 Remove laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool
150 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Insert the laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool into each color entrance.
Figure 2-3 Laser scanner assembly color entrances
Figure 2-4 Laser scanner assembly color entrances
4. Slowly remove and reinsert the cleaning tool.
5. Repeat step 4 at least four times for each laser scanner assembly window.
Cleaning the paper dust stick
The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A clean the paper dust
stick message will appear. This is when the paper dust stick must be cleaned. Use the following procedure to
complete this task.
1. Open the front door.
ENWW Maintenance 151
Figure 2-5 Open the front door
2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
Figure 2-6 Remove the TCU
152 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Pull out the paper dust stick.
Figure 2-7 Remove paper dust stick
4. Remove the paper dust.
Figure 2-8 Remove the paper dust
5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.
Figure 2-9 Install the paper dust stick
ENWW Maintenance 153
6. Insert the toner collection unit (TCU) until it locks in place on each side.
Figure 2-10 Install the TCU
7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat Steps 3
and 4.
Figure 2-11 Close the front door
Cleaning the scan glass
▲ Open the flow ADF unit. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.
154 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-12 Clean the scanner glass
ENWW Maintenance 155
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX/du models)
1. Open the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-13 Open document feeder unit
2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.
Figure 2-14 Clean document feeder white bar (LX/du models)
CIS
Simplex
White bar
Duplex
White bar
Cleaning the flow ADF white bar and CIS
1. Open the ADF unit, peel back the white backing (callout 1), and then release the green tab (callout 2).
156 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-15 Peel back the white backing and release one tab
2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex white bar
(callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.
Figure 2-16 Clean flow document feeder white bar
ENWW Maintenance 157
Main parts
Main assembly
NOTE: Flow automatic document feeder: sGX; dn/z bundles: GX.
158 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW Main parts 159
Figure 2-17 Main assembly
49
30
43
160 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-1 Main assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Cassette tray 2 JC90-01610A 1
2 Cassette tray 3 JC90-01611A 1
5 HVPS 24V JC44-00240B on page 166 1
6 Laser scanner unit JC97-04863A on page 170 1
7 Fan type 8 JC93-01414A on page 175 1
8 HP LaserJet yellow developer unit JC96-12501A on page 178 1
9 HP LaserJet magenta developer unit JC96-12502A on page 178 1
10 HP LaserJet cyan developer unit JC96-12503A on page 178 1
11 HP LaserJet blk developer unit JC96-12503A on page 178 1
12 Paper dust brush JC93-01026B on page 184 1
13 Image transfer belt assembly JC98-05425A on page 191 1
13-1 ITB cleaner blade JC93-01377A on page 187 1
15 Image scanner assembly (flat bed) JC97-04907A on page 197 1
16 White backing (LX) JC63-05410A on page 211 1
16 White backing (GX) JC63-05795A on page 214 1
17 ADF LX du model whole unit JC97-05074A on page 730 1
17 Flow ADF-GX JC97-04955A 1
17 Non-Flow ADF-sGX JC97-04956A 1
18 Exit assembly JC90-01369A on page 221 1
18-1 Exit assembly, second JC90-01374A 1
18-2 Exit assembly, first JC90-01370A 1
19 220V fuser assembly JC82-00483A on page 230 1
19 110V fuser assembly JC82-00477A on page 230 1
22 Right door assembly JC95-02092A on page 216 1
29 Fuser drive board, 220V JC44-00236B on page 233 1
29 Fuser drive board, 110V JC44-00235B on page 233 1
30 LVPS 220V Type 5H JC44-00250A on page 237 1
30 LVPS 110V Type 5H JC44-00249A on page 237 1
34-1 Fan type 7 JC31-00161A on page 241 1
38 Toner collection unit X3A92-67926 on page 164 1
40 Return guide JC61-07088A 1
41 HDD bracket JC93-01239B 1
42 HDD 320GB - Main PCA HDD 5851-6712 on page 248 1
43 Tray Heater (110v) Y1G22-67901 1
ENWW Main parts 161
Table 2-1 Main assembly (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
43 Tray Heater (220v) Y1G22-67902 1
49 PCA-Main Board w/heat sink JC82-00543A on page 252 1
Not shown Pulsar Control Panel B5L47-60101 on page 283 1
Not shown Formatter X3A92-60003 on page 275 1
Not shown Formatter X3A92-60001 on page 279 1
Not shown Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) X3A62-60001 on page 260 1
Not shown Island of Data board (du models) JC92-02971A on page 263 1
Not shown Island of Data board JC92-02971A on page 266 1
Not shown Formatter HDD (du models) 5851-6712 on page 269 1
Not shown Formatter HDD 5851-6712 on page 272 1
Not shown US English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60102 on page 287 1
Not shown UK English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60103 on page 287 1
Not shown HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit X3A92-67905 on page 292 1
Not shown HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit X3A92-67906 on page 292 1
Not shown Foreign interface harness B5L31-67902 on page 295 1
Not shown Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit J8030-61001 on page 297 1
Not shown PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A on page 303 1
Not shown Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) JC31-00161A on page 307 1
Not shown LVPS 110V Type 4 JC44-00091D on page 311 1
Not shown LVPS 220V Type 4 JC44-00092D on page 311 1
Not shown Lower tray connector JC39-02187A on page 316 1
Not shown Developer fan JC31-00130A on page 320 1
Not shown Finisher sub-bridge unit JC90-01401B on page 327 1
Not shown Inductor unit 110V JC27-00012A on page 329 1
Not shown Inductor unit 220V JC27-00009A on page 329 1
Not shown Switch Assy - Right Door JC93-01467A on page 334 1
Not shown Drive, pickup JC93-01063C on page 341 1
Not shown TCU sensor JC93-00492A on page 346 1
Not shown Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector JC93-01277A on page 353 1
Not shown Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) 0604-001393 on page 362 1
Not shown Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) 0604-001393 on page 372 1
Not shown Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 0604-001381 on page 384 1
Not shown Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 0604-001490 on page 392 1
Not shown FFC Cable, Laser Scanner Unit JC39-02253A 1
162 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-1 Main assembly (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Not shown Cable, SATA Main HDD JC39-01202A 1
Not shown Cable, PWR Main HDD JC39-01943A 1
Not shown Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB JC31-00154A 1
Not shown Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel X3A92-60003 1
Not shown Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel X3A62-60002 1
ENWW Main parts 163
Toner collection unit (TCU)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner collection unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
X3A92-67926
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
164 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-18 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 165
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the left cover
● Step 2: Remove the HVPS
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC44-00240B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● HVPS 24V
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
166 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the left cover
1. Remove the top left cover.
Figure 2-19 Top left cover
2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.
Figure 2-20 Remove the left cover
Step 2: Remove the HVPS
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one retainer in
the center of the board (callout 3).
ENWW Main parts 167
Figure 2-21 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
2 3
1
2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
Figure 2-22 Disconnect three connectors
168 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. If you are replacing the HVPS board, release two tabs and rotate the cover off of the board. Attach the
cover to the replacement part before installing.
Figure 2-23 Remove the HVPS cover
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 169
Laser scanner assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the left cover
● Step 2: Remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board
● Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC97-04863A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Laser Scanner Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
170 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the left cover
1. Remove the top left cover.
Figure 2-24 Top left cover
2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.
Figure 2-25 Remove the left cover
Step 2: Remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one retainer in
the center of the board (callout 3).
ENWW Main parts 171
Figure 2-26 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
2 3
1
2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
Figure 2-27 Disconnect three connectors
Step 3: Remove the laser scanner assembly
1. To remove the laser scanner fan and holder, disconnect one connector, and then remove two screws on
the fan holder.
172 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-28 Remove the laser scanner fan and holder
2. Remove two screws, and then disconnect two in-line connectors on the left.
Figure 2-29 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors
ENWW Main parts 173
3. Slide the laser scanner partially out of the printer (callout 1), and then disconnect two flat cables and one
connector on the left. One of the flat cable connectors is a zero insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the
latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. After disconnecting the connectors, remove the laser
scanner assembly from the printer.
Figure 2-30 Laser scanner assembly
Reinstallation tip: Align the locator pin on the back of the assembly with the opening in the printer sheet
metal frame to guide the assembly into place. The screw holes on the front of the assembly will line up
with the screw holes in the sheet metal when the assembly is correctly installed.
Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the laser scanner assembly, make sure that the flat cable that routes
over the top of the assembly does not become trapped under the assembly.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
174 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Laser scanner assembly fan
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the left cover
● Step 2: Remove the laser scanner assembly fan
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly fan.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01414A
Fan Type 8
● Laser Scanner Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 175
Step 1: Remove the left cover
1. Remove the top left cover.
Figure 2-31 Top left cover
2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.
Figure 2-32 Remove the left cover
Step 2: Remove the laser scanner assembly fan
▲ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the laser scanner assembly fan.
176 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-33 Remove the laser scanner assembly fan
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 177
Developer unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the developer unit
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the developer unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC96-12503A JC96-12503A JC96-12502A JC96-12501A
● HP LaserJet Blk Developer ● HP LaserJet Cyan ● HP LaserJet Magenta ● HP LaserJet Yellow
Unit Developer Unit Developer Unit Developer Unit
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
178 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the developer unit
NOTE: Update the firmware to the latest version before replacing the developer unit.
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
2. Remove the drum unit to the right of the developer to be replaced.
TIP: Also remove the adjacent drum unit to allow better access to the toner supply pipe.
3. Rotate the reservoir shutter lever down to ensure it is closed.
Figure 2-34 Shutter open/close
4. Release the valve from the developer by rotating the valve side-to-side while pulling it firmly away from
the printer.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the valve is fully installed on the developer before rotating it to the
open position.
Figure 2-35 Release the toner collection valve
ENWW Main parts 179
5. Reach to the top of the toner supply pipe, and then rotate it up.
Figure 2-36 Tilt toner supply pipe up
6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the metal bracket
(callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the bracket when reinstalling it.
Figure 2-37 Remove the metal bracket
1
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the bottom of the bracket first.
180 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
7. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and slide it away from the printer to remove it.
NOTE: Do not grip the toner collection unit connection when removing the developer unit.
Figure 2-38 Developer unit removal
Reinstallation tip: Hold the toner supply pipe up and out of the way when reinstalling the developer unit.
8. Unpack the new developer unit box and check the components. In the box is a developer unit and a silver
packet of developer powder.
IMPORTANT: Place the developer unit on sheets of paper or a disposable cover to catch any spilled
developer powder.
9. Place one hand on top of the cover, and then release five hooks. Open the cover.
Figure 2-39 Open the developer unit
NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver packet about three times to prevent the developer
powder from scattering.
ENWW Main parts 181
10. Distribute the developer powder evenly into the developer unit.
NOTE: Do not touch the silver roller.
Figure 2-40 Distribute the developer powder
11. Close the developer cover.
12. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Developer unit
▲ After the replacement developer unit is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware
counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04087617).
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
v. Select the Supply Status menu.
vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select Development Unit (Developer) (YMCK).
viii. Select the check box on the right side of the screen for the developer unit just replaced.
ix. Select Reset.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
182 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Special installation instructions: Developer unit replacement
After the replacement of the developer unit, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
2. Select the Service menu.
3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service access
code.
4. Select the Service Tools menu.
5. On the Information tab, select the Supply Status menu.
6. Select Field Replacement Unit.
7. Select Developer Unit
8. Select Reset, to clear the counter.
After performing the reset, you must run the toner concentration initialization by selecting TC Init in the
same menu screen.
9. Exit the service mode by touching the Home button.
ENWW Main parts 183
Paper dust brush
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper dust brush.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01026B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Paper Dust Brush
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
184 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-41 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
Figure 2-42 Remove the paper dust brush
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 185
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
186 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
● Step 2: Remove the ITB cleaner
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01377A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● ITB Cleaner Blade
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
ENWW Main parts 187
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-43 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the ITB cleaner
1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.
NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.
Figure 2-44 ITB screw location
188 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.
CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.
Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side
of the cleaner.
Figure 2-45 ITB cleaner removal
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: ITB cleaner
▲ After the replacement cleaner is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04087617).
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
v. Select the Supply Status menu.
vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select ITB Cleaner.
viii. Select Transfer Cleaning Unit.
ix. Select Reset.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 189
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
190 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
● Step 2: Remove the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner
● Step 3: Remove the ITB
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC98-05425A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● HP LaserJet Image Transfer Belt Assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
ENWW Main parts 191
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-46 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner
1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.
NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.
Figure 2-47 ITB screw location
192 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.
CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.
Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side
of the cleaner.
Figure 2-48 ITB cleaner removal
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the ITB
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the cable from the retainer, and then disconnect one connector. Slide the ITB latch toward the
front of the printer to release the coupled drive.
Figure 2-49 Disconnect one connector and slide the latch
ENWW Main parts 193
3. Remove two screws securing the ITB unit.
TIP: Use a magnetized screwdriver to prevent the screws from falling into the printer.
Figure 2-50 Remove two screws
4. Pull the ITB unit partially out of the printer, and then lift it up and out of the printer.
CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt and be careful not to damage it by hitting it on the door during
removal.
Figure 2-51 Remove the ITB
194 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. While pushing the color plane registration (CPR) shutter toward the rear of the printer, clean the three CPR
sensors with a damp, lint-free cloth.
Figure 2-52 Clean the CPR sensors
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: ITB unit
a. Before reinstalling the ITB, align the arrow on the gear with the arrowhead on the ITB frame.
Figure 2-53 Align arrows
b. After the replacement ITB is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04087617).
iv. Open the following menus:
ENWW Main parts 195
● Maintenance count
● Part replacement counts
v. Select the ITB item.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
NOTE: After installing the replacement part, be sure to reset the firmware counter following the steps here: 7.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
196 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Image scanner assembly (flat bed)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the flow ADF whole unit
● Step 5: Remove the control panel bezel
● Step 6: Remove the control panel
● Step 7: Remove the keyboard (z bundles)
● Step 8: Remove the scanner whole unit
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner whole unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04907A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Scanner whole unit part number
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
ENWW Main parts 197
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-54 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-55 Remove the upper rear cover
198 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit
NOTE: LX/du models only. For all other models, skip this step.
1. Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover.
Figure 2-56 Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover
2. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).
Figure 2-57 Remove the document feeder connector cover
ENWW Main parts 199
3. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 2-58 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire
4. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
5. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.
Figure 2-59 Release the document feeder hinge screws
200 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.
Figure 2-60 Lift and remove the document feeder
Step 4: Remove the flow ADF whole unit
NOTE: GX/sGX models only. For all other models, skip this step.
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
Figure 2-61 Remove document feeder connector cover
ENWW Main parts 201
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-62 Remove the cable choke
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
Figure 2-63 Disconnect document feeder harness
202 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 2-64 Alignment marks
5. Remove the screw on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-65 Remove screws
ENWW Main parts 203
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-66 Release the document feeder
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.
Step 5: Remove the control panel bezel
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-67 Remove the document feeder bezel
2. Place the control panel in the upright position.
3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the control-
panel bezel to the edges to release.
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.
204 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 6: Remove the control panel
1. Place the control panel in the upright position.
2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on
the control-panel frame.
Figure 2-68 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors
3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 2-69 Remove the USB interconnect cable
4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.
Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.
Step 7: Remove the keyboard (z bundles)
1. Disconnect one FFC.
ENWW Main parts 205
Figure 2-70 Disconnect one FFC
2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 2-71 Remove the control-panel keyboard
Step 8: Remove the scanner whole unit
1. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge and then
pull the cover toward the back.
206 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-72 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover
2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
Figure 2-73 Release scan-left cover
ENWW Main parts 207
3. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.
Figure 2-74 Remove scan-right cover
2
1
NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the new scanner whole
unit.
4. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.
Figure 2-75 Disconnect scan cables
208 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove three screws from the left.
Figure 2-76 Remove screws
6. Remove two screws from the right.
Figure 2-77 Remove screws
7. Lift up and release the image scanner unit.
Figure 2-78 Lift up and release image scanner unit
NOTE: After reassembly, utilize the target to adjust the scanner location as necessary.
ENWW Main parts 209
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the scan bed by lowering the left side first and then lower the right. Align the screw
holes on the right, and then install the screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the lower cover and ensure the cables are routed through the opening for the
control panel and the bracket is properly aligned in the cover.
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
210 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ADF white backing (LX/du bundles)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC63-05410A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● ADF White backing (LX / du bundles)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Main parts 211
Step 1: Remove the document feeder white backing
White backing
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.
3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.
5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
Figure 2-79 Close the document feeder cover
212 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.
Figure 2-80 Smooth the white backing
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ADF white backing (GX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the white backing
ENWW Main parts 213
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the ADF white backing.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC63-05795A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● ADF, white foam
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the white backing
White backing
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Replace any damaged or missing velcro tabs by positioning them on the new white backing.
5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
214 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 215
Right door
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right door.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02092A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Right Door Assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
216 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-81 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-82 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Main parts 217
Figure 2-83 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-84 Release the right hinge
218 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-85 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-86 Remove the right door
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 219
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
220 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Exit unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 4: Remove the front power cover
● Step 5: Remove the top right cover
● Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
● Step 7: Remove the exit unit
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC90-01369A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Exit assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
ENWW Main parts 221
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-87 Remove four screws
222 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-88 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-89 Disconnect one connector
ENWW Main parts 223
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-90 Release the right hinge
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-91 Release the left dampener
224 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-92 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-93 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 4: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
ENWW Main parts 225
Figure 2-94 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-95 Remove the front power cover
Step 5: Remove the top right cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.
226 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-96 Remove the upper right door cover
Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
1. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-97 Fuser unit screw locations
ENWW Main parts 227
2. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-98 Fuser unit removal
Step 7: Remove the exit unit
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-99 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws
228 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 2-100 Remove the exit unit
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 229
Fuser unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the fuser unit
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC82-00477A JC82-00483A
● HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Assembly ● HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Assembly
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
230 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the fuser unit
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-101 Fuser unit screw locations
3. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-102 Fuser unit removal
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 231
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
232 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser drive board
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser drive board.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC44-00235B JC44-00236B
● Fuser Drive Board 110V ● Fuser Drive Board 220V
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 233
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-103 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
234 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-104 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-105 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.
▲ Disconnect twelve connectors and release one retainer on the lower left. Remove four screws, and then
remove the fuser drive board.
ENWW Main parts 235
Reinstallation tip: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the
wrong connector on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the
cables are installed in the correct positions.
Figure 2-106 Fuser drive board
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
236 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 5H
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC44-00249A JC44-00250A
● LVPS 110V Type 5H ● LVPS 220V Type 5H
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 237
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-107 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
238 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-108 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-109 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 5H
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.
▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 5H.
ENWW Main parts 239
Figure 2-110 LVPS type 5H
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
240 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser fan
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4 and cage
● Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser fan.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC31-00161A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Fan, type 7 fuser
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 241
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-111 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
242 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-112 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-113 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4 and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.
ENWW Main parts 243
Figure 2-114 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
1
2
2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.
Figure 2-115 Disconnect one connector
3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: LVPS type 4 and cage
▲ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make sure
that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.
244 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-116 LVPS connectors installation
1
2
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-117 Release the cables and remove three screws
ENWW Main parts 245
2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-118 Disconnect one connector
3. If you are replacing the fuser fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you are removing
the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Figure 2-119 Release five tabs
246 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. If you are replacing the fuser fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If you are
removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.
Figure 2-120 Remove the fuser fan
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 247
Internal hard disk drive (HDD)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 2: Remove the exit cover
● Step 3: Remove the HDD
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures for removing the 320 GB hard-disk drive installed beneath the rear-exit
cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
5851-6712
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● HDD 320GB - Main PCA HDD
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
248 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-121 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 2: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-122 Remove the exit cover
Step 3: Remove the HDD
1. Remove four screws, and then release the HDD cover.
ENWW Main parts 249
Figure 2-123 Remove the HDD cover
2. Remove four screws, disconnect the HDD cable, and then remove the HDD with its holder.
Figure 2-124 Remove the HDD
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
250 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 251
Main board
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main board
● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main board.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC82-00543A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Main PCA
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
252 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-125 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 253
Figure 2-126 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-127 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
254 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-128 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-129 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 255
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-130 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-131 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main board
1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.
256 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the
cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.
Figure 2-132 Disconnect one connector
2. Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 1) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Remove the
MSOK board (callout 2) and install it on the replacement main board. Remove nine screws, and then
remove the main board.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in
the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely difficult to replace if
it is lost or damaged.
Figure 2-133 Remove the main board
3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
ENWW Main parts 257
Special installation instructions: Main board
a. When reinstalling the MSOK board, note the dashed outline (callout 1) on the main board. When the
MSOK board is installed correctly, it fits within this outline.
Figure 2-134 Position of MSOK board
b. Make sure that the MSOK board is installed correctly on the replacement main board.
Figure 2-135 Install the MSOK board
258 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
c. When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
before closing the latch to secure the cable.
Figure 2-136 Install the flat cable
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 259
Accelerator board (GX ADF only)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the accelerator board.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
X3A62-60001
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Accelerator PCA
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
260 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-137 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.
ENWW Main parts 261
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
262 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Island of data (IOD; du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the island of data (IOD).
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC92-02971A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Island of Data Board (du models)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 263
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-138 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
264 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 265
Island of data (IOD)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the island of data (IOD).
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC92-02971A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Island of Data Board
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
266 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-139 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the island of data (IOD)
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
ENWW Main parts 267
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
268 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the hard disk drive (HDD) located on the
formatter board.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
5851-6712
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Formatter HDD - 320 GB SED (du models)
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 269
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-140 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
270 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 271
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the hard disk drive (HDD) located on the
formatter board.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
5851-6712
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Formatter HDD - 320 GB SED
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
272 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-141 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
ENWW Main parts 273
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
274 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Formatter (du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive
● Step 3: Remove the formatter PCA (du models)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
X3A92-60003
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
●
Formatter PCA (du models)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
ENWW Main parts 275
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-142 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the hard-disk drive
▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
276 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 3: Remove the formatter PCA (du models)
▲ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 277
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
278 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Formatter
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
● Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive
● Step 4: Remove the formatter PCA
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
X3A92-60001
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Formatter PCA
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
ENWW Main parts 279
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-143 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the accelerator board
▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.
280 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 3: Remove the hard-disk drive
▲ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
Step 4: Remove the formatter PCA
▲ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.
ENWW Main parts 281
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
282 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Control panel
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
● Step 2: Remove the control-panel
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the control panel.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
B5L47-60101
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Control panel
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
ENWW Main parts 283
Post service test
Verify that the control panel illuminates and displays information while the printer is initializing. Verify control
panel functionality after initialization.
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-144 Remove the document feeder bezel
2. Place the control panel in the upright position.
3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the control-
panel bezel to the edges to release.
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.
Step 2: Remove the control-panel
1. Place the control panel in the upright position.
284 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on
the control-panel frame.
Figure 2-145 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors
3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 2-146 Remove the USB interconnect cable
4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.
Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 285
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
286 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Keyboard (z bundles)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
● Step 2: Remove the control-panel
● Step 3: Remove the keyboard
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the keyboard.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
B5L47-60102 B5L47-60103
● US English Keyboard Assy ● UK English Keyboard Assy
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
ENWW Main parts 287
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Type on the keyboard and verify that it is recognized by the control panel.
Step 1: Remove the control-panel bezel
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-147 Remove the document feeder bezel
2. Place the control panel in the upright position.
3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the control-
panel bezel to the edges to release.
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.
Step 2: Remove the control-panel
1. Place the control panel in the upright position.
288 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on
the control-panel frame.
Figure 2-148 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors
3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 2-149 Remove the USB interconnect cable
4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.
Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.
Step 3: Remove the keyboard
1. Disconnect one FFC.
ENWW Main parts 289
Figure 2-150 Disconnect one FFC
2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 2-151 Remove the control-panel keyboard
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
290 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 291
Imaging drum unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the imaging drum
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
X3A92-67905 X3A92-67906
● HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit ● HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
292 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the imaging drum
1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).
2. There are four locking levers, one for each color. Pull down on the locking lever for the color drum unit that
is being replaced.
Figure 2-152 Release locking lever
3. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.
NOTE: Open the right door to remove the black drum.
CAUTION: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.
CAUTION: Do not touch the shiny surface on the imaging drum. Cover the drum with a sheet of paper
while it is out of the printer to limit light exposure.
Figure 2-153 Remove the drum unit
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
ENWW Main parts 293
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
294 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution
● Introduction
● Step 1: Unpack the FIH accessory
● Step 2: Install the FIH accessory
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
B5L31-67902
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Foreign interface harness
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.
ENWW Main parts 295
Step 1: Unpack the FIH accessory
Unpack the accessory from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
replacement part prior to installation.
Step 2: Install the FIH accessory
▲ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector
Figure 2-154 Connect the FIH
296 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NFC Kit Installation
● Introduction
● Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit
● Step 2: Install the NFC kit
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to install the NFC kit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
Before performing service
Turn the printer power off
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
J8030-61001
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Jetdirect wireless print server with NFC kit
Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver.
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Verify that the light on the NFC accessory illuminates to confirm the installation is correct.
Verify that a wireless network icon appears on the control panel.
ENWW Main parts 297
Step 1: Unpack the NFC kit
Unpack the kit from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis
to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
part prior to installation.
Step 2: Install the NFC kit
1. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the HIP cover.
Figure 2-155 Release the HIP cover
2. Remove the HIP cover.
Figure 2-156 Remove the HIP cover
3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP, and then attach the appropriate USB cable:
a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle (callout 1) is
the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 2) is used.
298 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-157 Identify USB connector
b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.
Figure 2-158 Select USB cable
ENWW Main parts 299
c. Install the USB cable in the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may face down
on some models.
Figure 2-159 Install the USB cable
4. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the NFC accessory.
Figure 2-160 Install the white power connector
5. Install the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.
a. Install the hook-shaped clips on the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.
300 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-161 Position the NFC accessory in the HIP recess
ENWW Main parts 301
b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the
recess.
Figure 2-162 Install the NFC accessory
302 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Front power switch
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 2: Remove the front power cover
● Step 3: Remove the front power switch
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front power switch.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC92-02969A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Front power switch
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 303
Post service test
Press the power switch and verify that the printer turns on.
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-163 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 2: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-164 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
304 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-165 Remove the front power cover
Step 3: Remove the front power switch
▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the power switch board.
Figure 2-166 Remove one screw and the power switch board
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 305
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
306 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS fans
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC31-00161A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 307
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-167 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-168 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS fans
1. Disconnect two connectors, release four tabs, and then remove the LVPS fans.
308 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-169 Remove the LVPS fans
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: LVPS fans
▲ When installing the replacement fans, make sure that the embossed arrow on the fans point toward
the printer.
Figure 2-170 Correct installation of LVPS fans
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 309
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
310 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 4
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 3.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC44-00091D JC44-00092D
● LVPS 110V Type 4 ● LVPS 220V Type 4
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 311
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-171 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
312 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-172 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-173 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.
1. Remove three screws, then remove the shield-LVPS sub upper.
ENWW Main parts 313
Figure 2-174 Remove the shield-LVPS sub upper
2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 4.
Figure 2-175 LVPS Type 4
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
314 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 315
Lower tray connector
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the lower tray connector
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower tray connector.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC39-02187A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Lower tray connector
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
316 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-176 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-177 Remove the lower rear cover
ENWW Main parts 317
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-178 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the lower tray connector
1. Release one retainer, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-179 Disconnect one connector
318 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws, and then remove the lower tray connector.
Figure 2-180 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 319
Developer fan
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the developer fan
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the developer fan.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC31-00130A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Developer fan
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
320 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-181 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 321
Figure 2-182 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-183 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.
322 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-184 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
Step 5: Remove the developer fan
1. Remove Tray 2.
2. Inside the Tray 2 opening, disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-185 Disconnect one connector
ENWW Main parts 323
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two retainers (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-186 Disconnect one connector and remove four screws
4. Remove the fan shroud under the cables.
Figure 2-187 Remove the fan shroud
324 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Release the cables from two retainers.
Figure 2-188 Release the cables
6. Turn the fan shroud over to the other side. Remove two screws, and then release five tabs (callout 1) to
remove the fan cover.
Figure 2-189 Remove two screws and release five tabs
ENWW Main parts 325
7. Remove the developer fan (callout 1).
Figure 2-190 Remove the developer fan
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
326 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Bridge unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bridge unit
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC90-01401B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher sub-bridge unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
ENWW Main parts 327
Step 1: Remove the bridge unit
▲ Remove one screw, and then slightly lift and slide the bridge unit away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-191 Remove the bridge unit
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
328 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Inductor unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the inductor unit
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the inductor unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC27-00012A JC27-00009A
● Inductor unit (110V) ● Inductor unit (220V)
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 329
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-192 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
330 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-193 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-194 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 331
Figure 2-195 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
Step 5: Remove the inductor unit
▲ Disconnect the wire harness, remove two screws, and then remove the inductor unit.
Figure 2-196 Remove the inductor unit
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
332 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 333
Right door switch assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4 and cage
● Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
● Step 6: Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
● Step 7: Remove the right door switch assembly
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right door open sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01467A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Switch assembly, right door
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
334 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-197 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 335
Figure 2-198 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-199 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4 and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.
336 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-200 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
1
2
2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.
Figure 2-201 Disconnect one connector
3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: LVPS type 4 and cage
▲ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make sure
that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.
ENWW Main parts 337
Figure 2-202 LVPS connectors installation
1
2
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-203 Release the cables and remove three screws
338 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-204 Disconnect one connector
Step 6: Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.
Figure 2-205 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
1
2
Step 7: Remove the right door switch assembly
▲ Disconnect one connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the right door switch assembly.
ENWW Main parts 339
Figure 2-206 Remove the side door open sensor
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
340 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup drive (Tray 2)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the pickup drive (Tray 2)
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup drive unit 1.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01063C
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive, Pick up
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 341
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-207 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
342 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-208 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-209 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 343
Figure 2-210 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
Step 5: Remove the pickup drive (Tray 2)
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 2).
Figure 2-211 Remove pickup drive (Tray 2)
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
344 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 345
Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the front cover.
● Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 5: Remove the front power cover
● Step 6: Remove the exit cover
● Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
● Step 8: Remove the TCU sensors
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) sensor.
Click here to view a video of the toner collection unit level sensor procedure.
Click here to view a video of the toner collection unit detect sensor procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-00492A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● TCU sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
346 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-212 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
ENWW Main parts 347
Figure 2-213 Remove the paper dust brush
Step 3: Remove the front cover.
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-214 Remove the front cover
Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
348 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-215 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 5: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-216 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
ENWW Main parts 349
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-217 Remove the front power cover
Step 6: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-218 Remove the exit cover
Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.
350 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove seven screws.
Figure 2-219 Remove seven screws
4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-220 Remove the inner cover
Step 8: Remove the TCU sensors
▲ Release the corresponding sensor.
a. [A]: Toner collection unit level sensor.
ENWW Main parts 351
b. [B]: Toner collection unit detect sensor.
Figure 2-221 Remove the TCU unit detect sensor
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
352 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
CRUM connector
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
● Step 7: Remove the toner supply drive unit
● Step 8: Remove the CRUM connector
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the CRUM connector.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01277A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● CRUM connector
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
ENWW Main parts 353
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-222 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
354 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-223 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-224 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
ENWW Main parts 355
Figure 2-225 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-226 Remove one screw
356 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-227 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-228 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.
ENWW Main parts 357
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the
cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.
Figure 2-229 Disconnect one connector
2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the
cables from six retainers (callout 3).
Figure 2-230 Remove one screw
1
3 2
358 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove five screws.
Figure 2-231 Remove five screws
4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.
5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Main board and cage
▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
before closing the latch to secure the cable.
Figure 2-232 Install the flat cable
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
ENWW Main parts 359
Step 7: Remove the toner supply drive unit
▲ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release cables from three retainers (callout 2). Release
the cables from the guides (callout 3). Remove five screws and then remove the toner supply drive unit.
Reinstallation tip: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.
Figure 2-233 Remove the toner supply drive unit
1
Step 8: Remove the CRUM connector
▲ If replacing the yellow CRUM connector, disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove the screw next to the
defective CRUM connector. Release one tab on the right, and then remove the CRUM connector.
Figure 2-234 Remove the CRUM connector
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
360 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 361
Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 4: Remove the front power cover
● Step 5: Remove the top right cover
● Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
● Step 7: Remove the exit unit
● Step 8: Remove the duplex 1 sensor
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001393
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo Interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
362 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-235 Remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 363
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-236 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-237 Disconnect one connector
364 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-238 Release the right hinge
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-239 Release the left dampener
ENWW Main parts 365
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-240 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-241 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 4: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
366 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-242 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-243 Remove the front power cover
Step 5: Remove the top right cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 367
Figure 2-244 Remove the upper right door cover
Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
1. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-245 Fuser unit screw locations
368 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-246 Fuser unit removal
Step 7: Remove the exit unit
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-247 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 369
2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 2-248 Remove the exit unit
Step 8: Remove the duplex 1 sensor
1. Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Remove two screws, and then lift the sensor holder up.
Figure 2-249 Remove two screws
2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the duplex 1 sensor.
Figure 2-250 Remove the duplex 1 sensor
370 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 371
Exit 1 bin full sensor (on the exit unit)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 4: Remove the front power cover
● Step 5: Remove the top right cover
● Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
● Step 7: Remove the exit unit
● Step 8: Remove the exit 1 bin full sensor
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit 1 bin full sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001393
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo Interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
372 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-251 Remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 373
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-252 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-253 Disconnect one connector
374 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-254 Release the right hinge
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-255 Release the left dampener
ENWW Main parts 375
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-256 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-257 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 4: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
376 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-258 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-259 Remove the front power cover
Step 5: Remove the top right cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 377
Figure 2-260 Remove the upper right door cover
Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
1. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-261 Fuser unit screw locations
378 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-262 Fuser unit removal
Step 7: Remove the exit unit
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-263 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 379
2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 2-264 Remove the exit unit
Step 8: Remove the exit 1 bin full sensor
1. On the exit unit, remove one self-tapping screw (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).
Figure 2-265 Remove one screw and the guide
380 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove the black adhesive strip from the exit unit.
Figure 2-266 Remove the black adhesive strip
3. Release two tabs, and then unhook the sensor from the sheet metal.
Figure 2-267 Release two tabs
ENWW Main parts 381
4. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-268 Disconnect one connector
5. Rotate the shaft to release the sensor, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 2-269 Remove the exit 1 bin full sensor
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
382 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 383
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
● Step 4: Remove the prefeed sensor 2
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 for pickup unit 2.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001381
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo Interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
384 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-270 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-271 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Main parts 385
Figure 2-272 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-273 Release the right hinge
386 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-274 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-275 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
1. Remove the paper trays.
ENWW Main parts 387
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-276 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-277 Remove three screws
388 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-278 Rotate pickup unit 2
5. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-279 Disconnect one connector
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
ENWW Main parts 389
Figure 2-280 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Remove the prefeed sensor 2
▲ Open the guide-pickup, and then remove the prefeed sensor 2.
Figure 2-281 Remove prefeed sensor 2
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
390 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 391
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
● Step 4: Remove pickup unit 1
● Step 5: Remove the prefeed sensor 1
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 for pickup unit 1.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001490
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo Interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
392 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-282 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-283 Remove the right rear cover
ENWW Main parts 393
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-284 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-285 Release the right hinge
394 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-286 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-287 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
1. Remove the paper trays.
ENWW Main parts 395
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-288 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-289 Remove three screws
396 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-290 Rotate pickup unit 2
5. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-291 Disconnect one connector
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
ENWW Main parts 397
Figure 2-292 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Remove pickup unit 1
1. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-293 Remove three screws
398 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-294 Rotate pickup unit 1
3. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-295 Disconnect one connector
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 1
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.
ENWW Main parts 399
Figure 2-296 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 5: Remove the prefeed sensor 1
1. Remove five screws, and then remove the bracket.
Figure 2-297 Remove five screws and the bracket.
400 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove the sensor from its holder.
Figure 2-298 Remove the sensor
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 401
Exit assembly
Figure 2-299 Exit assembly
402 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-2 Exit assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
3-1 Motor, step JC93-00802A on page 404 2
3-2 Lifting solenoid JC33-00031B on page 404 1
3-5 Photo interrupter 0604-001393 on page 404 1
3-5 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 on page 414 1
ENWW Main parts 403
Exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor (on the exit unit)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 4: Remove the front power cover
● Step 5: Remove the top right cover
● Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
● Step 7: Remove the exit unit
● Step 8: Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-00802A JC33-00031B 0604-001393
● Drive, motor step (Qty 2) To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/ ● Photo interrupter
parts.
● Solenoid - Lifting
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
404 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-300 Remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 405
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-301 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-302 Disconnect one connector
406 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-303 Release the right hinge
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-304 Release the left dampener
ENWW Main parts 407
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-305 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-306 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 4: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
408 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-307 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-308 Remove the front power cover
Step 5: Remove the top right cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 409
Figure 2-309 Remove the upper right door cover
Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
1. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-310 Fuser unit screw locations
410 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-311 Fuser unit removal
Step 7: Remove the exit unit
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-312 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 411
2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 2-313 Remove the exit unit
Step 8: Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor
1. Disconnect one connector. Gently pry the black gear from behind to remove it. Remove the e-ring, and then
remove the white gear.
NOTE: If necessarry, remove two motors (callout 1), and then remove one sensor (callout 2).
Figure 2-314 On the exit unit, disconnect one connector and remove two gears
412 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the exit gate solenoid [A].
Figure 2-315 Exit gate solenoid
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 413
Return sensor (on the exit unit)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 4: Remove the front power cover
● Step 5: Remove the top right cover
● Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
● Step 7: Remove the exit unit
● Step 8: Remove the return sensor
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the return sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001393
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo Interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
414 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-316 Remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 415
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-317 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-318 Disconnect one connector
416 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-319 Release the right hinge
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-320 Release the left dampener
ENWW Main parts 417
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-321 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-322 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 4: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
418 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-323 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-324 Remove the front power cover
Step 5: Remove the top right cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 419
Figure 2-325 Remove the upper right door cover
Step 6: Remove the fuser unit
1. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-326 Fuser unit screw locations
420 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Pull out the fuser unit.
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.
Figure 2-327 Fuser unit removal
Step 7: Remove the exit unit
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-328 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws
ENWW Main parts 421
2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.
Figure 2-329 Remove the exit unit
Step 8: Remove the return sensor
▲ Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then peel the black adhesive
strip (callout 2) away from the top of the sensor. Release two small tabs (callout 3), and then remove the
sensor.
Figure 2-330 Return sensor
1
3
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
422 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 423
Tray 2/3
Figure 2-331 Tray 2
424 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-3 Tray 2
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Tray 2 JC90-01610A 1
0 Tray 3 JC90-01611A 1
ENWW Main parts 425
Main frame assembly
Figure 2-332 Main frame assembly
426 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-4 Main frame assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Front Door Switch Open JC93-00466A on page 428 1
5 ACR assembly JC93-01039A 1
8 Tray closing assembly JC93-01370A on page 435 2
Not shown Harness, fuser connector JC39-02217A 1
Not shown Harness, engine side for DCF + connector JC39-02187A 1
ENWW Main parts 427
Front cover open sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the front cover
● Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 5: Remove the front power cover
● Step 6: Remove the exit cover
● Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
● Step 8: Remove the front cover open sensor
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the front cover open sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-00466A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Front door switch open
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
428 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-333 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
ENWW Main parts 429
Figure 2-334 Remove the paper dust brush
Step 3: Remove the front cover
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-335 Remove the front cover
Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
430 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-336 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 5: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-337 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
ENWW Main parts 431
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-338 Remove the front power cover
Step 6: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-339 Remove the exit cover
Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.
432 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove seven screws.
Figure 2-340 Remove seven screws
4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-341 Remove the inner cover
ENWW Main parts 433
Step 8: Remove the front cover open sensor
1. Remove the toner cartridges.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front cover open sensor.
Figure 2-342 Remove one screw and the cover open sensor
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
434 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Tray closing assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
● Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
● Step 5: Remove the auto closing unit
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the auto closing unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01370A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Tray closing unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 435
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-343 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
436 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-344 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the LVPS cover
▲ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then remove
the cover.
Figure 2-345 Remove the LVPS cover
Step 4: Remove the fuser drive board and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
▲ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors (callout 1)
that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS and fuser drive
boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and then tilt the top of the
cage out to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 437
Figure 2-346 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage
Step 5: Remove the auto closing unit
1. Remove Tray 2.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cassette rail cover.
Figure 2-347 Remove the CST rail cover
438 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the tray closing unit.
Figure 2-348 Remove the tray closing unit
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 439
Registration assembly
Figure 2-349 Main frame registration
440 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-5 Main frame registration
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Registration Assembly JC93-01116A on page 442 1
4 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 on page 452 1
ENWW Main parts 441
Registration assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the right door
● Step 5: Remove the registration assembly
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the registration assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01116A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Registration assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
442 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-350 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
Figure 2-351 Remove the paper dust brush
ENWW Main parts 443
Step 3: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-352 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-353 Remove the right rear cover
Step 4: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
444 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-354 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-355 Release the right hinge
ENWW Main parts 445
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-356 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-357 Remove the right door
Step 5: Remove the registration assembly
1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.
446 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-358 Remove two screws
2. Remove the gear cover.
Figure 2-359 Remove the gear cover
ENWW Main parts 447
3. Disconnect one in-line connector, and then remove two screws.
Figure 2-360 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws
4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.
Figure 2-361 Remove the registration assembly
5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Registration assembly
a. Install the back, gear side of the shaft (callout 1) into the opening in the sheet metal (callout 2).
448 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-362 Install the gear side of the shaft
b. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.
Figure 2-363 Remove the bushing
ENWW Main parts 449
c. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.
NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 2-364 Install the bushing
d. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.
Figure 2-365 Install the front of the shaft
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
450 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 451
Registration sensor assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the right door
● Step 5: Remove the registration assembly
● Step 6: Remove the registration sensor
● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the registration sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001381
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Registration sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
452 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-366 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
Figure 2-367 Remove the paper dust brush
ENWW Main parts 453
Step 3: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-368 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-369 Remove the right rear cover
Step 4: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
454 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-370 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-371 Release the right hinge
ENWW Main parts 455
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-372 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-373 Remove the right door
Step 5: Remove the registration assembly
1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.
456 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-374 Remove two screws
2. Remove the gear cover.
Figure 2-375 Remove the gear cover
ENWW Main parts 457
3. Disconnect one in-line connector, and then remove two screws.
Figure 2-376 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws
4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.
Figure 2-377 Remove the registration assembly
5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Registration assembly
a. Install the back, gear side of the shaft (callout 1) into the opening in the sheet metal (callout 2).
458 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-378 Install the gear side of the shaft
b. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.
Figure 2-379 Remove the bushing
ENWW Main parts 459
c. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.
NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 2-380 Install the bushing
Step 6: Remove the registration sensor
1. Remove three self-tapping screws, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-381 Remove three screws and the cover
460 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Release the cables from one lower retainer (callout 1) and one upper retainer (callout 2). Remove five
screws.
Figure 2-382 Release retainers and remove five screws
3. Carefully lift the registration sensor assembly slightly away from the printer. Release one retainer
(callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Figure 2-383 Release one retainer and disconnect two connectors
2
1
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 461
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
462 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ACR frame assembly
Figure 2-384 ACR frame assembly
ENWW Main parts 463
Table 2-6 ACR frame assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 ACR Assembly JC93-01039A 1
1 CTD sensor JC32-00014A 3
2 Motor, dc JC31–00078A 1
464 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Toner reservoir (CMYK)
Figure 2-385 Toner reservoir (CMYK)
ENWW Main parts 465
Table 2-7 Toner reservoir (CMYK)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y JC93-01089B on page 467 3
2 Toner Reservoir Assy K JC93-01088B on page 467 1
466 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Reservoir unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the front cover.
● Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 5: Remove the front power cover
● Step 6: Remove the exit cover
● Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
● Step 8: Remove the reservoir unit
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the reservoir unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01089B JC93-01088B
● Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y ● Toner Reservoir Assy K
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
ENWW Main parts 467
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-386 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
468 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-387 Remove the paper dust brush
Step 3: Remove the front cover.
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-388 Remove the front cover
Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 469
Figure 2-389 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 5: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-390 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
470 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-391 Remove the front power cover
Step 6: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-392 Remove the exit cover
Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.
ENWW Main parts 471
3. Remove seven screws.
Figure 2-393 Remove seven screws
4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-394 Remove the inner cover
Step 8: Remove the reservoir unit
NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first. Follow the
instructions below to remove only those reservoirs required to reach the target reservoir.
1. Close the toner reservoir shutters (callout 1), and then release the cables from the retainers (callout 2).
472 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-395 Close the shutters and release the cables
2. Disconnect four connectors.
Figure 2-396 Disconnect four connectors
ENWW Main parts 473
3. Lower the release levers (callout 1), and then remove the yellow, magenta, and cyan drum units (callout 2).
Figure 2-397 Remove drum units
1
4. Lower and close the release levers for all of the developer units. This stops the flow of toner from the toner
reservoirs to the developer units.
Figure 2-398 Lower the developer release levers
474 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Release the valves from the toner connections by rotating the valves side-to-side while pulling them firmly
away from the printer.
Figure 2-399 Release the toner supply pipes
6. Remove eight screws.
Figure 2-400 Remove eight screws
ENWW Main parts 475
7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables from eight retainers.
Figure 2-401 Disconnect one connector and release the cables
8. Remove the toner reservoir by sliding it out of the printer. The figure below shows the black toner reservoir.
The procedure is the same for all of the toner reservoirs.
NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first.
NOTE: Removing the yellow toner reservoir requires removing the high voltage power supply.
Figure 2-402 Remove the black toner reservoir
9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Toner reservoir
▲ Position the locator pins on the toner reservoir into the openings in the sheet metal inside the printer.
476 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-403 Position the locator pins
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 477
Rear frame assembly
Figure 2-404 Rear frame assembly
478 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-8 Rear frame assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Rear holder Autosize JC93-00018A 2
1-1 PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A on page 480 2
Not shown Humidity sensor JC93-00486A 1
ENWW Main parts 479
Paper size sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the paper size sensor
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the auto size sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02622A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Paper size sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
480 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the paper size sensor
▲ Do the following:
● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.
● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 2-405 Remove screws
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 481
Drive system
Figure 2-406 Drive system
482 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-9 Drive system
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Main drive assembly JC93-01059C on page 484 1
1-1 Main drive JC93-01048B 1
1-2 Motor, bldc JC31-00123D 4
2 Toner drive JC93-01065B on page 492 1
2-1 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 2
2-2 Step motor, circuit JC31-00110A on page 500 2
3 Fuser drive exit JC93-01064A on page 508 1
3-1 Motor, bldc JC31-00123B 1
3-2 Drive motor, step alienation JC93-01084A 1
3-3 Timing belt 6602-001581 1
4 Feed drive JC93-01062A on page 524 1
4-1 Step motor, ip JC31-00132A on page 524 1
4-2 Electric clutch JC47-00037A 1
4-3 Timing gear belt 6602-001730 1
5 Pickup drive JC93-01063C on page 527 2
5-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01083A on page 527 2
6 Engage T1 JC93-01068A on page 515 1
6-1 Step motor, circuit JC31-00110B on page 515 1
7 Drive, Toner Collection Unit JC93-01070A on page 530 1
8 Registration drive JC93-01061A on page 537 1
ENWW Main parts 483
Main drive unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main drive unit
● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main drive unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01059C
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Main Drive Assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
484 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-407 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 485
Figure 2-408 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-409 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
486 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-410 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-411 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 487
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-412 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-413 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main drive unit
1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers (callout 3).
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide (callout 5).
488 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-414 Disconnect and release cables
1
5
2
2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a zero
insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. Remove the
flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 2-415 Disconnect flat cables
2
3
ENWW Main parts 489
3. Remove eight screws.
Figure 2-416 Remove eight screws
4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then remove it
from under the cables.
Figure 2-417 Remove the main drive unit
490 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit and transfer them to
the replacement unit.
Figure 2-418 Remove cables and guides
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 491
Toner supply drive unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
● Step 7: Remove the toner supply drive unit
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner supply drive unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01065B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive, Toner
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
492 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-419 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 493
Figure 2-420 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-421 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
494 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-422 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-423 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 495
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-424 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-425 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.
496 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the
cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.
Figure 2-426 Disconnect one connector
2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the
cables from six retainers (callout 3).
Figure 2-427 Remove one screw
1
3 2
ENWW Main parts 497
3. Remove five screws.
Figure 2-428 Remove five screws
4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.
5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Main board and cage
▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
before closing the latch to secure the cable.
Figure 2-429 Install the flat cable
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
498 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 7: Remove the toner supply drive unit
▲ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release cables from three retainers (callout 2). Release
the cables from the guides (callout 3). Remove five screws and then remove the toner supply drive unit.
Reinstallation tip: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.
Figure 2-430 Remove the toner supply drive unit
1
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 499
Toner supply and toner reservoir motors
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
● Step 7: Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC31-00110A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Motor - Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
500 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-431 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 501
Figure 2-432 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-433 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
502 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-434 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-435 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 503
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-436 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-437 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main board and cage
1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.
504 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the
cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.
Figure 2-438 Disconnect one connector
2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero insertion
force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables. Release the
cables from six retainers (callout 3).
Figure 2-439 Remove one screw
1
3 2
ENWW Main parts 505
3. Remove five screws.
Figure 2-440 Remove five screws
4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to remove it.
5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Main board and cage
▲ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF connector
before closing the latch to secure the cable.
Figure 2-441 Install the flat cable
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 7: Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors
▲ Disconnect one connector and remove two screws for each motor that is replaced.
506 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-442 Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 507
Fuser/exit drive unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4 and cage
● Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
● Step 6: Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01064A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive, Fuser Exit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
508 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-443 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
ENWW Main parts 509
Figure 2-444 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-445 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the LVPS type 4 and cage
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.
1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove
three screws.
510 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-446 Disconnect connectors and remove screws
1
2
2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind the cage.
Remove the LVPS board and cage.
Figure 2-447 Disconnect one connector
3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: LVPS type 4 and cage
▲ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make sure
that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.
ENWW Main parts 511
Figure 2-448 LVPS connectors installation
1
2
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 5: Remove the fuser fan
1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.
Figure 2-449 Release the cables and remove three screws
512 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-450 Disconnect one connector
Step 6: Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.
Figure 2-451 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit
1
2
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 513
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
514 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Alienation drive unit or motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main drive unit
● Step 7: Remove the alienation drive unit
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the alienation motor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01068A JC31-00110B
● Assembly (Drive, Engage T1) ● Motor Circuit Step
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
ENWW Main parts 515
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-452 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
516 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-453 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-454 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
ENWW Main parts 517
Figure 2-455 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-456 Remove one screw
518 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-457 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-458 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main drive unit
1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers (callout 3).
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide (callout 5).
ENWW Main parts 519
Figure 2-459 Disconnect and release cables
1
5
2
2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a zero
insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. Remove the
flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 2-460 Disconnect flat cables
2
3
520 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove eight screws.
Figure 2-461 Remove eight screws
4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then remove it
from under the cables.
Figure 2-462 Remove the main drive unit
ENWW Main parts 521
5. Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit and transfer them to
the replacement unit.
Figure 2-463 Remove cables and guides
Step 7: Remove the alienation drive unit
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the alienation drive
unit.
NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.
Figure 2-464 Remove the alienation motor
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
522 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 523
Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01062A JC31-00132A
● Drive, Feed ● Step motor, ip
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
524 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-465 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-466 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove four screws, and then remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.
ENWW Main parts 525
NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.
Figure 2-467 Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
526 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the pickup drive (Tray 3)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup drive unit 2.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01063C JC93-01083A
● Drive, Pick up 2 ● Drive motor, step
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 527
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-468 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-469 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the pickup drive (Tray 3)
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 3).
528 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.
Figure 2-470 Remove pickup drive unit 2
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 529
Toner collection unit (TCU) drive and motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the TCU
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the front cover.
● Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 5: Remove the front power cover
● Step 6: Remove the exit cover
● Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
● Step 8: Remove the TCU drive
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) drive.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01070A JC31-00110A
● Drive, Toner Collection Unit ● Step motor, circuit
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
530 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the TCU
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-471 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
ENWW Main parts 531
Figure 2-472 Remove the paper dust brush
Step 3: Remove the front cover.
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-473 Remove the front cover
Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
532 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-474 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 5: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-475 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
ENWW Main parts 533
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-476 Remove the front power cover
Step 6: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-477 Remove the exit cover
Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.
534 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove seven screws.
Figure 2-478 Remove seven screws
4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-479 Remove the inner cover
Step 8: Remove the TCU drive
▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the TCU drive.
NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.
ENWW Main parts 535
Figure 2-480 Remove the TCU drive
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
536 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Registration drive assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
● Step 6: Remove the main drive unit
● Step 7: Remove the registration drive assembly
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01061A JC31-00132A
● Drive, Registration ● Step motor, ip
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
ENWW Main parts 537
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-481 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
538 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-482 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-483 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
ENWW Main parts 539
Figure 2-484 Remove the upper left cover
Step 5: Remove the formatter and cage
1. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-485 Remove one screw
540 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the sheet
metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 2-486 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws
3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected to the
formatter during reassembly.
Figure 2-487 Identify the formatter cables
4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it away from
the printer to remove it.
Step 6: Remove the main drive unit
1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers (callout 3).
Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide (callout 5).
ENWW Main parts 541
Figure 2-488 Disconnect and release cables
1
5
2
2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a zero
insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. Remove the
flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).
Figure 2-489 Disconnect flat cables
2
3
542 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove eight screws.
Figure 2-490 Remove eight screws
4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then remove it
from under the cables.
Figure 2-491 Remove the main drive unit
ENWW Main parts 543
5. Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit and transfer them to
the replacement unit.
Figure 2-492 Remove cables and guides
Step 7: Remove the registration drive assembly
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove three screws (callout 2), then remove the registration drive
assembly.
NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive assembly from the printer and then remove the
motor from the drive assembly.
Figure 2-493 Remove the registration drive assembly
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
544 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 545
Main frame pickup 1 and 2
Figure 2-494 Main frame pickup 1 and 2
546 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-10 Main frame pickup 1 and 2
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Main Pick Up 1st JC93-01364A on page 548 1
1-5 Photo-interrupter 0604-001490 on page 557 1
2 Main Pick Up 2nd JC93-01365A on page 567 1
2-3 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 on page 574 1
ENWW Main parts 547
Pickup unit 1
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
● Step 4: Remove pickup unit 1
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup unit 1.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01364A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Main Pick Up 1st
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
548 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-495 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-496 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Main parts 549
Figure 2-497 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-498 Release the right hinge
550 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-499 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-500 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
1. Remove the paper trays.
ENWW Main parts 551
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-501 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-502 Remove three screws
552 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-503 Rotate pickup unit 2
5. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-504 Disconnect one connector
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
ENWW Main parts 553
Figure 2-505 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Remove pickup unit 1
1. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-506 Remove three screws
554 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-507 Rotate pickup unit 1
3. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-508 Disconnect one connector
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 1
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.
ENWW Main parts 555
Figure 2-509 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
556 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
● Step 4: Remove pickup unit 1
● Step 5: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup
unit 1.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001490
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 557
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-510 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-511 Remove the right rear cover
558 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-512 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-513 Release the right hinge
ENWW Main parts 559
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-514 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-515 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
1. Remove the paper trays.
560 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-516 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-517 Remove three screws
ENWW Main parts 561
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-518 Rotate pickup unit 2
5. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-519 Disconnect one connector
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
562 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-520 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Remove pickup unit 1
1. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-521 Remove three screws
ENWW Main parts 563
2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-522 Rotate pickup unit 1
3. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-523 Disconnect one connector
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 1
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.
564 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-524 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 5: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
▲ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.
a. [A]: Empty sensor.
b. [B]: Pickup lifting sensor.
Figure 2-525 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 565
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
566 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup unit 2
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace pickup unit 2.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01365A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Main Pick Up 2cnd
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 567
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-526 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-527 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
568 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-528 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-529 Release the right hinge
ENWW Main parts 569
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-530 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-531 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
1. Remove the paper trays.
570 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-532 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-533 Remove three screws
ENWW Main parts 571
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-534 Rotate pickup unit 2
5. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-535 Disconnect one connector
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
572 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-536 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 573
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
● Step 4: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup
unit 2.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001381
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
574 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-537 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-538 Remove the right rear cover
ENWW Main parts 575
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-539 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-540 Release the right hinge
576 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-541 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-542 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove pickup unit 2
1. Remove the paper trays.
ENWW Main parts 577
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-543 Remove one screw and the cover
3. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-544 Remove three screws
578 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.
CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely
Figure 2-545 Rotate pickup unit 2
5. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 2-546 Disconnect one connector
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Pickup unit 2
▲ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.
ENWW Main parts 579
Figure 2-547 Align gear, coupler, and bracket
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Step 4: Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor
▲ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.
a. [A]: Empty sensor.
b. [B]: Pickup lifting sensor.
Figure 2-548 Remove the sensor
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
580 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 581
Sub-Main frame pickup
Figure 2-549 Sub-Main frame paper pickup
582 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-11 Main frame paper pickup
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Sub Pick Up Upper JC93-01421A 1
1-2 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 2
3 Feed roller, first exit JC66-04625A 1
5 Tray 2,3 Main rollers JC93-01092A on page 584 3
6 Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A 1
ENWW Main parts 583
Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-01092A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
584 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
NOTE: HP recommends that all three rollers are replaced at the same time.
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the two cassettes.
Figure 2-550 Remove the two cassettes
3. Inside the tray opening, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.
Figure 2-551 Slide the return guide
Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the printer to
prevent paper jams.
ENWW Main parts 585
4. Release the latch at the end of the rollers (callout 1) by pulling the latch tab away from the shaft, and then
slide the pick, feed, and separation rollers off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove them.
Figure 2-552 Remove rollers
5. When removing the rollers, make sure to leave the white couplers (callout 1) in place. If the couplers
become dislodged, reinstall them as shown in the figure below.
NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the
positions of the couplers and rollers.
Figure 2-553 Coupler locations
6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
▲ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
586 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04087617).
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
v. Select the Supply Status menu.
vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select Tray X Rollers.
viii. Select the tray number for the rollers just replaced.
ix. Select Reset.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 587
Cover
Figure 2-554 Cover
588 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-12 Cover
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Front cover JC95-02109A on page 590 1
2 Inner cover front JC95-02110A on page 593 1
4 Right middle cover JC63-02105A on page 600 1
5 Front cover, lower JC63-04861B 1
6 Middle left cover JC63-05635A on page 603 1
7 Cover, exit JC95-02101A on page 605 1
9 Scan left cover JC63-05587A 1
10 Left cover, upper JC63-05638A on page 608 1
11 Cover, exit rear JC63-04840B 1
14 Scan right cover JC63-05571A 1
16 Right cover, front JC63-04847C 1
17 Right cover, rear JC95-02102A on page 611 1
18 Cover, lower rear JC95-02117A on page 614 1
19 Rear cover, upper JC63-05633A on page 617 1
21 Rear cover, dummy JC63-04863B 1
22 Rear scan cover JC63-04859C 1
22 Rear scan cover (du model only) JC63-04859D 1
24 Left cover JC95-02100A on page 620 1
25 Left cover, top JC63-04862B 1
26 Cover, control panel bottom JC63-05639A 1
27 Cover, control panel top JC63-05640A 1
Not shown Cover, upper right door JC63-04916B on page 623 1
Not shown Strap, front cover JC61-04626A 1
Not shown PCA, sub USB Host JC41-00964A 1
Not shown PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A 1
ENWW Main parts 589
Front cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02109A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, front
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
590 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the front cover
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-555 Remove the front cover
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
ENWW Main parts 591
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
592 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Inner front cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit
● Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
● Step 3: Remove the front cover
● Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 5: Remove the front power cover
● Step 6: Remove the exit cover
● Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the inner front cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02110A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, Inner Front
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
ENWW Main parts 593
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the toner collection unit
1. Open the front cover.
2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 2-556 Remove the TCU
Step 2: Remove the paper dust brush
▲ Remove the paper dust brush.
594 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-557 Remove the paper dust brush
Step 3: Remove the front cover
▲ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.
Figure 2-558 Remove the front cover
Step 4: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 595
Figure 2-559 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 5: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-560 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
596 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-561 Remove the front power cover
Step 6: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-562 Remove the exit cover
Step 7: Remove the inner front cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.
ENWW Main parts 597
3. Remove seven screws.
Figure 2-563 Remove seven screws
4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-564 Remove the inner cover
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
598 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 599
Front power cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 2: Remove the front power cover
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front power cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC63-02105A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, middle right
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
600 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-565 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 2: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-566 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
ENWW Main parts 601
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-567 Remove the front power cover
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
602 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Front top inner cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front top inner cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC63-05635A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, Middle Left
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
ENWW Main parts 603
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-568 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
604 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Exit cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 2: Remove the exit cover
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02101A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, exit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
ENWW Main parts 605
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-569 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 2: Remove the exit cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-570 Remove the exit cover
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
606 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 607
Left rear corner cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the left rear corner cover
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left rear corner cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC63-05638A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, upper left
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
608 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-571 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the left rear corner cover
▲ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the upper left cover up and away from the printer to remove
it.
Figure 2-572 Remove the upper left cover
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 609
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
610 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Right rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right rear cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02102A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, Right Rear
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
ENWW Main parts 611
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-573 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-574 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
612 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 613
Lower rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower rear cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02117A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, lower rear
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
614 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-575 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-576 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 615
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
616 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Upper rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the upper rear cover.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC63-05633A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, rear upper
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 617
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-577 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the lower rear cover
▲ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.
Figure 2-578 Remove the lower rear cover
Step 3: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
618 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-579 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 619
Left cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the left cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC95-02100A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, left
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
620 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the left cover
1. Remove the top left cover.
Figure 2-580 Top left cover
2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.
Figure 2-581 Remove the left cover
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 621
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
622 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Top right cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
● Step 2: Remove the front power cover
● Step 3: Remove the top right cover
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top right cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC63-04916B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, Right Upper
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 623
Post service test
No post service test is available for this assembly.
Step 1: Remove the front top inner cover
▲ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-582 Remove the front top inner cover
Step 2: Remove the front power cover
1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover slightly
away from the printer.
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.
Figure 2-583 Remove two screws and rotate the cover
624 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-584 Remove the front power cover
Step 3: Remove the top right cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the printer
to remove it.
Figure 2-585 Remove the upper right door cover
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 625
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
626 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Right door
Figure 2-586 Right door
ENWW Main parts 627
Table 2-13 Right door
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Tray 1, door JC90-01352B on page 629 1
2 Cover, right door front JC63-04910B 1
3 Cover, dummy LCT JC63-04918B 1
4 Cover, right JC63-04920B 1
5 Cover, upper right door JC63-04916B 1
8 Right door, link JC95-01970A 1
9 Right door, side hinge JC66-04400A 1
11 Motor - step JC93-01085A 1
12 Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 3
14 Spring, ts JC61-07372A 1
23 Timing belt 6602-003183 1
29 Right door damper JC66-04398A 1
Not shown Tray 1 empty sensor 0604-001393 on page 646 1
Not shown Tray 1 paper length sensor 0604-001393 on page 664 1
Not shown Fuser out sensor (Photo Interruptor) 0604-001393 on page 682 1
Not shown Feed 2 sensor 0604-001490 on page 688 1
628 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Tray 1 unit (on the right door)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
● Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit on the right door.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC90-01352B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Tray 1, Door
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
ENWW Main parts 629
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-587 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-588 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
630 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-589 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-590 Release the right hinge
ENWW Main parts 631
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-591 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-592 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
1. Remove four screws.
632 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-593 Remove four screws
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.
Figure 2-594 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover
ENWW Main parts 633
3. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-595 Remove two screws
4. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-596 Remove one screw
634 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 2-597 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-598 Remove two screws
ENWW Main parts 635
7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).
Figure 2-599 Remove the feed guide take away upper
Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).
Figure 2-600 Release the hinge arm
636 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).
Figure 2-601 Remove one screw and bushing cover
3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-602 Remove one e-ring and bushing
ENWW Main parts 637
4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-603 Remove one e-ring and bushing
5. Remove the shaft.
Figure 2-604 Remove the shaft
638 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 2-605 Remove one screw
7. Release the hinge.
Figure 2-606 Release the hinge
ENWW Main parts 639
8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).
Figure 2-607 Remove one screw
9. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-608 Remove one screw
640 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.
Figure 2-609 Release the feed roller assembly
11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.
CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.
Figure 2-610 Rotate the feed roller assembly
ENWW Main parts 641
12. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-611 Remove three screws
13. Remove the duplex lower guide.
Figure 2-612 Remove the duplex lower guide
642 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
14. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-613 Remove one screw
15. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-614 Remove two screws
ENWW Main parts 643
16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-615 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
1
2
17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.
Figure 2-616 Release the Tray 1 unit
644 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.
Figure 2-617 Remove the Tray 1 unit
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 645
Tray 1 empty sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
● Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
● Step 5: Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001393
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Photo Interrupter
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
646 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-618 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-619 Remove the right rear cover
ENWW Main parts 647
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-620 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-621 Release the right hinge
648 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-622 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-623 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
1. Remove four screws.
ENWW Main parts 649
Figure 2-624 Remove four screws
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.
Figure 2-625 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover
650 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-626 Remove two screws
4. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-627 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 651
5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 2-628 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-629 Remove two screws
652 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).
Figure 2-630 Remove the feed guide take away upper
Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).
Figure 2-631 Release the hinge arm
ENWW Main parts 653
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).
Figure 2-632 Remove one screw and bushing cover
3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-633 Remove one e-ring and bushing
654 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-634 Remove one e-ring and bushing
5. Remove the shaft.
Figure 2-635 Remove the shaft
ENWW Main parts 655
6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 2-636 Remove one screw
7. Release the hinge.
Figure 2-637 Release the hinge
656 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).
Figure 2-638 Remove one screw
9. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-639 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 657
10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.
Figure 2-640 Release the feed roller assembly
11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.
CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.
Figure 2-641 Rotate the feed roller assembly
658 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
12. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-642 Remove three screws
13. Remove the duplex lower guide.
Figure 2-643 Remove the duplex lower guide
ENWW Main parts 659
14. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-644 Remove one screw
15. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-645 Remove two screws
660 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-646 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
1
2
17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.
Figure 2-647 Release the Tray 1 unit
ENWW Main parts 661
18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.
Figure 2-648 Remove the Tray 1 unit
Step 5: Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor
▲ Disconnect the connector, and then remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.
Figure 2-649 Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
662 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 663
Tray 1 paper length sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
● Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
● Step 5: Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001393
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Tray 1 paper length sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
664 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-650 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-651 Remove the right rear cover
ENWW Main parts 665
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-652 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-653 Release the right hinge
666 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-654 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-655 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
1. Remove four screws.
ENWW Main parts 667
Figure 2-656 Remove four screws
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.
Figure 2-657 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover
668 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-658 Remove two screws
4. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-659 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 669
5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 2-660 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-661 Remove two screws
670 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).
Figure 2-662 Remove the feed guide take away upper
Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).
Figure 2-663 Release the hinge arm
ENWW Main parts 671
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).
Figure 2-664 Remove one screw and bushing cover
3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-665 Remove one e-ring and bushing
672 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-666 Remove one e-ring and bushing
5. Remove the shaft.
Figure 2-667 Remove the shaft
ENWW Main parts 673
6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 2-668 Remove one screw
7. Release the hinge.
Figure 2-669 Release the hinge
674 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).
Figure 2-670 Remove one screw
9. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-671 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 675
10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.
Figure 2-672 Release the feed roller assembly
11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.
CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.
Figure 2-673 Rotate the feed roller assembly
676 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
12. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-674 Remove three screws
13. Remove the duplex lower guide.
Figure 2-675 Remove the duplex lower guide
ENWW Main parts 677
14. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-676 Remove one screw
15. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-677 Remove two screws
678 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-678 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
1
2
17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.
Figure 2-679 Release the Tray 1 unit
ENWW Main parts 679
18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.
Figure 2-680 Remove the Tray 1 unit
Step 5: Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor
1. Remove the Tray 1 tray upper.
Figure 2-681 Remove the Tray 1 tray upper
680 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.
Figure 2-682 Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 681
Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the fuser out sensor
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001393
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Fuser out sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
682 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-683 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-684 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Main parts 683
Figure 2-685 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-686 Release the right hinge
684 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-687 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-688 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the fuser out sensor
1. Remove the right rear cover.
2. Remove the right door.
ENWW Main parts 685
3. Remove one screw on the back, top corner of the door.
Figure 2-689 Remove one screw
4. Remove one screw on the front, top corner of the door, and then open the cover-side exit.
Figure 2-690 Remove one screw
5. Remove one screw, and then rotate the sensor holder up.
Figure 2-691 Remove one screw
686 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the fuser-out sensor from its holder.
Figure 2-692 Disconnect one connector
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 687
Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
● Step 4: Remove the feed 2 sensor
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
0604-001490
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Feed sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
688 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-693 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-694 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Main parts 689
Figure 2-695 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-696 Release the right hinge
690 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-697 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-698 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
1. Remove four screws.
ENWW Main parts 691
Figure 2-699 Remove four screws
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.
Figure 2-700 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover
692 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-701 Remove two screws
4. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-702 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 693
5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 2-703 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-704 Remove two screws
694 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).
Figure 2-705 Remove the feed guide take away upper
Step 4: Remove the feed 2 sensor
▲ Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the feed sensor located on the feed guide take away
upper.
Figure 2-706 Disconnect one connector and remove the feed sensor
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 695
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
696 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Tray 1
Figure 2-707 Tray 1
ENWW Main parts 697
Table 2-14 Tray 1
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Tray 1, main pickup JC90-01357B 1
10 Tray 1, main rollers JC93-00540B on page 699 3
11 Tray 1, bracket pickup JC90-01355A 1
11-1 Solenoid, tray 1 JC33-00029B on page 703 1
11-4 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 1
11-5 Actuator lever, empty JC66-04459A 1
698 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC93-00540B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Tray 1 (MP) Roller
Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 699
Step 1: Remove the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller
1. Open Tray 1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the cover.
NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.
Figure 2-708 Remove the cover
2. Remove the cover shown using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the
cover.
NOTE: The flag, it will need to be moved out of the way to remove cover.
Figure 2-709 Remove cover
700 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the small tab and remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller (callout 2). The flag (callout 1) will
need to be moved out of the way to release rollers. Use caution and remove slowly to avoid loosening the
parts behind the rollers. If these parts come loose, they might fall into the printer and will be difficult to
retrieve. Note the location of all components.
NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.
Figure 2-710 Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller
▲ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
v. Select the Supply Status menu.
vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select Tray X Rollers.
viii. Select Tray 1 Roller Kit.
ix. Select Reset.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 701
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
702 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Tray 1 solenoid
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the right door
● Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
● Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
● Step 5: Remove the Tray 1 solenoid
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC33-00029B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Solenoid, Tray 1
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
ENWW Main parts 703
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-711 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-712 Remove the right rear cover
704 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 2: Remove the right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
Figure 2-713 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-714 Release the right hinge
ENWW Main parts 705
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-715 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-716 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
1. Remove four screws.
706 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-717 Remove four screws
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.
Figure 2-718 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover
ENWW Main parts 707
3. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-719 Remove two screws
4. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-720 Remove one screw
708 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.
Figure 2-721 Remove the feed guide take away lower
6. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-722 Remove two screws
ENWW Main parts 709
7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one connector
(callout 1).
Figure 2-723 Remove the feed guide take away upper
Step 4: Remove the Tray 1 unit
1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).
Figure 2-724 Release the hinge arm
710 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).
Figure 2-725 Remove one screw and bushing cover
3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-726 Remove one e-ring and bushing
ENWW Main parts 711
4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).
Figure 2-727 Remove one e-ring and bushing
5. Remove the shaft.
Figure 2-728 Remove the shaft
712 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 2-729 Remove one screw
7. Release the hinge.
Figure 2-730 Release the hinge
ENWW Main parts 713
8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).
Figure 2-731 Remove one screw
9. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-732 Remove one screw
714 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.
Figure 2-733 Release the feed roller assembly
11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.
CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.
Figure 2-734 Rotate the feed roller assembly
ENWW Main parts 715
12. Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-735 Remove three screws
13. Remove the duplex lower guide.
Figure 2-736 Remove the duplex lower guide
716 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
14. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-737 Remove one screw
15. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 2-738 Remove two screws
ENWW Main parts 717
16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-739 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
1
2
17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.
Figure 2-740 Release the Tray 1 unit
718 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.
Figure 2-741 Remove the Tray 1 unit
Step 5: Remove the Tray 1 solenoid
1. Remove two screws, remove three gears, and then release Tray 1.
Figure 2-742 Remove two screws and three gears
ENWW Main parts 719
2. Remove two screws, three e-rings, and three bushings. Remove the bracket-rear.
Figure 2-743 Remove the bracket-rear
3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the frame-base.
Figure 2-744 Remove seven screws
4. Remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 1 solenoid.
Figure 2-745 Remove two screws
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
720 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 721
Right door guide
Figure 2-746 Right door guide
722 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-15 Right door guide
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Right door side guide JC95-01969A 1
2 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 1
3 Spring, tension 6107-001737 1
4 Actuator lever, dup JC66-04405A 1
6 Spring, cs 6107-001731 4
7 Idle roller, rubber JC66-02289B 4
8 Feed guide JC61-06988A 1
ENWW Main parts 723
Right door side exit
Figure 2-747 Right door exit and takeaway
724 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-16 Right door exit and takeaway
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Right door side exit JC95-01968A 1
1-2 Spring, ts 6107-001737 1
1-3 Actuator lever, fuser out JC66-04406A 1
1-4 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 1
2 Right door, side takeaway JC95-01972A 1
2-2 Photo-interrupter 0604-001490 1
Not shown Switch assembly - right door JC93-01467A 1
ENWW Main parts 725
T2 transfer assembly
Figure 2-748 T2 transfer
726 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-17 T2 transfer
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 T2 transfer JC93-01078A 1
1 T2 transfer roller assy JC93-01080A 1
ENWW Main parts 727
ADF (LX/du models)
Figure 2-749 ADF (LX models)
728 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-18 ADF (LX models)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 ADF cover open (LX) JC97-04853A on page 734 1
2 ADF pickup (LX) JC97-04856A 1
3 ADF, front cover (LX) JC63-05563A 1
4 ADF, cover rear (LX) JC63-05561A 1
7 ADF stacker (LX) JC97-04859A on page 740 1
7-4 ADF pinion gear (LX) JC66-04079A 1
7-5 Photo interrupter 0604-001393 1
ENWW Main parts 729
ADF whole unit (LX models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder whole unit assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-05074A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Document feeder whole unit assembly (LX/du models)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
730 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
1. Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover.
Figure 2-750 Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover
2. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).
Figure 2-751 Remove the document feeder connector cover
ENWW Main parts 731
3. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 2-752 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire
4. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
5. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.
Figure 2-753 Release the document feeder hinge screws
732 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.
Figure 2-754 Lift and remove the document feeder
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 733
Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX/du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover (LX models)
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) jam access cover
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04853A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Jam access cover (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
734 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover (LX models)
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-755 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-756 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
ENWW Main parts 735
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-757 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
736 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-758 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
ENWW Main parts 737
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-759 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) jam access cover
1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.
Figure 2-760 Remove the jam access cover screw
738 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access cover.
Figure 2-761 Remove the jam access cover
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 739
Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX/du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover (LX/du models)
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder input tray.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04859A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● ADF stacker (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
740 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover (LX/du models)
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-762 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-763 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
ENWW Main parts 741
Figure 2-764 Remove two screws from document back cover.
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-765 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
742 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-766 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 743
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-767 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
744 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-768 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray
1. Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw, and then remove the
hinge pin (callout 2).
Figure 2-769 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin
1
2
2. Remove the input tray. Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 745
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
746 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Document feeder (ADF) contact image sensor (CIS) (LX/du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
● Step 3: Remove the pick and feed roller assembly
● Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
JC97-04722A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Main parts 747
Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-770 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-771 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
748 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-772 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-773 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
ENWW Main parts 749
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-774 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
750 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-775 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
ENWW Main parts 751
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-776 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the pick and feed roller assembly
1. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-777 Remove four screws.
752 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove two screws on the front cover.
Figure 2-778 Remove 2 screws on front cover.
3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.
Figure 2-779 Remove 2 screw caps.
ENWW Main parts 753
4. Remove three screws and, then remove front cover.
Figure 2-780 Remove three screws and, then remove front cover.
5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.
Figure 2-781 Rotate pick/feed roller assembly to release sheet metal tab from ADF frame.
754 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards the
front (callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assy.
Figure 2-782 Release the pick/feed roller assembly.
ENWW Main parts 755
7. Rrotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document feeder pick
roller assembly.
Figure 2-783 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly
TIP: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When reinstalling, hold
up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.
Figure 2-784 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags.
Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly
1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover must
reinstalled with the same orientation.
756 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-785 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).
Figure 2-786 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin
3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 757
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
758 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX/du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
● Step 2: Remove the main motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the main motor assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00163A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Main motor assembly (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Main parts 759
Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-787 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-788 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
760 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-789 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 761
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-790 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
762 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-791 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the main motor
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-792 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws
2
1
2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.
ENWW Main parts 763
Figure 2-793 Main motor and gear belt
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
764 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 765
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX/du models)
Figure 2-794 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX/dn models)
766 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-19 ADF exterior and pickup (LX/dn models)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 LX/dn PCA JC92-02962A on page 773 1
1-5 LX/dn, hinge r JC97-04528A 1
1-6 LX/dn, hinge l JC97-04527A 1
2-2 Photo interrupter 0604-001393 1
2-5 Pick Roller Assy - LX/dn JC97-04857A on page 768 1
2-5-1 LX/dn pick roller JC97-04099A 1
2-5-6 LX feed roller JC97-04860A 1
2-11 LX/dn - Spring 6107-003581 1
ENWW Main parts 767
Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX/du model)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
Two document feeder types are available for this product. Products with “z” bundles are equipped with “Flow”
document feeders. Products with “du” bundles are equipped with the standard document feeder.
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04857A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Pick feed roller assy (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
768 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
1. Open the document feeder cover.
Figure 2-795 Open the document feeder cover
2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.
NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)
Figure 2-796 Remove the document feeder cover screws
ENWW Main parts 769
3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-797 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector
4. NOTE: The figure below shows the roller cover and the roller assembly when removed.
Figure 2-798 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly
770 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both sides
of the assembly) are correctly isntalled and move freely.
Figure 2-799 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket
6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the
shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.
NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.
Figure 2-800 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 771
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
772 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX/du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02962A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● LX ADF PCA assembly du models only)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
ENWW Main parts 773
Figure 2-801 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-802 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
774 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-803 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 775
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-804 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
776 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-805 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA
1. Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, and then remove four screws.
Figure 2-806 Document feeder PCA
2. Remove the document feeder PCA.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 777
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
778 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)
Figure 2-807 ADF main frame (LX/dn models)
13
ENWW Main parts 779
Table 2-20 ADF main frame assembly (LX/dn models)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 LX/dn separation housing JC97-04586A 1
1-2 ADF separation roller JC97-04852A on page 781 1
1-2-1 ADF separation sub roller JC97-04861A 1
1-3 Friction pad JC69-01326A 1
5-5 Actuator, output JC66-04104A 1
6-2 Actuator, feed out JC66-04105A 1
6-3 Actuator, registration JC66-04103A 1
6-4 Photo interrupter 0604-001381 1
6-5 Photo interrupter 0604–001393 1
7 Motor, bldc type 1 JC31-00156A on page 788 1
13 Motor - Step main JC31-00163A 1
16 LX/dn - Motor feed DC JC47-00038A 1
17 LX/dn - Link Cover Open JC66-04100A 1
19 LX/dn - Contact Image Sensor JC97-04722A 1
780 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX/du models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the LX/du document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly
● Step 2: Remove the LX/du document feeder separation roller
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder separation roller assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04852A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● ADF Separation roller assembly (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Main parts 781
Step 1: Remove the LX/du document feeder pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly
1. Open the document feeder cover.
Figure 2-808 Open the document feeder cover
2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.
NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)
Figure 2-809 Remove the document feeder cover screws
782 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-810 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector
4. NOTE: The figure below shows the roller cover and the roller assembly when removed.
Figure 2-811 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly
ENWW Main parts 783
5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both sides
of the assembly) are correctly isntalled and move freely.
Figure 2-812 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket
6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the
shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.
NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.
Figure 2-813 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips.
Step 2: Remove the LX/du document feeder separation roller
1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.
784 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-814 Remove the separation roller cover
2. NOTE: The figure below shows the roller cover and the roller assembly when removed.
Figure 2-815 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly
ENWW Main parts 785
3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.
Figure 2-816 Remove the separation roller assembly
4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.
Figure 2-817 Separation roller assembly spring
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
786 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 787
Document feeder feed motor (LX models)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 2: Remove the feed motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the feed motor assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
Click here to view a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00156A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Feed motor assembly (LX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
788 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-818 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-819 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
ENWW Main parts 789
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-820 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
790 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-821 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
ENWW Main parts 791
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-822 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the feed motor
1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the way.
Figure 2-823 Feed motor cable guide
792 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.
Figure 2-824 Remove the feed motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 793
PCA-Scanner (LX/du models only)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the scan joint board
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Scanner PCA assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02964A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● PCA - ADF HIC (GX only)
JC92-02964B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● PCA-ADF sGX (du models only)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
794 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-825 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-826 Remove the upper rear cover
ENWW Main parts 795
Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
1. Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover.
Figure 2-827 Remove the formatter cover and the upper rear cover
2. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).
Figure 2-828 Remove the document feeder connector cover
796 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 2-829 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire
4. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
5. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.
Figure 2-830 Release the document feeder hinge screws
ENWW Main parts 797
6. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.
Figure 2-831 Lift and remove the document feeder
Step 4: Remove the scan joint board
1. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
Figure 2-832 Release scan-left cover
798 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-right cover.
Figure 2-833 Remove scan-right cover
2
1
3. At the top of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws.
Figure 2-834 Remove three screws
ENWW Main parts 799
4. At the back of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-rear
cover.
Figure 2-835 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover
5. Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scanner PCA.
Figure 2-836 Remove screws and release scanner PCA
NOTE: There are two empty connectors.
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
800 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 801
Flow ADF (GX/sGX)
NOTE: Flow automatic document feeder: sGX; dn/z bundles: GX.
802 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW Main parts 803
Figure 2-837 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)
804 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-21 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 ADF Cover open JC97-04869A 1
2 Pickup, upper - GX JC97-04872A 1
2 Pickup, upper - sGX JC97-04646B 1
3 Cover, hinge - GX/sGX JC66-02270A 1
5 Cover, front - GX/sGX JC97-04881A 1
6 Dummy, front - GX/sGX JC97-04879A 1
8 Damper - GX/sGX JC97-04692A 1
9 Cover, bottom - GX/sGX JC97-04880A 1
10 Main frame - GX JC97-04883A 1
10 Main frame sGX JC97-04882A 1
13 Cover, rear - GX/sGX JC63-05566A 1
Not shown PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02967A on page 811 1
Not shown PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02966A on page 811 1
Complete Flow ADF - GX JC97-04955A on page 806 1
Complete Non Flow ADF - sGX JC97-04956A on page 806 1
ENWW Main parts 805
Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the flow ADF whole unit assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04955A JC97-04956A
● Flow ADF - GX ● Non Flow ADF - sGX
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the ADF whole unit
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
806 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-838 Remove document feeder connector cover
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-839 Remove the cable choke
ENWW Main parts 807
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
Figure 2-840 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 2-841 Alignment marks
808 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the screw on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-842 Remove screws
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-843 Release the document feeder
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 809
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
810 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly
● Step 4: Remove the paper path cover
● Step 5: Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02967A JC92-02966A
● PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) ● PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only)
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 811
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-844 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-845 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
812 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-846 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-847 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
ENWW Main parts 813
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-848 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
814 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-849 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
ENWW Main parts 815
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-850 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly
▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2, including one ground wire), and then
remove the pickup roller assembly.
Figure 2-851 Remove the pickup roller assembly
Step 4: Remove the paper path cover
▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.
816 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-852 Remove the document feeder paper path cover
Step 5: Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA
1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 2-853 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 817
2. Remove the pick/feed cover.
Figure 2-854 Remove the pick/feed cover
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.
Figure 2-855 Remove the ultrasonic sensor
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
818 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 819
ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
NOTE: Flow automatic document feeder: sGX; dn/z bundles: GX.
820 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW Main parts 821
Figure 2-856 ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
822 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-22 Flow ADF open cover
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Cover, open (GX/sGX) JC97-04869A on page 824 1
2 Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) JC97-04696B 1
2-5-1 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 4
ENWW Main parts 823
ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04869A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Open cover - GX/sGX
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
824 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-857 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-858 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
ENWW Main parts 825
Figure 2-859 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-860 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
826 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-861 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 827
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-862 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
828 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-863 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the document feeder jam access cover
1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.
Figure 2-864 Disconnect one connector
ENWW Main parts 829
2. Disconnect the ground wire.
Figure 2-865 Remove the jam access cover ground wire
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout 2)
Figure 2-866 Remove the jam access cover door arm support
4. Remove the open cover.
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
830 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 831
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
NOTE: Flow automatic document feeder: sGX; dn/z bundles: GX.
832 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW Main parts 833
Figure 2-867 ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
834 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-23 ADF pickup roller assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
2-1 Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) JC97-04650A on page 836 1
2-2 Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 1
2-5 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 1
ENWW Main parts 835
ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ADF pickup roller assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC97-04650A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Pick feed roller assembly - GX/sGX
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
836 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly
1. Open the document feeder top cover.
2. Remove the pick roller assembly:
▲ Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and one ground wire (callout
3), and then remove the pick roller assembly.
Figure 2-868 Remove the pick roller assembly
3. Remove the pick rollers:
a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-869 Remove the pick roller assembly cover
ENWW Main parts 837
b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the shaft
coupler.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.
Figure 2-870 Remove the pick roller components
838 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pick roller assembly.
Figure 2-871 Remove the pick roller assembly
Figure 2-872 Pick roller components-disassembled
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: ADF pick roller
▲ After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
ENWW Main parts 839
v. Select the Supply Status menu.
vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select ADF Pick Roller.
viii. Select ADF Pick Roller.
ix. Select Reset.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
840 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
NOTE: Flow automatic document feeder: sGX; dn/z bundles: GX.
ENWW Main parts 841
Figure 2-873 ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
842 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-24 ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Stacker -GX/sGX JC97-04658B on page 844 1
1-6 Photo-interrupter 0604–001381 1
6 Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 1
Not shown Flow ADF - stacker upper CM JC82-00693A 1
ENWW Main parts 843
ADF input tray (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove the dampening unit
● Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit
● Step 5: Remove the input tray
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the input tray assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04658B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Stacker - Gx/sGX
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
844 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-874 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-875 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
ENWW Main parts 845
Figure 2-876 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-877 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
846 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-878 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 847
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-879 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
848 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-880 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the dampening unit
▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.
Figure 2-881 Remove the document feeder damping unit
Step 4: Remove the pickup and feed unit
1. Remove four screws.
ENWW Main parts 849
Figure 2-882 Remove four screws.
2. Remove two screws on the front cover.
Figure 2-883 Remove 2 screws on front cover.
850 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.
Figure 2-884 Remove 2 screw caps.
4. Remove three screws and, then remove front cover.
Figure 2-885 Remove three screws and, then remove front cover.
ENWW Main parts 851
5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.
Figure 2-886 Rotate pick/feed roller assembly to release sheet metal tab from ADF frame.
6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards the
front (callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assy.
Figure 2-887 Release the pick/feed roller assembly.
852 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
7. Rrotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document feeder pick
roller assembly.
Figure 2-888 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly
TIP: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When reinstalling, hold
up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.
Figure 2-889 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags.
Step 5: Remove the input tray
1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.
ENWW Main parts 853
Figure 2-890 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector
2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
854 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
NOTE: Flow automatic document feeder: sGX; dn/z bundles: GX.
ENWW Main parts 855
Figure 2-891 Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
856 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-25 Flow ADF main
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04915A on page 858 1
1-2 Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX JC97-04652A 1
5 Scan in lower asembly - GX/sGX JC97-04656B on page 901 1
7 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 0609-001558 on page 862 1
8 Drive release pickup - GX/sGX JC97-04681A on page 870 1
11 PCA - AF HIC (GX only) {Xref Error! Target does not exist.} 1
11 PCA - sGX {Xref Error! Target does not exist.} 1
12 Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX JC97-04680A on page 870 4
13 Hinge L - GX/sGX JC97-04640A 1
14 Hinge R - GX/sGX JC97-04641A 1
16 Motor, ADF fan JC61-07694A 1
17 Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) JC31-00168A on page 895 1
19 Drive - GX/sGX JC97-04679A on page 870 1
20 Step motor, ip JC31-00177A on page 870 1
21 Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX JC31-00146A on page 883 1
23 Input tray - GX/sGX JC97-04668B 1
26 White roller - GX/sGX JC97-04687A 1
27 Scan out - GX/sGX JC97-04830A 1
29 Motor, drive release scan JC97-04682A 1
36 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 6602-001730 3
Not shown PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) JC92-02967A 1
Not shown PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) JC92-02966A 1
ENWW Main parts 857
Flow ADF separation roller assembly (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Flow ADF separation roller assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
JC97-04915A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Separation roller assembly - GX\sGX
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
858 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly
1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.
Figure 2-892 Remove the separation roller cover
2. Remove one plastic clip.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.
Figure 2-893 Remove one plastic clip
ENWW Main parts 859
3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.
Figure 2-894 Remove the separation roller
Figure 2-895 Remove the separation roller
NOTE: Ensure the sponge washer (circled above) is retained during the removal of the roller assembly–it
may fall off.
Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
Special installation instructions: Flow ADF separation roller
▲ After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
i. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
ii. Select the Service menu.
860 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
iii. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.
iv. Select the Service Tools menu.
v. Select the Supply Status menu.
vi. Select Field Replacement Unit.
vii. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.
viii. Select ADF Separation Roller.
ix. Select Reset.
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 861
Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly
● Step 4: Remove the paper path cover
● Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
0609-001558
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Contact image sensor - GX/sGX
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
862 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-896 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-897 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
ENWW Main parts 863
Figure 2-898 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-899 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
864 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-900 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 865
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-901 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
866 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-902 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly
▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2, including one ground wire), and then
remove the pickup roller assembly.
Figure 2-903 Remove the pickup roller assembly
Step 4: Remove the paper path cover
▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.
ENWW Main parts 867
Figure 2-904 Remove the document feeder paper path cover
Step 5: Remove the CIS assembly
1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover must
reinstalled with the same orientation.
Figure 2-905 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws
868 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).
Figure 2-906 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin
3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 869
Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2
● Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors
● Step 5: Remove the exit motor
● Step 6: Remove the feed motor
● Step 7: Remove the REGI motor
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the rear motor assemblies.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04679A JC97-04681A JC97-04680A JC97-04680A
● Drive - GX/sGX ● Drive release pickup - ● Pickup motor ● Pre_REGI motor
GX/sGX
JC97-04680A JC97-04680A JC31-00177A
● Exit motor ● Feed motor ● REGI motor
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
870 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 871
Step 1: Identify the document feeder motors
▲ Use the figure below to locate the motor.
Figure 2-907 Document feeder motors
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Table 2-26 Document feeder motors
Callout Description
1 Motor 1
2 Motor 2
3 Pickup motor
4 Pre_REGI motor
5 Exit motor
6 Feed motor
7 REGI motor
872 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-908 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-909 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
ENWW Main parts 873
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-910 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
874 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-911 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
ENWW Main parts 875
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-912 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
876 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 3: Remove motors 1 and 2
▲ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
Figure 2-913 Remove the motor
ENWW Main parts 877
Step 4: Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors
1. Loosen the cable guide
2. Disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
Figure 2-914 Disconnect one connector
878 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the motor off the
screws to remove.
Figure 2-915 Pickup motor
Figure 2-916 Pre-REGI motor
4. To reinstall the motor, do the following:
● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.
● Install the tension spring.
● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.
ENWW Main parts 879
Step 5: Remove the exit motor
1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the main fan.
Figure 2-917 Remove the main fan
2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then remove
the exit motor.
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.
Figure 2-918 Remove the motor
880 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 6: Remove the feed motor
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-919 Disconnect one connector
2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.
Figure 2-920 Remove the motor
ENWW Main parts 881
Step 7: Remove the REGI motor
1. Remove the rear cover
2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor
3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to remove.
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
882 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA fan assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00146A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Document feeder PCA fan assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 883
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-921 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-922 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
884 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-923 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 885
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-924 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
886 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-925 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the document feeder PCA fan
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.
Figure 2-926 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector
Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 887
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
888 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF front motor (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 2: Remove the front motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the front motor assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00177A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Motor, step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 889
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-927 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-928 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
890 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-929 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 891
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-930 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
892 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-931 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the front motor
▲ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.
Figure 2-932 Remove the document feeder front motor
ENWW Main parts 893
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
894 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF contact image sensor fan (CIS) (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS fan assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00168A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● CIS fan
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 895
Step 1: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-933 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-934 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
896 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-935 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
ENWW Main parts 897
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-936 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
898 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-937 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 2: Remove the document feeder CIS fan
▲ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.
Figure 2-938 Remove the document feeder PCA fan
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 899
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
900 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Flow ADF scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
● Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
● Step 3: Remove the scan in lower assembly
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the ADF scan in lower assembly
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04656B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Scan in lower assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
● #2 JIS stubby screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 901
Step 1: Remove the document feeder front cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-939 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws
2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder front cover, and then remove the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-940 Remove the document feeder front cover bottom screws
Step 2: Remove the document feeder back cover
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
902 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-941 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Using a JIS #2 stubby screwdriver, remove five screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-942 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
ENWW Main parts 903
3. Release the tab on the right side of the back cover.
Figure 2-943 Release one tab on the right side of back cover.
904 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Release the three tabs on back cover to remove the back cover.
Figure 2-944 Release three tabs on the back cover.
NOTE: The tabs on the underside of the cover.
ENWW Main parts 905
5. Remove the back cover from the left to right as shown in the photo.
Figure 2-945 Remove back cover.
TIP: To reinstall cover, install from the right to left.
Step 3: Remove the scan in lower assembly
1. Remove two screws (ADF front).
Figure 2-946 Remove two screws
906 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove five screws (ADF back; four sheet-metal and one ground).
Figure 2-947 Remove five screws
3. Remove one screw (ADF back).
Figure 2-948 Remove one screw
ENWW Main parts 907
4. At the front corner, carefully pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF frame.
IMPORTANT: Locate the dimples in the scan in lower assembly. Separate the dimples from the ADF frame.
NOTE: When installing a replacement scan in lower assembly, do not crease or wrinkle the attached Mylar.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Figure 2-949 Pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
908 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
PCA-Scanner sGX (DN models only)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the scan joint board
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Scanner PCA assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02964A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● PCA - ADF HIC (GX only)
JC92-02964B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● PCA-ADF sGX (du models only)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
ENWW Main parts 909
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-950 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-951 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 3: Remove the document feeder whole unit
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
910 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-952 Remove document feeder connector cover
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-953 Remove the cable choke
ENWW Main parts 911
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
Figure 2-954 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 2-955 Alignment marks
912 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-956 Remove screws
ENWW Main parts 913
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-957 Release the document feeder
Figure 2-958 Remove two screw and lift up to remove ADF
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.
Step 4: Remove the scan joint board
1. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
914 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-959 Release scan-left cover
2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-right cover.
Figure 2-960 Remove scan-right cover
2
1
ENWW Main parts 915
3. At the top of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws.
Figure 2-961 Remove three screws
4. At the back of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-rear
cover.
Figure 2-962 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover
916 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
5. Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scanner PCA.
Figure 2-963 Remove screws and release scanner PCA
NOTE: There are two empty connectors.
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 917
Image scanner
Figure 2-964 Image scanner
918 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-27 Flow ADF image scanner
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Scanner glass JC97-04522B on page 920 1
2 PCA scanner JC92-02781A 1
3 Tempered scan glass JC01-00101A 1
4 Scanner open sensor JC97-04516A 1
5 Scanner front lamp JC97-04521A on page 922 1
7 Motor, step JC31-00158A 1
ENWW Main parts 919
Scanner glass
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the scanner glass
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner glass.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04522B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Scanner glass
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the scanner glass
▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.
920 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-965 Remove scanner glass
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 921
LED lamp module
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
● Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
● Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit
● Step 4: Remove the scanner glass
● Step 5: Remove the LED lamp module
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the LED lamp module assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04521A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Scanner - front lamp
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
922 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Step 1: Remove the formatter cover
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.
Figure 2-966 Remove the formatter cover
Step 2: Remove the upper rear cover
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 2-967 Remove the upper rear cover
Step 3: Remove the flow ADF whole unit
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
ENWW Main parts 923
Figure 2-968 Remove document feeder connector cover
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-969 Remove the cable choke
924 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
Figure 2-970 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 2-971 Alignment marks
ENWW Main parts 925
5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-972 Remove screws
926 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-973 Release the document feeder
Figure 2-974 Remove two screw and lift up to remove ADF
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.
Step 4: Remove the scanner glass
▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.
ENWW Main parts 927
Figure 2-975 Remove scanner glass
Step 5: Remove the LED lamp module
1. Remove the transparent tape.
Figure 2-976 Remove transparent tape
2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 2-977 Disconnect cable
928 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Remove four screws. Release the LED lamp module.
Figure 2-978 Remove screws and release LED lamp module
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Main parts 929
Image scanner, lower
Figure 2-979 Flow ADF image scanner, lower
930 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-28 Flow ADF image scanner, lower
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Scanner - FFC CCD JC97-04509A 1
2 Scanner - guide harness JC97-04512A 1
3 Scanner - APS JC97-04507A on page 935 1
4 Scanner assembly - CCD and lens JC97-04523B on page 932 1
Not shown Photo interrupter 604-001453 1
Not shown Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 JC81-09891A 1
ENWW Main parts 931
Scanner assembly - CDD and lens
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the scanner glass
● Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner assembly - CDD and lens.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04523B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Scanner assembly - CDD and lens
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the scanner glass
▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.
932 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-980 Remove scanner glass
Step 2: Remove the scanner imaging unit
1. Remove four screws, and then release the imaging unit cover.
Figure 2-981 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover
2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 2-982 Disconnect flat cable
ENWW Main parts 933
3. Remove two screws and release the scanner assembly - CDD and lens.
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting only.
Figure 2-983 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
934 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
APS sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
● Step 2: Remove the scanner glass
● Step 3: Remove the APS sensor
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the APS sensor assembly.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC97-04507A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● APS sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
● Connect the power cable.
● Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Main parts 935
Step 1: Remove the document feeder whole unit
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.
Figure 2-984 Remove document feeder connector cover
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-985 Remove the cable choke
936 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
Figure 2-986 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a
full 90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 2-987 Alignment marks
ENWW Main parts 937
5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-988 Remove screws
938 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-989 Release the document feeder
Figure 2-990 Remove two screw and lift up to remove ADF
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.
Step 2: Remove the scanner glass
▲ Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.
ENWW Main parts 939
Figure 2-991 Remove scanner glass
Step 3: Remove the APS sensor
1. Remove the joint board cover.
Figure 2-992 Remove joint board cover
2. Remove one screw.
Figure 2-993 Remove screw
940 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Disconnect the harness.
Figure 2-994 Disconnect harness
4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.
Figure 2-995 Remove screws and release APS sensor
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Main parts 941
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
942 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW Main parts 943
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
DCF main
Figure 2-996 DCF main
944 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-29 DCF main
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Machinery, fastener screw JC60-00078A 2
2 DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) JC90-01649A on page 946 1
3 Hex screw 6009-001665 19
4 Feed drive opt JC93-01135A on page 952 1
5 Drive pickup assembly JC93-01063C on page 956 2
6 Cassette, fifth JC90-01652A 1
7 Cassette, fourth JC90-01654A 1
8 DCF second pickup JC90-01680A on page 960 1
9 DCF first pickup JC90-01679A on page 960 1
10 Timing belt 6602-003185 1
14 DCF, sub-auto closing JC90-01677A 1
Not shown Rollers - pick, feed, sep JC93-01092A 2
Not shown Photo-interrupter 0604-001490 1
Not shown Clutch one way JC66-00977A 1
Not shown Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A 1
Not shown SF left cassette rail assembly JC93-01435A 2
Not shown SF right cassette rail assembly JC93-01045A 2
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 945
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the printer right door
● Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF right door.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC90-01649A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● DCF right door
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
946 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-997 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-998 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the printer right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 947
Figure 2-999 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-1000 Release the right hinge
948 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-1001 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-1002 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 949
Figure 2-1003 Remove the lower right cover
2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).
Figure 2-1004 Slide the hinge pin
950 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).
Figure 2-1005 Remove the DCF right door
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 951
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC93-01135A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● SF Drive Feed Assy (Opt)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
952 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1006 Remove the DCF rear cover
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.
Figure 2-1007 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 953
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 2-1008 Remove the feed drive unit
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
Figure 2-1009 Remove the feed motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
954 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 955
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC93-01063C
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive pickup assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
956 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1010 Remove the DCF rear cover
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup assembly.
Figure 2-1011 Remove the DCF pickup assembly
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 957
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup assembly
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC93-01063C
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive pickup assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
958 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1012 Remove the DCF rear cover
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup assembly
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup assembly.
Figure 2-1013 Remove the DCF pickup assembly
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 959
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the printer right door
● Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
● Step 4: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup units.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC90-01679A JC90-01680A
● First pickup assembly ● Second pickup assembly
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the printer right rear cover
1. Open the right door.
960 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.
Figure 2-1014 Remove four screws
3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.
Figure 2-1015 Remove the right rear cover
Step 2: Remove the printer right door
1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 961
Figure 2-1016 Disconnect one connector
2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension
off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.
Figure 2-1017 Release the right hinge
962 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.
Figure 2-1018 Release the left dampener
4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the door
away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.
Figure 2-1019 Remove the right door
Step 3: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door
1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 963
Figure 2-1020 Remove the lower right cover
2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).
Figure 2-1021 Slide the hinge pin
964 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).
Figure 2-1022 Remove the DCF right door
Step 4: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 2-1023 Remove two screws and the cable cover
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 965
2. Remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.
Figure 2-1024 Remove five screws and two brackets
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide (callout 2).
Remove eight screws (callout 3).
Figure 2-1025 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws
966 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
4. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.
Figure 2-1026 Remove the pickup units
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 967
DCF frame
Figure 2-1027 DCF frame
968 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-30 DCF frame
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Frame, left cst rail assembly JC93-01435A 2
2 Frame, right cst rail assembly JC93-01045A 2
6 DCF sub-takeaway interlock JC90-01385A 1
14 Caster 6109-001138 4
15 DCF guide adjust JC61-04871A 4
18 DCF PCA JC92-02738D on page 970 1
23 DCF, main harness JC39-02276A 1
25 DCF, sub harness JC39-02278A 1
30 DCF, timeout harness JC39-02268A 1
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 969
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF PCA.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02738D
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● PCA-MX7 DCF
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
970 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1028 Remove the DCF rear cover
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.
Figure 2-1029 Remove the DCF PCA
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 971
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
972 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
DCF rear frame
Figure 2-1030 DCF rear frame
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 973
Table 2-31 DCF rear frame
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Ground plate JC61-03002A 2
6 Main frame rear auto-size holder JC93-00018A 2
6-2 PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A on page 975 2
974 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Paper size sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the paper size sensor
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the paper size sensor.
Click here to view a video of this procedure.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02622A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Paper size sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 975
Step 1: Remove the paper size sensor
▲ Do the following:
● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.
● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 2-1031 Remove screws
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
976 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Opt feed drive
Figure 2-1032 Opt feed drive
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 977
Table 2-32 Opt feed drive
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Opt feed drive JC93-01135A on page 952 1
1 Timing belt, gear 6602-003670 1
2 Step motor, ip JC31-00177A 1
8 Hex screw 6009-001665 1
978 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC93-01135A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● SF Drive Feed Assy (Opt)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the DCF rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 979
Figure 2-1033 Remove the DCF rear cover
Step 2: Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.
Figure 2-1034 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer
980 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 2-1035 Remove the feed drive unit
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
Figure 2-1036 Remove the feed motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 981
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
982 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
DCF second pickup
Figure 2-1037 DCF second pickup
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 983
Table 2-33 DCF second pickup
Ref Description Part number Qty
4 E-ring 6044-000125 6
8 Clutch one way JC66-00977A 4
11 Sheet sensor JC63-03776A 2
13 Frame, main pick roller JC93-01092A 3
14 Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A 1
16 Screw, tap type 6003–000269 4
17 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 1
20 Bush-6, dl JC61-00884A 2
984 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 985
2000-sheet HCI (department)
2K HCI main
Figure 2-1038 2K HCI main
986 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-34 2K HCI main
Ref Description Part number Qty
2 Feed drive, HCI JC93-01114A 1
3 Pickup drive JC90-01115A 1
4 Lift drive, shift assembly JC93-01118A 1
5 HCI right door (takeaway) JC90-01646A 1
6 Cassette JC90-01642A 1
7 Assy - main pickup JC90-01736A 1
8 Drive takeaway roller JC93-01119A 1
10 Sub-auto closer JC90-01382A 1
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 987
2K HCI drive
Figure 2-1039 2K HCI drive
988 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-35 2K HCI drive
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 Motor step, 1p JC31-00177A on page 990 1
1-2 Timing belt, gear 6602-003670 1
2 Pickup drive JC93-01115A 1
2-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01083A on page 993 1
3-1 Motor shift gear JC31-00125A on page 996 1
3-2 Motor geared JC31-00109A on page 998 1
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 989
Bottom HCI tray feed motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00177A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Bottom HCI tray feed motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
990 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1040 Remove the rear cover
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor
1. Disconnect two motor connectors, and open the harness clamp.
Figure 2-1041 Disconnect two connectors and open the clamp
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 2-1042 Remove the feed drive unit
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 991
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
Figure 2-1043 Remove the feed motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
992 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC93-01083A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Bottom HCI tray pickup motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 993
Figure 2-1044 Remove the rear cover
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.
Figure 2-1045 Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
994 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 995
Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00125A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
996 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1046 Remove the rear cover
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor
▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.
Figure 2-1047 Remove the shaft motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 997
Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00109A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
998 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1048 Remove the rear cover
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and the remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.
Figure 2-1049 Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 999
2K HCI cassette
Figure 2-1050 2K HCI cassette
1000 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-36 2K HCI cassette
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Cassette JC90-01642A 1
2 Connector holder, scf JC61-01742A 1
3 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 4
14 Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) JB61-00076A 1
29 Cassette guide rail JC61-07471A 1
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 1001
2K HCI frame
Figure 2-1051 2K HCI frame
1002 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-37 2K HCI frame
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Idle roller, cst JC61-03331A 2
6 Adjust feet (guide) JC61-04871A 4
7 Caster 6109-001138 4
13 PCA - Department JC92-02738B on page 1004 1
14 Cable harness, sub if JC39-02285A 1
15 Cable harness, heater JC39-02284A 1
16 Harness, main if JC39-02283A 1
19 Harness, inner tray JC39-02286A 1
20 Cable harness, motor JC39-02279A 1
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 1003
Bottom HCI tray PCA
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02738B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● PCA - Department HCI
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the bottom HCI rear cover
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.
1004 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1052 Remove the rear cover
Step 2: Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA
▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.
Figure 2-1053 Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 1005
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1006 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
2K HCI main pickup
Figure 2-1054 2K HCI main pickup
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 1007
Table 2-38 2K HCI main pickup
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 HCI main JC93-01139A 1
4 Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A 1
5 Roller, pick, feed, and separation JC93-01092A 3
6 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 1
11 Roller - feed takeaway JC66-04607A 1
16 Bush-6, D (L) JC61-00884A 1
25 Roller - right door feed takeaway JC66-04670A 1
28 Pulley, belt JC66-04281A 1
1008 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW 2000-sheet HCI (department) 1009
3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only)
3K sHCI main 1
Figure 2-1055 3K sHCI main 1
1010 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Table 2-39 3K HCI main 1
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Left cover JC63-04797B 1
2 Screw cap JC67-00711D 3
3 Pickup cover JC63-04798B 1
4 Assermbly, rear cover LCT JC90-01660A on page 1012 1
5 Link door JC66–04279A 2
6 Link holder, hinge r JC61-06568A 1
7 Link door, rear 2 JC66-04277A 1
15 Link door, front 2 JC66-04278A 1
16 Link holder, hinge f JC61-06567A 1
Not shown PCA - 3K sHCI JC92-02738C on page 1014 1
Not shown Screw, M3 6001-000130 1
Not shown Screw, M4 6001-002284 1
Not shown Screw, tap type M4 6003-001256 1
Not shown Screw, M3 6009-001664 1
Not shown Screw, M3 6009-001665 1
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1011
Side HCI rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI rear cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI rear cover.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC90-01660A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Assy - Cover, Rear LCT
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the side HCI rear cover
▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.
1012 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1056 Remove the sHCI rear cover
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1013
Side sHCI PCA
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
● Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
● Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI PCA
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI PCA.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC92-02738C
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Side HCI PCA
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.
1014 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1057 Right sHCI cover
Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.
Figure 2-1058 Remove the sHCI cable cover
Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.
Figure 2-1059 Remove the sHCI rear cover
Step 4: Remove the side HCI PCA
▲ Disconnect all connectors. Remove three screws, and replace the sHCI PCA.
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1015
Figure 2-1060 sHCI PCA
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1016 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3K HCI main 3
Figure 2-1061 3K HCI main 3
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1017
Table 2-40 3K HCI main 3
Ref Description Part number Qty
8-1 Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 1
8-3 Feed pulley gear JC66-04295A 1
8-4 Drive motor, step JC93-01083A on page 1019 1
8-5 Step motor, IP JC31-00163A on page 1022 1
8-6 Drive gear LCT PH JC66-04294A 1
9-1 Gear motor JC31-00109A on page 1026 1
10 Motor harness JC39-02287A 1
1018 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Side HCI pickup motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
● Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
● Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI pickup motor
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI pickup motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC93-01083A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Side HCI pickup motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1019
Figure 2-1062 Right sHCI cover
Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.
Figure 2-1063 Remove the sHCI cable cover
Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.
Figure 2-1064 Remove the sHCI rear cover
Step 4: Remove the side HCI pickup motor
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then replace the pickup motor.
1020 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1065 Pickup motor
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1021
Side HCI feed motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
● Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
● Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI feed motor
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI feed motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00163A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Side HCI feed motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.
1022 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1066 Right sHCI cover
Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.
Figure 2-1067 Remove the sHCI cable cover
Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.
Figure 2-1068 Remove the sHCI rear cover
Step 4: Remove the side HCI feed motor
1. Disconnect two connectors. Open the cable clamp. Remove three screws, and then remove the Drive-PH
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1023
Figure 2-1069 Drive PH
2. Remove two screws, and then replace the feed motor.
Figure 2-1070 Feed motor
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1024 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1025
Side HCI lift-up motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
● Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
● Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
● Step 4: Remove the side HCI lift-up motor
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the side HCI lift-up motor.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
JC31-00109A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Side HCI lift-up motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.
○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Step 1: Remove the side HCI right cover
▲ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.
1026 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 2-1071 Right sHCI cover
Step 2: Remove the side HCI cable cover
▲ Remove the side HCI cable cover.
Figure 2-1072 Remove the sHCI cable cover
Step 3: Remove the side HCI rear cover
▲ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.
Figure 2-1073 Remove the sHCI rear cover
Step 4: Remove the side HCI lift-up motor
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then replace the sHCI lift-up motor.
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1027
Figure 2-1074 sHCI lift-up motor
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1028 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3K HCI main 5
Figure 2-1075 3K HCI main 5
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1029
Table 2-41 3K HCI main 5
Ref Description Part number Qty
9 Actuator SNS JC66-04290A 1
12-2 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 2
15 Connect sensor harness JC39-02291A 1
16 Plow harness JC39-02288A 1
1030 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3K HCI main 6
Figure 2-1076 3K HCI main 6
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1031
Table 2-42 3K HCI main 6
Ref Description Part number Qty
8 Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A 1
9 Frame, main pick roller JC93-01092A 1
13 Plow harness JC39-02288A 1
1032 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
Pickup cover unit
Figure 2-1077 Pickup cover unit
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1033
Table 2-43 Pickup cover unit
Ref Description Part number Qty
2 Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 1
9 Clutch, one way JC66-00977A 2
10 Idle holder, one way JC61-01288A 1
16 Pickup cover lever JC63-04799A 1
17 Bush-6, D (L) JC61-00884A 2
25 Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 2
26 Actuator, empty pickup JC66-04276A 1
30 Roller, pick, feed, sep JC93-01092A 3
1034 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3K sHCI frame
Figure 2-1078 3K sHCI frame
14
ENWW 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E87640/50/60 only) 1035
Table 2-44 3K sHCI frame
Ref Description Part number Qty
7 PCA - 3K sHCI JC92-02738C 1
11 Assembly, frame latch rear sensor JC93-01124A 1
14 Assy - frame latch sensor front JC93-01125A 1
15 Assembly, frame interlock JC93-01123A 1
1036 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW
3 Problem solving
● Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview
● Troubleshooting process
● Tools for troubleshooting
● Clear paper jams
● Service mode (tech mode; du models)
● Print quality troubleshooting guide
● Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models)
● Adjusting the Flow ADF skew
ENWW 1037
Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview
Error codes
Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current printer status
or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set structure
with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).
● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error. For
example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.
● The remaining four characters (WX, Y, and Z values) further define the error.
HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message document
(CPMD) for each printer.
The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the
error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.
The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error codes.
Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters
Error code System Component System Error Description
10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.
11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the
formatter.
13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.
15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.
17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.
20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.
21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression
error when trying to process job.
30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the
unit.
31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.
32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or
error.
33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity
(SureStart), or error.
40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB
accessory error.
41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically
involving (but not limited to) the fuser, the
laser scanner, or the paper path.
42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log,
Shell, System Manager, or other
component.
1038 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending
component.
45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the
OXPd Web Kit (communications log).
46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.
47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.
48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job
pipeline error.
49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.
50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.
51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.
52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.
54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).
55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.
56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.
57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.
58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.
59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.
60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.
61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide and LaserJet) Print engine error with the 8–bit data
package.
62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.
Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.
63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical,
communication, etc.).
65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.
66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.
67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error
69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.
70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.
80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.
81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.
82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.
90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB,
display) or interconnection error.
98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.
99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware
install (engine or accessory), or disk error.
ENWW Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview 1039
How to search for printer documentation
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals
GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents,
service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend on your access
credentials.
How to search WISE for printer documentation
These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users. To learn
how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here.
To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to locate
CPMD list.
Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.
How to search GCSN for printer documentation
These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. To learn how to find support content in GCSN,
watch the video here or follow these steps:
1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:
● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or
● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.
1040 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model (leave
the Model field as blank or the default).
NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.
Figure 3-1 Sample product search criteria
3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to bypass the
Product Search fields next time for that particular model (Optional).
4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.
ENWW Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview 1041
5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.
NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which type of
manual or guide the content might be listed.
6. Select Submit.
7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search result is
100 documents).
NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model. All other
available content will be filtered out.
Technical information type Select this checkbox
CPMD CPMD-Map
List of all CPMDs per product Support Information
Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide
Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual
Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual
Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information
User manual or User guide User Guide
Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement
1042 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the
situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem.
A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter
provides steps for correcting problems.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in
good condition.
Power subsystem
Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and
solve the problem.
If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview
During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place your hand
over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the scanner. If the fan is
operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer and hear the fan operating.
A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set up
functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam condition is
sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the
main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.
If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:
1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that
delivers the correct voltage.
2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.
3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1043
4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.
6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.
Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation
Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to collect as
much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.
Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:
● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).
● The control Panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.
● The control Panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).
Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:
● No power to the printer.
● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.
● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.
● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network PCA, USB
device, or other component).
● The formatter is defective.
● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.
● The DC controller is defective.
Following are some questions to ask the customer:
● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?
– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.
– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?
● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?
– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?
– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?
– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?
● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.
– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?
– Is the control-panel display back light on?
– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed to
print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.
1044 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the printer is
getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.
If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.
TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.
2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power supply is
operational).
3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.
4. Turn the printer power off.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and fully
seated), and then turn the printer power on again.
6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run different
diagnostic tests.
7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check if the
contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the control-panel
display becomes visible.
8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.
NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.
9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot and is
fully seated.
NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers have third-
party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.
10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive, solid-state
drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).
● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.
IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might be
defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.
11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.
12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.
13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1045
CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the formatter.
14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the control
panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics are
functioning, then replace the formatter.
1046 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel checks
Control panel diagnostic flowcharts
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
● No control panel sound.
● Home button is unresponsive.
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1047
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 3-2 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)
Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button
Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button
to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.
Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter
LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.
N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.
Turn the product power off. N
Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.
1048 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 3-3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the
touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously
inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously
N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the
control panel.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1049
No control panel sound
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 3-4 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:
Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?
1050 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Home button is unresponsive
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 3-5 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illumated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
tunr the power off, and
then on agian.
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED
illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,
and then on again.
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED
illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the
control panel. control panel.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1051
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Figure 3-6 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration
pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.
Individual component diagnostics
Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics
LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.
Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.
Figure 3-7 LEDs
1 Heartbeat LED
2 HP Jetdirect LEDs
1052 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green
LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link settings
on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.
2. Open the following menus:
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1053
Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics
The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path,
noise, assembly, and timing issues.
Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the diagnostic
test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).
WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel
should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is
turned on.
Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
1. Open the toner cartridge door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.
Figure 3-8 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
Defeat the front door interlock
1. Open the front door.
1054 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.
Figure 3-9 Defeat the front door interlock
ENWW Troubleshooting process 1055
Tools for troubleshooting
Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.
Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.
Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Select one of the following tests:
● Continuous Scan
● Run Fax Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.
1056 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.
● Step 1: Check that the printer power is on
● Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages
● Step 3: Test print functionality
● Step 4: Test copy functionality
● Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality
● Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality
● Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer
● Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
● Factors that affect printer performance
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white light. If
it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following conditions.
● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.
● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.
2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the doors are
all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages
The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.
Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual life or
yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated life is
not an implied warranty.
Step 3: Test print functionality
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration Page item,
and then touch the Print button to print the report.
3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to see if
paper is jammed inside the printer.
NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1057
Step 4: Test copy functionality
1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly through the
ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the paper meets
specifications for this printer.
2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.
3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small glass strip.
Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.
4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer
1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.
2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.
3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the control
panel.
2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.
3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.
Factors that affect printer performance
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
● The software program that you are using and its settings
● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)
● Printer processing and download time
● The complexity and size of graphics
1058 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
● The speed of the computer you are using
● The USB or network connection
● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome
● The type of USB drive, if you are using one
● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1059
Print menu map
To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.
Print the menu map from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print current settings pages
Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the
troubleshooting process.
Print the current settings page from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Current Settings Page option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print event log
Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the Interpret
control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.
Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Event Log
3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.
Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
1060 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
● Access code: 04087617
4. Touch the Event Log item.
Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● Access code: 04087617
5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1061
Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization for the
entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost.
HP does not recommend this action.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 1071.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 3-10 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
1062 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.
Figure 3-11 Pre-boot menu
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1063
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 3-12 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these options.
Table 3-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu and
continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds,
the printer returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting
Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not
apply.
Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to
open the Pre-boot menu.
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed
in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to sign in.
1064 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download process. A
USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart printers.
USB USB or Network connections are not currently supported.
USB Thumbdrive
Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67
error displays on the control panel. A firmware download must
be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data
except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt
is not provided.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations
and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and
settings are lost).
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the
firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (printer remains bootable).
Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password.
Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from
the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually
cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the
password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm
the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button
to clear the password.
Table 3-3 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an external device
for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the
(continued) Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error
is displayed.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1065
Table 3-3 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to
this printer.
The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain
accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more than
one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when using them
interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer always
remains accessible to this printer.
Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an
unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk that
is already locked to this printer will remain accessible to this
printer and uses the old disk's encryption password with the
new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer remains
accessible to this printer.
Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non-
secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-to-
be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be
permanently inaccessible.
Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for
this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk
in future sessions.
Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk
and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass
overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware. The
disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all
data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
Table 3-4 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or
get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)
1066 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-4 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire
disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of
the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain
access to it from any printer.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is
erased.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external device or
get status about the external device.
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,
including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of
the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes
a non-encrypted disk.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is only Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
active when the Pre- DHCP server.
boot menu is open.
IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.
IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.
Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1067
Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can
be set for the next time the printer is turned on and
(continued) initializes to the Ready state.
Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to
allow the printer to initialize and show the firmware version
when the printer reaches the Ready state.
Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the Show
Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is
not shown.
Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-
party applications.
Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration for the
very next power-initialization cycle only.
Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service
menu access (both in the Pre-boot menu and the Device
Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the
Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume
during startup.
Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
(continued) (continued)
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time
settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
printer power is turned on.
When the printer power is turned on the next time, this item
is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used
during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not
used.
Embedded Jetdirect Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the
Off embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is
always enabled.
WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.
1068 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose
hardware components and their interface
(continued) connections. Use these items to
troubleshoot specific hardware
components, and the interface between
them and other components.
Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory
test.
NOTE: This test requires about four
minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item to select an extended
memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about twenty
minutes to execute.
Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk
diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware
self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about two or
three minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item to select an extended
firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about sixty
minutes to execute.
Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that
checks the active sectors on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about thirty
minutes to execute.
Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that
checks every sector on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about fifty
minutes to execute.
Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief
test that checks the drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting technology (SMART)
status—the drive detects and reports
reliability indicators to help anticipate disk
failures (SMART status).
CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of
the copy processor board (CPB) and the
formatter PCA connections.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1069
Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the
integrity of the interconnect PCA (ICB) and
its connections.
Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a
selected test.
NOTE: If more than one test is selected,
they are executed in sequence.
Table 3-8 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
(continued) navigate the menu selections from a remote location.
IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be
initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.
This person will also need to provide a randomly
generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the Remote
Admin function, see Remote Admin on page 1071.
Stop Telnet
Refresh IP
System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting menu
is not accessible, then use the System Triage item to copy
the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive at the next printer
start up.
The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the
problem.
Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal
identification number (PIN).
Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN)
has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the original
PIN.
Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.
Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
Developer Tools Netexec
1070 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer (with
telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the Pre-boot
menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security reasons
the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.
This section describes the following Remote Admin items.
● Required software and network connection
● Connect a remote connection
● Disconnect a remote connection
Required software and network connection
Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and enabled, on
the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are other
operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring the
telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1071
Telnet client
Enable the Windows telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.
NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.
1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.
Figure 3-13 Open the Control Panel
2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.
Figure 3-14 Turn Windows features on or off
1072 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box to
select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the Cancel
button.
Figure 3-15 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer. The
Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network security
programs.
If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.
Connect a remote connection
Start the telnet server function at the printer
For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1073
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-16 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-17 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-18 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.
Figure 3-19 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.
1074 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Figure 3-20 Telnet error message
a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use DHCP
instead.
○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.
c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information on
this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 3-21 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.
1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the OK
button to open a Windows command window.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1075
Figure 3-22 Open a command window
2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-23 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet
server function at the printer on page 1073.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or on a
different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page 1073.
Figure 3-24 Establish a telnet connection
1076 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 1073 at
the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates
the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See Start the
telnet server function at the printer on page 1073.
Figure 3-25 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options
on page 1062.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
Figure 3-26 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection
The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.
NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1077
1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-27 Access the administrator menu
2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.
Figure 3-28 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the Enter
key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at the
printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.
1078 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Figure 3-29 Terminate the telnet connection
Control panel menus
You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more
advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in the
address bar of a web browser.
● Reports menu
● Settings menu
● Copy menu (MFP only)
● Scan menu (MFP only)
● Fax menu (fax models only)
● Print menu
● Supplies menu
● Trays menu
● Troubleshooting menu
● Maintenance menu
Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-9 Reports menu
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire control
panel system and the selected
View values for each setting.
Current Settings Page Print Shows a summary of the current
settings for the printer. This might
View be helpful if you plan to make
changes and need a record of the
present configuration.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1079
Table 3-9 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level Values Description
Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings and
installed accessories.
View
How to Connect Page Print Shows the network information
typically needed to connect the
View printer to a network.
Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate remaining
life for the supplies; reports
View statistics on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.
HP provides approximations of the
remaining life for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels might be
different from the approximations
provided.
Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes
that have passed through the
View printer; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome, or
color; and reports the page count.
File Directory Print Shows the file name and folder
name for files that are stored in the
View printer memory.
Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services
for the printer.
View
Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed by the
printer.
View
Fax Reports (MFP fax models only) Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have
been sent from or received by this
View printer.
Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes that
have been used for outgoing faxes.
View This report shows how many sent
faxes were billed to each code.
Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are
blocked from sending faxes to this
View printer.
Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have
been set up for this printer.
View
Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax
operation, either sent or received.
View
Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page.
1080 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-9 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level Values Description
RGB samples Print Prints color samples for different
RGB values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
CMYK samples Print Prints color samples for different
CMYK values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.
PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1081
Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-10 Settings menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and to
YYYY/MMM/DD configure date/
time settings.
Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format
that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.
Date/Time Date Select the time zone Select the time
from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.
Time Select the date from a
pop-up calendar.
Time Zone Select the time from a
pop-up keypad.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure
events displays. the printer to
Edit automatically wake
up or go to sleep at
Delete specific times on
specific days. Using
this feature saves
energy.
NOTE: You must
configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.
New event Event Type Select whether to
add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time and
the days for the
wake or sleep
event.
Time Set the wake or
sleep event time
parameters.
1082 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or
week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.
Sleep Settings Auto Off After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number of
Sleep minutes minutes after
which the printer
Sleep After Default = 0 minutes enters Sleep or
Inactivity Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
HP Auto Off/Auto number to open
On the virtual keypad,
and then increase
Shut Down or decrease the
number of
minutes.
Wake/Auto On to All Events*
These Events
Network port
Power button only
Display Settings Display Brightness Automatic* The Manual setting Use to specify the
uses a slider to intensity of the LCD
Manual manually control the control panel
display brightness. display.
System Sound On* Use to specify
whether you hear a
Off sound when you
touch the screen or
press buttons on
the control panel.
Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a
languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.
Keyboard Layout Each language has a Select the default
default keyboard keyboard layout
M681z/M682z layout. To change it, that matches the
only select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.
Information Screen Show connection Use this menu item
information* to display or hide
connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1083
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Display Date and Show Date and Time* Select whether to
Time display or hide the
Hide Date and Time date and time on
M681/M682 only the control panel
Home screen.
Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the
seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any
activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.
Clearable Warnings On Use this feature to
set the period that
Job* a clearable warning
displays on the
control panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job that
generated the
warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.
1084 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 Use this option to
seconds)* configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to continue when the printer
encounters certain
errors. If the Auto-
continue (10
seconds) option is
selected, the job
will continue after
10 seconds. If the
Touch OK to
continue option is
selected, the job
will stop and
require the user to
touch the OK
button before
continuing.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1085
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Jam Recovery Auto* This printer
provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:
Auto: The printer
attempts to reprint
jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.
Off: The printer
does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used to
store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.
NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs out
of paper and the
job is being printed
on both sides,
some pages can be
lost.
On: The printer
always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to store
the last few pages
printed. This might
cause a decrease in
overall
performance.
Auto Recovery Enabled The printer
attempts to reprint
Disabled* jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.
1086 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature
if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating a
copy job from the
control panel. Held
print jobs start
printing after the
copy job is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is in
the print queue.
Restore Factory Restore Use to restore all
Settings printer settings to
Cancel their factory
defaults.
Copy/Print Copy Settings Image Preview Display a preview
of the image
before printing it.
Enable Device USB Enabled Enables the printer
to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.
Manage Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option allows
Jobs you list the jobs
Date either
alphabetically or
chronologically.
Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which
Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.
Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global
Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.
The Temporary Job
Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1087
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Temporary Stored 1-300 Configure global
Job Retention settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Standard Stored 1-300 Configure global
Job Retention settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
standard jobs that
can be stored on
the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default
Options number of copies for a
Default = 1 copy job. This default
applies when the Copy
function or the Quick
Copy function is
initiated from the
printer Home screen.
Paper Selection Select from a list Configures the default
of sizes that the paper size used for
printer supports. print jobs.
Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the default
Paper Size inches paper size that is used
when the user selects
Default = 8.5 Custom as the paper
inches size for a print job.
Y Dimension Range: 5-14
inches
Default = 14
inches
Use Inches Enabled*
Disabled
1088 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate
whether the original
2-sided document is printed
on one or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or both
sides. For example,
select the 1-sided
original, 2-sided
output option when
the original is printed
on one side, but you
want to make two-
sided copies.
Staple None Sets the position of
the staple on the
Top left page.
Top right
Top left or right
Output Bin Automatically select
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Resolution FastRes1200 Sets the resolution
for sent
1200x1200dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they
show more detail.
Lower resolution
images have fewer
dots per inch and
show less detail,
but the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1089
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
PCL and PostScript Courier Font Regular* Select which
Settings version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be used
if a heavier Courier
font is needed.
Wide A4 Enabled Changes the
printable area of
Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on a
single line of A4
paper.
Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature to
select whether a
Disabled* PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.
Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a
PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.
Personality Auto* Configures the
default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific printer
language, the
printer does not
automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.
1090 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font
source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.
Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font
number for the
Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.
Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source
option and the Font
Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).
PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL
print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is a
set of printer
commands that HP
developed to
provide access to
printer features.
Use the Form
Length feature to
select the user-soft
default vertical
form length.
Orientation Portrait* Select the
orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select the
Portrait option if
the short edge is at
the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1091
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of
symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel. A
symbol set is a
unique grouping of
all the characters in
a font. The factory
default value for
this option is PC-8.
Either PC-8 or
PC-850 are
recommended for
line-draw
characters.
Append CR to LF No* Configure whether
a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended to
each line feed (LF)
encountered in
backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments, such
as UNIX, indicate a
new line by using
only the line-feed
control code. This
option allows the
user to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.
Suppress Blank No* This option is for
Pages users who are
Yes generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
Yes option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.
1092 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Media Source Standard* Use to select and
Mapping maintain input
Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is based
on newer
HP LaserJet
models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is based
on HP LaserJet 4
and older models.
Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights
Midtones
Shadows
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
Image Registration Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be
adjusted
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Depends upon
number of trays
installed
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1093
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin
Horizontal Shift alignment to center
the image on the
Front-side Vertical page from top to
Shift bottom and from
left to right. You
Back-side can also align the
Horizontal Shift image on the front
with the image
Back-side Vertical printed on the
Shift back.
The direction that
is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through the
printer is referred
to as X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.
The direction that
the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as Y.
Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.
Use the Adjust Tray
<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for each
tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides in
the X and Y
directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.
1094 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Print Test Page Use the Print Test
Page option to
print a page to test
the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X and
Y directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.
Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page
Behavior
Sense first page
Sense transparency
only
All Other Trays Sense first page
Sense transparency
only
Adjust paper types Select from a list of
paper types
Reset Paper Types
Optimize Normal Paper
Heavy paper
Envelope control
Tray 1
Background
Background 1
Uniformity Control
Tracking Control
Registration
Transfer Control
Moisture Control
Reset Optimize
Edge Control Off
Light
Normal
Maximum
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1095
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the
Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a specific
input tray. Two
options are
available:
Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that a
specific tray should
be used, even if
that tray is empty.
First: The printer
pulls from another
tray if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the user
specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.
Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether a
Prompt prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified tray
and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose tray
instead. Two
options are
available:
Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.
Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.
1096 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether
the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a tray is
closed. Two
options are
available:
Display: Shows the
tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the tray
configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.
Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or
off the control
Disabled panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty. Two
options are
available:
Enabled: When this
option is selected,
the user is
prompted either to
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.
Disabled: When this
option is selected,
the user is not
given the option of
selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1097
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Alternative Disabled* Use to load
Letterhead Mode letterhead or
Enabled preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with the
printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the speed
required for
printing on both
sides.
Duplex Blank Auto* Controls how the
Pages printer handles
Yes two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:
Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs the
printer not to
process blank
pages.
Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is printed
on only one side.
This might be
preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.
1098 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-
size paper when an
No A4 job is sent but
no A4-size paper is
loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job is
sent but no letter-
size paper is
loaded). This option
will also override
A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size paper.
Scan/Digital Send E-mail Settings E-mail Setup Use to configure
settings that apply
Network Folder NOTE: Email to sending
Settings Settings only documents
through email or
SharePoint saving documents
Settings to a folder on the
network or on a
Scan to USB Drive USB multi-drive.
Settings
The E-mail Setup
NOTE: The same Wizard feature
options are configures the
available for each printer to send
of these features, scanned images as
except where email attachments.
noted. To open the printer
HP Embedded Web
Server and set up
the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1099
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default
job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating the
job, the default
options are used.
For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded Web
Server by typing
the IP address of
the printer into a
Web browser.
Use the Image
Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the printer.
Make optional: The
feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.
1100 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Default File Name The printer is
shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled]
for any scanned
files that are sent
or saved. Use this
feature to specify a
different default
file name. If you are
saving a file to a
network folder or
USB storage printer
and a file with the
default file name
already exists, a
number is
appended to the
file name, for
example,
[Untitled]001.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1101
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Document File Select from a list of file PDF provides the
Type types. best overall image
and text quality.
JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have a
browser that can
view .JPEG files.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
TIFF is a standard
file format that
many graphics
programs support.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
MTIFF: stands for
multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.
XPS (XML Paper
Specification)
creates an XML file
that preserves the
original formatting
of the document
and supports color
graphics and
embedded fonts.
NOTE: OCR file
types are not
supported on this
printer unless
attached to DSS.
1102 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Optimize Text/ Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the
Picture output for a
Text particular type of
content. You can
Printed picture optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.
Manually Adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the
setting for text or
for pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use
for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Output Quality High (large file) Use to select the
quality for the
Medium* output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger file
size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to send,
and some
recipients might
have trouble
receiving larger
files.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1103
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the
layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Then touch the
Orientation setting
to indicate whether
the original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.
Orientation Automatically detect For some features
to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
1104 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The
back side of the
Flip-style original is printed
right-side-up, and
the back side of the
copy is printed the
same way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
bound along the
left edge.
Flip-style: The back
side of the original
is printed upside-
down, and the back
side of the copy is
printed the same
way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
to be bound along
the top edge.
Resolution 400 dpi Sets the resolution
for sent
300 dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
200 dpi have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they
150 dpi* show more detail.
Lower resolution
75 dpi images have fewer
dots per inch and
show less detail,
but the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1105
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features
Orientation to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure
the default style for
Flip-style 2-sided print jobs.
If the Book-style
option is selected,
the back side of the
page is printed the
right way up. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the left edge.
If the Flip-style
option is selected,
the back side of the
page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the top edge.
1106 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or
disable color
Color scanning.
Black/Gray Automatically
detect:
Black Automatically
scans documents
in color if at least
one page has color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file
size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the
supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
Notification Do not notify* Configure to
receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns
off this feature.
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only if job
fails: Select to
receive notification
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print: Select to
print the
notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification to an
email account.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1107
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Include Thumbnail NOTE: When
sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E-mail E-mail: Select to
address receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the
overall quality of
the copy.
Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or
decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast
setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on
the page.
Background Adjust the
Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the
Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.
1108 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Automatic Tone The printer
automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to
the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.
Default Select this to make
the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.
Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine
several original
Job Build on documents into
one job. Also use to
scan an original
document that has
more pages than
the document
feeder can
accommodate at
one time. The
printer temporarily
saves all the
scanned images.
After you have
scanned all the
pages for the job,
touch Finish to
finish the job.
Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item
to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan for
digital sending. Use
Crop to paper the Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item
to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such as
dark borders or
Front side erase staple marks, by
cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the text
boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1109
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Multi-feed Disabled This setting stops
Detection the scanning
Enabled* process if it detects
multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent
Suppression blank pages in the
Enabled original document
from being
included in the
output document.
Create Multiple Disabled* Enable this item to
Files scan pages into
Enabled separate files
based on a
specified page
limit.
A page is one side
of an original
document.
JPEG and TIFF have
a limit of one page
per file.
Digital Sending Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how the
Software Setup Server printer interacts
Enabled* with the HP Digital
Allow Transfer to Sending Software
New DSS server (DSS) server.
HP DSS handles
digital sending
tasks, such as
faxing, emailing,
and sending
scanned
documents to a
network folder or
USB storage
device.
Use the Allow Use
of a DSS Server and
Allow Transfer to
New DSS server
options to
configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.
Fax Internal Fax
Modem Setup
Fax Send Settings Image Preview
1110 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Fax Dialing Fax Dial Volume Off These settings
Settings control how the fax
Low* modem dials the
outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.
Dialing Mode Tone*
Pulse
Redial Interval 1-5 Minutes
Default = 5 minutes
Fax Send Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Dialing Prefix
Detect Dial Tone
Redial on Error Range: 0-9
Default = 2
Redial on No Range: 0-2
Answer
Default = 0
Redial on Busy Range: 0-9
Default = 3
General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is
Settings Confirmation enabled, you must
Disabled* enter the fax
number twice.
PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who
have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes through
the printer from
their computers.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1111
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG
compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can result in
lower phone
charges. However,
using JBIG
compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with
older fax machines.
If this occurs, turn
off the JBIG
compression.
Error Correction Enabled* When error-
Mode correction mode is
Disabled enabled and an
error occurs during
fax transmission,
the printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.
Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend or
overlay the fax
Overlay header page.
Fax Number Speed Enabled Use this item to
Dial Matching match the fax
Disabled* number that you
type to numbers
that are saved as a
speed dial.
1112 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes
Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the user
to enter the billing
code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.
You can also use
the billing codes
report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used for
faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.
Default Billing Specify a default
Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in the
Billing Code field
when the user
sends an outgoing
fax. If this field is
blank, no default
billing code is
provided for the
user.
Minimum Length Range: 1-16 Specify the
required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can be
between 1 and 16
characters long.
Allow users to edit Off
billing codes
On*
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.
High
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1113
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Rings To Answer Range: 1-6
Default = 1
Fax Receive Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Ring Interval Range: 220-600 ms
Default = 600 ms
Ring Frequency Range: 1-200
Default = 68hz
Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have
Schedule concerns about the
Always print faxes* security of private
faxes, use this
Use Fax Printing feature to store
Schedule faxes rather than
having them
automatically print.
Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.
Schedule + (Add) Print incoming faxes If you are using a
fax printing
Touch this to set Edit Store incoming faxes schedule, use this
up a fax printing menu to configure
schedule if you Delete (trash can) Time when to print
selected the Use faxes.
Fax Printing Event Days
Schedule option.
1114 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax list
Numbers Block can contain up to
30 numbers. When
the printer receives
a call from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax. It
also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-
accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number to
Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.
To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.
To clear all blocked
numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.
You also can use
the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1115
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure to
Options receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns
off this feature.
Notify when job
completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only if job
fails: Select to
receive notification
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print E-mail: Select to
receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.
Include NOTE: When
Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E- Touch this text
mail address field, provide the
email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.
Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to
Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.
1116 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes
that are larger than
Disabled Letter-size or A4-
size so that they
can fit onto a
Letter-size or A4-
size page. If this
feature set to
Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.
Paper Tray Automatic*
Select from a list of
the trays.
Output Bin Automatically select
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the
layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward
Forwarding received faxes to
Enabled another fax
machine.
Type of Fax Job to All faxes Use to select the
Forward type of fax jobs
Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes
Fax Forwarding Provide the
Number forwarding phone
number, and then
touch the OK
button.
Clear Fax Activity Clears all events
Log from the fax
activity log.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1117
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Manage Supplies Low Warning Black Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated
Thresholds percentage at
Cyan Cartridge Default = 5% which the printer
notifies you when a
Magenta toner cartridge is
Cartridge very low.
Yellow Cartridge
Low Warning On Displays a message
Threshold on the control
Message Off panel when a
cartridge is very
low.
Very Low Behavior Black Cartridge Stop
Color Cartridges Continue
Transfer Kit Prompt to continue
Fuser Kit
Document Feeder
Kit
Staples Stop
Prompt to continue
Restrict Color Use Enable Use this feature to
enable, restrict, or
Disable Color disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*
1118 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the
printer when to
Mostly Color Pages switch between
color and
Mostly Black Pages monochrome
printing modes for
the best overall
performance.
Auto: Uses the
mode that is
appropriate for the
first page of the
job. If necessary,
the printer
switches modes
during the middle
of a job and then
stays in that mode
until the job is
finished.
Mostly Color Pages:
The printer uses
color mode for all
jobs, even if the job
contains no color
pages.
Mostly Black Pages:
The printer uses
monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back to
monochrome
mode when it
detects a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1119
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Store Usage Data On supplies The Store Usage
Data provides a
Not on supplies way to suppress
the toner
cartridges from
storing most of the
information
gathered
exclusively for the
purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select the
On supplies setting
to store the data
on the toner
cartridge memory
chip. Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on the
memory chip.
Cartridge Off* Select to
Protection permanently
Protect Cartridges protect cartridges
so that they can be
used only in this
product or fleet of
products.
Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP
to allow only
Authorized HP genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.
Manage Stapler/ Operation Mode Mailbox
Stacker
Stacker
Function Separator
Job Offset On
Off
Networking Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page
Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page is not
printed.
1120 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow buttons An alphanumeric
to edit the host name. string, up to 32
characters, used to
NPIXXXXXX* identify the printer.
This name is listed
on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.
The default host
name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is
the last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.
IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the
method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease exists,
the DHCP Release
menu and the
DHCP Renew menu
are available to set
DHCP lease
options.
Auto IP: Use for
automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form
169.254.x.x is
assigned
automatically.
If you set this
option to the
Manual setting, use
the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1121
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP
address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable to
obtain an IP
address from the
network during a
forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration (for
example, when
manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).
NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might
interfere with a
managed network.
Auto IP: A link-local
IP address
169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The
address
192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with
older HP Jetdirect
printers.
Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx a Primary Domain
Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to
enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.
Off: IPv6 is
disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Address Manual Settings Use this item to
enable and
Enable manually configure
a TCP/IPv6
Address address.
1122 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:
The stateful auto-
Router Unavailable* configuration
method to be used
Always by the print server
is determined by a
router. The router
specifies whether
the print server
obtains its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable:
If a router is not
available, the print
server should
attempt to obtain
its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx a Primary Domain
Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1123
Table 3-10 Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
Proxy Server Select from a provided Specifies the proxy
list. server to be used
by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.
To specify a proxy
server, enter its
IPv4 address or
fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.
For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.
Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port
number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.
Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in
seconds, after
which an idle TCP
print data
connection is
closed (default is
270 seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).
1124 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Copy menu (MFP only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-11 Copy menu (MFP only)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether the
original document is printed
2-sided on one or both sides.
Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether the
copies should be printed on
2-sided one or both sides.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should
be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in
color.
Black: Prints documents in
black and white or
grayscale.
Quick Sets and Defaults Load
Save
Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Output Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should
be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in
color.
Black: Prints documents in
black and white or
grayscale.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1125
Table 3-11 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Staple None Sets the position of the
staple on the page.
Top left angled
Top right angled
Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the user
to scan pages from a book.
Book Mode
2–sided ID allows the user
2–sided ID to scan both sides of an
identification card onto one
sheet.
Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the size of the
document up or down.
Manual Select one of the predefined
percentages, or select the
Scaling field and type a
percentage between 25 and
400. The Auto option
automatically scales the
image to fit the paper size in
the tray.
NOTE: To reduce the
image, select a scaling
percentage that is less than
100. To enlarge the image,
select a scaling percentage
that is greater than 100.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Describes the page size of
that the printer supports. the original document.
Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and image
quality, select the
Paper Type appropriate paper type from
the control panel menu or
Paper Tray from the print driver.
Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or more
pages onto one sheet of
paper so you can fold the
sheets in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages in the
correct order. For example, if
the original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on the
same sheet.
1126 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-11 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features to work
correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of the
original document is placed
Landscape on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the long
edge of the page is along
the top. In the Orientation
area, select whether the
original document has a
portrait or landscape
orientation.
Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages onto
one sheet of paper.
Two (2)
NOTE: Before using this
Four (4) screen, use the Content
Orientation screen to
describe the original
document orientation.
Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften the
image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Darkness Use to improve the overall
quality of the copy.
Adjust the Darkness setting
to increase or decrease the
amount of white and black
in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting
to increase or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background
Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1127
Table 3-11 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or
Mixed a mixture.
Printed picture Manually Adjust: Use to
manually optimize the
Photograph setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the
text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.
Printed picture: Use for line
drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best suited for
making copies of printed
pictures.
Erase Edges Front Side Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes, such as
Apply same width to all dark borders or staple
edges marks, by cleaning the
specified edges of the
Top edge scanned image. In each of
the text boxes enter the
Bottom edge measurements, in
millimeters or inches, for
Left edge how much of the top edge,
bottom edge, left edge, and
Right edge
right edge to clean.
Back Side Use inches
Mirror front side
Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge
1128 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-11 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more than
order)* one copy, select the Collate
on (Sets in page order)
Collate off (Pages grouped) option to assemble the
pages in the correct order in
each set of copies.
Select the Collate off (Pages
grouped) option to group
the same pages together.
For example, if you are
making five copies of an
original document that has
two pages, all five first
pages would be grouped
together and all five second
pages would be grouped
together.
Multi-feed Detection Enabled* This setting stops the
scanning process if it
Disabled detects multiple-page feeds
through the document
feeder.
Output Bin Automatically select
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1129
Scan menu (MFP only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Scan to Email
Scan to Network Folder Paths
Folder
File Name
Quick Sets and
Defaults
Options File Type and
Resolution
Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the
layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the original
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or
disable color scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page has
color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the
supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
1130 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Content Orientation Orientation Automatically Detect For some features to
work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
whether the original
document has a
portrait or landscape
orientation.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the
overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast
setting to increase or
decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background
Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness
setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.
Automatic Tone The printer
automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to the
most appropriate for
the scanned
document.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1131
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Default Select this to make the
selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.
Optimize Text/Picture
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
right edge to clean.
Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to
automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.
Automatically
Straighten
Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank
Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.
Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the
scanning process if it
Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to
scan pages into
Enabled separate files based on
a specified page limit.
A page is one side of
an original document.
JPEG and TIFF have a
limit of one page per
file.
1132 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Notification Do not notify Configure to receive
notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off
this feature.
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify only if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to print
the notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the notification
to an email account.
Include Thumbnail Select Include
Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of the job
in your notification.
Notification Email E-mail: Select to
receive the notification
in an email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Scan to USB Drive Destination
Job Name
Options File Type and
Resolution
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1133
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the
layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
whether the original
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or
disable color scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page has
color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the
supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features to
work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
whether the original
document has a
portrait or landscape
orientation.
1134 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the
overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast
setting to increase or
decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background
Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness
setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.
Automatic Tone The printer
automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to the
most appropriate for
the scanned
document.
Default Select this to make the
selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1135
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the
output for a particular
Text type of content. You
can optimize the
Printed picture output for text, printed
pictures, or a mixture.
Photograph
Manually Adjust: Use to
manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize
the text portion of the
copy when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use for
line drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
right edge to clean.
Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to
automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.
Automatically
Straighten
Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank
Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.
1136 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-12 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the
scanning process if it
Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to
scan pages into
Enabled separate files based on
a specified page limit.
A page is one side of
an original document.
JPEG and TIFF have a
limit of one page per
file.
Notification Do not notify Configure to receive
notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off
this feature.
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify only if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to print
the notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the notification
to an email account.
Include Thumbnail Select Include
Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of the job
in your notification.
Notification Email E-mail: Select to
receive the notification
in an email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Scan to Job Storage Folder
Job Name
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1137
Fax menu (fax models only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-13 Fax menu (fax models only)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Dialing Prefix
Fax Recipients
Quick Sets and Defaults
Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the layout
for each side of the original
2-sided document. First select
whether the original
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate whether
the original has portrait or
landscape orientation. If it is
printed on both sides, also
select the 2-sided format
that matches the original
document.
Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Select the resolution for
outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution,
faxes might be clearer but
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) they could transmit more
slowly. Some file types, for
example a file that will be
processed with OCR, require
a specific resolution. When
these file types are
selected, the Resolution
setting might be
automatically changed to a
valid value.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Use to describe the page
that the printer supports. size of the original
document.
Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to work
correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of the
original document is placed
on the page.
Portrait: This setting means
the short edge of the page
is along the top.
Landscape: This setting
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.
1138 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall
quality of the copy.
Adjust the Darkness setting
to increase or decrease the
amount of white and black
in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting
to increase or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background
Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness
setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Automatic Tone The printer automatically
adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the
most appropriate for the
scanned document.
Default Select this to make the
selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1139
Table 3-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or
Printed picture a mixture.
Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to
manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the
text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.
Printed picture: Use for line
drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best suited for
making copies of printed
pictures.
Blank Page Suppression Disabled* Prevents blank pages in the
original document from
Enabled being included in the output
document.
Multi-feed Detection Disabled Use this feature to prevent
multiple pages being fed
Enabled* through the document
feeder during document
scans.
Notification Do not notify* Use to receive notification
about the status of a sent
Notify when job completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this
feature.
Notify when job completes:
Select to receive notification
for this job only.
Notify only if job fails: Select
to receive notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.
Print Print: Select to print the
notification at this printer.
E-mail: Select to receive the
notification in an email.
Touch the text box following
Email Address, and then
enter the email address for
the notification.
1140 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-13 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Include Thumbnail When sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of the first
page of the fax in your
notification.
Notification E-mail address Provide the email address
that will receive
notifications.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure the default
style for 2-sided print jobs.
Flip-style If the Book-style option is
selected, the back side of
the page is printed the right
way up. This option is for
print jobs that are bound
along the left edge. If the
Flip-style option is selected,
the back side of the page is
printed upside-down. This
option is for print jobs that
are bound along the top
edge.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1141
Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-14 Print Options menu
First level Second level Values Description
Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the printer.
Stored Faxes
Print from USB Drive Stored Job to Print Choose file to print on USB drive. Print a job stored on a USB drive.
Fax Polling Fax Polling Number
1142 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-15 Supplies menu
First level Values Description
Supplies Summary
Black Cartridge Status
Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part
Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed
Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining
Toner Collection Unit Status
Transfer Kit Order HP Part
Fuser Kit
Document Feeder Kit
Stapler 1
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1143
Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-16 Trays menu
First level Second level Values Description
Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list of Choose the paper size for the tray
supported sizes.
Tray 2–x
Type Select paper type from a list of Choose the paper type for the tray.
supported types.
1144 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting
menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-17 Troubleshooting
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Configuration/Status ● Settings Menu Select the
Pages Map configuration/Status
reports to review,
● Current and then touch the
Settings Page Print or View button.
● Configuration
Page
● How to
Connect Page
● Supplies
Status Page
● sage Page
● File Directory
Page
● Web Services
Status Page
● Color Usage
Job Log
Reports
Other Pages ● Demonstration
Page
● RGB Samples
● CMYK Samples
● PCL Font List
● PS Font List
Event Log Print Prints the 50 most
recent events in the
Event Log. For each
event, the printed
log shows the error
number, page count,
error code, and
description or
personality.
Paper Path Page View Shows how many
pages were printed
Print from each tray.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1145
Table 3-17 Troubleshooting (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Fax (Fax is optional) Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or
configure the fax T.
30 trace report. T.30
is the standard that
specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and error
correction between
fax machines.
When to Print Never automatically Configure the T.30
Report print* report to print after
certain events. You
Print after every fax can choose to print
the report after
Print only after fax every fax job, every
send jobs fax job sent, every
fax job received,
Print after any fax every send error, or
error every receive error.
Print only after fax
send errors
Print only after fax
receive errors
Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable V.34
modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred or if
phone line
conditions require it.
Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician
to evaluate and
Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to the
sounds of fax
modulations
Fax Log Entries On The standard fax log
includes basic
Off* information such as
the time and
whether the fax was
successful. The
detailed fax log
shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.
Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.
Diagnostic Tests
Continuous Scan 2-sided
1146 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-17 Troubleshooting (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Run Fax Test Start Use this menu to
perform a test on
specific components
within the product to
determine whether
the components are
functioning
correctly.
Retrieve Diagnostic Insert a US drive into Create files that
Data the USB port. The contain information
exported data might about the product
contain personally that can help
identifiable identify the cause of
information. problems.
Generate Debug Start
Data
Maintenance menu
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the Backup/
Restore menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-18 Backup/Restore menu
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time
Days Between Backups Enter the number of days
Backup Now
Export Last Backup
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that
contains the backup file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/Cleaning
menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1147
Table 3-19 Calibrate/Cleaning menu
First level Second level Values Description
Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning page
that was created by using the
Create Cleaning Page menu. The
process takes up to 1.5 minutes.
Color Calibrations (color models) Start The product automatically
calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use this
feature to perform a partial
calibration. Use this calibration if
color density or tone seems
incorrect.
Before calibrating the product,
make sure that the Ready indicator
displays on the control-panel
display. If a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that job is
complete.
1148 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-19 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued)
First level Second level Values Description
Calibration Start The product automatically
calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use this
feature to perform a full calibration,
which can take up to three minutes.
Use this calibration if the color
layers seem to be shifted on the
page.
Before calibrating the product,
make sure that the Ready indicator
displays on the control-panel
display. If a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that job is
complete.
Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On No Delay Controls the timing of power-on
calibration when the product wakes
Delay 15 minutes up or is turned on.
Wake: Select if you are not using the
feature and want to print jobs
immediately when the product
wakes up or is turned on, before
calibration begins.
No: The product will calibrate
immediately when it wakes up or is
turned on. The product will not print
any jobs until it finishes calibrating.
Yes: Enables the product that is
asleep to accept print jobs before it
calibrates. It might start calibrating
before it has printed all the jobs it
has received. This option allows
quicker printing when coming out of
sleep mode or when you turn the
product on, but print quality might
be reduced.
NOTE: For the best results, allow
the product to calibrate before
printing. Print jobs performed
before calibration might not be of
the highest quality.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 1149
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware
Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
1150 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Clear paper jams
Paper jam locations
1 Tray 1
2 Tray 2
3 Tray 3
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1
ENWW Clear paper jams 1151
1. Gently remove the jammed paper.
2. Open and then close the front door to resume
printing.
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2
● 13.A3.XX Jam in tray 3
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown here.
1152 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
1. Open the right door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
ENWW Clear paper jams 1153
3. Close the right door.
4. Open the tray.
1154 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
5. Gently remove any jammed paper.
6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI
1. Open the HCI.
ENWW Clear paper jams 1155
2. Remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the HCI.
1156 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Service mode (tech mode; du models)
Entering service mode
To enter service mode
1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.
2. Enter the Service PIN ID.
▲ ID: 04087617
3. Select Service tools.
Figure 3-30 Service tools view
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1157
Service mode menu tree
Figure 3-31 Information
Table 3-20 Information
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Information General Engine Board Serial
Number
Supply Status Customer Replacement Toner (CMYK)
Unit
Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (CMYK)
Development Unit (CMYK)
TCU
ITB
ITB cleaner
Transfer roller/T2 roller
Fuser
Tray x rollers
Flow ADF Roller
Software Version System Firmware
Version
Main Firmware Version
Engine Firmware Version
Boot ROM Version
File System Version
Flow ADF Firmware
Version
1158 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-20 Information (continued)
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Finisher Version
Scanner Version
Scan Control Version
Tray 2 Version
Tray 3 Version
Tray 4 Version
Tray 5 Version
Tray 6 Version
EP Version
Fuser Version
TR Version
Toner Version
Print CMS Version
Copy CMS Version
Scan CMS Version
Print Reports Supplies Information
Full Color Plane
Registration
Color Plane Registration
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1159
Figure 3-32 Maintenance counts
Table 3-21 Maintenance counts
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge (CMKY)
Imaging Unit (CMKY)
Development Unit (CMKY)
Transfer roller/T2 roller
Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
ITB cleaner
Fuser
Tray x rollers
Flow ADF Pickup Roller
1160 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Figure 3-33 Diagnostics
Table 3-22 Diagnostics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Initialization
Engine NVM Read/Write
Engine Test Routines
Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report
Print Last Shade Report
Shade and Print Report
(Flow ADF)
Print Last Shade Report
(Flow ADF)
Scanner/Flow ADF NVM
Read/Write
Scanner/Flow ADF Test
Routines
Adjustment Print Adjustment Image Position
Print Test Patterns
Copy Adjustment Image Position
Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
Flow ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
ACS ACS Level Adjustment [1–5]: 3*
ACS Page Adjustment [1–5]: 5*
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1161
Table 3-22 Diagnostics (continued)
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Normal
Activation
Full
Auto Tone Adjustment Normal
Full
Print Test Patterns
Figure 3-34 Service functions
Table 3-23 Service functions
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Service Functions Main Memory Clear
Debug Log Job Status
Details
Capture Log All
Period Start Date/End Date
Transfer Assembly Transfer Assembly Process Speed/Paper for
Control Mode Control Mode Driver/T1 PWM
T2 Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/
Paper Direction/T2 PWM
Envelope Rotate Off
90 degrees
180 degrees
1162 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Information
General
Information > General
This menu displays the following information:
● Machine serial number
Supply status
Customer replacement unit (CRU)
Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit
● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.
Field replacement unit (FRU)
Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit
● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check
the information of the selected unit.
In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.
● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.
– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.
– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.
– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.
● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.
● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.
The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.
Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the unit.
Software version
Information > Software Version
● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1163
Print reports
Information > Print Reports
This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to print:
● Supplies Information
● Auto Toning History
● Full Color Plane Registration
Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History
NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.
This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color consistency against
changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is
to check if the TRC control is working normally.
● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be zero.
● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.
Maintenance counts
Part replacement count
Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count
● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and press OK
to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.
The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:
Unit Item Sensing Method
Toner Cartridge Toner (C) Auto Sensing
Toner (M) Auto Sensing
Toner (Y) Auto Sensing
Toner (K) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (C) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit (M) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit (Y) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit (K) Auto Sensing
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
Transfer Transfer Roller Count Clear
Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear
Tray 3 Roller Count Clear
1164 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Unit Item Sensing Method
Tray 4 Roller Count Clear
Tray 5 Roller Count Clear
Flow ADF Roller Flow ADF Roller Count Clear
Diagnostics
Engine diagnostics
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization
● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware.
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list of
codes with descriptions and saved values.
Users can also input a code through the text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.
Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min
112–0120 Manual Color Registration X-Offset Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync) 100 200/0
Yellow for yellow
112–0130 Manual Color Registration X-Offset Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync) 100 200/0
Magenta for magenta
112–0140 Manual Color Registration X-Offset Cyan Distant from hysnc to lysync (multi- 100 200/0
hysync) for cyan
112–0150 Manual Color Registration X-Offset Black Distant from hysnc to lysync (multi- 100 200/0
hysync) for black
112–0160 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Distant from psync to image area for 200 400/0
Yellow yellow
112–0170 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Distant from psync to image area for 200 400/0
Magenta magenta
112–0180 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Cyan Distant from psync to image area for 200 400/0
cyan
112–0190 Manual Color Registration Y-Offset Black Distant from psync to image area for 200 400/0
black
112–0240 Manual Color Registration Left Width Image area left width for yellow 500 1000/0
Yellow
112–0250 Manual Color Registration Right Width Image area right width for yellow 500 1000/0
Yellow
112–0260 Manual Color Registration Left Width Image area left width for magenta 500 1000/0
Magenta
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1165
Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min
112–0270 Manual Color Registration Right Width Image area right width for magenta 500 1000/0
Magenta
112–0280 Manual Color Registration Left Width Image area left width for cyan 500 1000/0
Cyan
112–0290 Manual Color Registration Right Width Image area right width for cyan 500 1000/0
Cyan
112–0300 Manual Color Registration Left Width Image area left width for black 500 1000/0
Black
112–0310 Manual Color Registration Right Width Image area right width for black 500 1000/0
Black
112–0320 Color Registration Laser Scanner Laser scanner assembly skew for yellow 200 400/0
Assembly Skew Yellow
112–0330 Color Registration Laser Scanner Laser scanner assembly skew for 200 400/0
Assembly Skew Magenta magenta
112–0340 Color Registration Laser Scanner Laser scanner assembly skew for cyan 200 400/0
Assembly Skew Cyan
Engine test routines
● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the engine
Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the
list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can directly input an EDC code
through the text box to search for a routine. A maximum of three routines can be
selected at the same time.
After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to open the test window. The
selected routines will display and users can start/start the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code Display Meaning
100–0041 Yellow drum motor Yellow drum BLDC motor is on/off
100-0042 Magenta drum motor Magenta drum BLDC motor is on/off
100-0043 Cyan drum motor Cyan drum BLDC motor is on/off
100-0044 Black drum motor Black drum BLDC motor is on/off
100-0046 Yellow drum motor Ready Detect if yellow drum BLDC motor runs at normal
speed
100-0047 Magenta drum motor Ready Detect if magenta drum BLDC motor runs at
normal speed
1166 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Display Meaning
100-0048 Cyan drum motor Ready Detect if cyan drum BLDC motor runs at normal
speed
100-0049 Black drum Ready Detect if black drum BLDC motor runs at normal
speed
100-0080 ITB Engage Motor ITB engage motor on/off
100-0090 ITB Engage Sensor Detects if the ITB engage is on or off
100-0140 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off
100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off
100-0142 Duplex Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest on/off
100-0160 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run
100-0180 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 runs at normal speed.
100-0200 Tray 2 Elevating Motor Tray 2 elevate motor on/off (optional)
100-0210 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)
100-0220 Tray 4 Elevating Motor Tray 4 elevate motor on/off (optional)
100-0230 Tray 5 Elevating Motor Tray 5 elevate motor on/off (optional)
100-0231 Tray 6 Elevating Motor Tray 6 elevate motor on/off (optional)
100-0240 Waste Toner Motor Waste toner motor on/off
100-0241 Waste Toner LED Waste toner LED on/off
100-0250 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the waste toner is full
100-0260 SMPS Fan Run Start/stop SMPS fan run
100-0270 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if SMPS S fan runs at normal speed
100-0340 Feed Motor Feed motor is on/off
100-0341 Feed Motor Slow Feed motor slow is on/off
100-0342 Feed Motor Slowest Feed motor slowest is on/off
100-0370 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off
100-0371 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow is on/off
100-0372 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 2 motor slowest is on/off
100-0380 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Tray 3 motor is on/off
100-0381 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 3 motor slow is on/off
100-0382 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 3 motor slowest is on/off
100-0390 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Tray 4 motor is on/off
100-0391 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 4 motor slow is on/off
100-0392 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 4 motor slowest is on/off
100-0400 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Tray 5 motor is on/off
100-0401 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 5 motor slow is on/off
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1167
Code Display Meaning
100-0402 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 5 motor slowest is on/off
100-0410 Registration Motor Registration motor is on/off
100-0411 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow is on/off
100-0412 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest is on/off
100-0420 Tray 1 Feed Motor Tray 1 feed motor is on/off
100-0421 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slow Tray 1 feed motor slow is on/off
100-0422 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 1 feed motor slowest is on/off
100-0430 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 motor is on/off
100-0431 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 motor slow is on/off
100-0432 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slowest Exit 2 motor slowest is on/off
100-0490 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Duplex 2 motor forward is on/off
100-0491 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slow Duplex 2 motor forward slow is on/off
100-0492 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slowest Duplex 2 motor forward slowest is on/off
100-0600 Return Motor Forward Return motor forward is on/off
100-0601 Return Motor Forward Slow Return motor forward slow is on/off
100-0602 Return Motor Forward Slowest Return motor forward slowest is on/off
100-0603 Return Motor Backward Return motor backward is on/off
100-0604 Return Motor Backward Slow Return motor backward slow is on/off
100-0605 Return Motor Backward Slowest Return motor backward slowest is on/off
100-0700 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Tray 6 motor is on/off
100-0701 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 6 motor slow is on/off
100-0702 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 6 motor slowest is on/off
101-0101 Tray 4 Shift Gate Solenoid Tray 4 shift gate solenoid on/off
101-0140 Tray 4 Feed Motor Tray 4 feed motor on/off
101-0141 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slow Tray 4 motor slow is on/off
101-0142 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 4 motor slowest is on/off
101-0150 Tray 5 Feed Motor Tray 5 feed motor on/off
101-0151 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slow Tray 5 feed motor slow on/off
101-0152 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 5 feed motor slowest on/off
101-0160 Tray 6 Feed Motor Tray 6 feed motor slow on/off
101-0161 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slow Tray 6 feed motor slow on/off
101-0162 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 6 feed motor slowest on/off
101-0190 Output Bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin full sensor
101-0191 Output Bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin 2 full sensor
1168 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Display Meaning
101-0206 Developer Suction Fan Run Start/stop developer fan run
101-0207 Developer Suction Fan Run Ready Detects if developer suction fan runs at normal
speed
101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 clutch is on/off
101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 solenoid is on/off
101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Return gate solenoid is on/off
101-1000 Power 24V 1 Power 24V
101-1001 Power 24V 2 Power 24V
101-1002 Power 24V 3 Power 24V
101-1003 Power 24V 4 Power 24V
102-0000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed
102-0001 Tray 2 Lock Detect Detect Tray 2 lock unit
102-0002 Tray 2 Lock Position Check Tray 2 lock position
102-0010 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2
102-0041 Tray 2 Paper Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 2
102-0050 Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
102-0070 Tray 3 Home Position Detects when Tray 3 is closed
102-0071 Tray 3 Lock Detect Detect Tray 3 lock unit
102-0072 Tray 3 Lock Position Check Tray 3 lock position
102-0080 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 3
102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 3
102-0120 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 3 is elevated to the sensor
102-0140 Tray 4 Home Position Detects when Tray 4 is closed
102-0141 Tray 4 Lock Detect Detect Tray 4 lock unit
102-0142 Tray 4 Lock Position Check Tray 4 lock position
102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4
102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 4
102-0190 Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 4 is elevated to the sensor
102-0201 Tray 4 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 is elevated
to sensor 1
102-0202 Tray 4 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 is elevated
to sensor 2
102-0210 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed.
102-0211 Tray 5 Lock Detect Detect Tray 5 lock unit
102-0212 Tray 5 Lock Position Check Tray 5 lock position
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1169
Code Display Meaning
102-0220 Tray 5 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 5
102-0251 Tray 5 Paper Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 5
102-0260 Tray 5 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 5 is elevated to the sensor
102-0271 Tray 5 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 is elevated
to sensor 1
102-0272 Tray 5 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 is elevated
to sensor 2
102-0273 Tray 5 Install Sensor 1 Detects when Tray 5 install sensor 1
102-0274 Tray 5 Install Sensor 2 Detects when Tray 5 install sensor 2
102-0280 Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray (Tray 1)
102-0281 Tray 1 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 1 size
102-0292 Pre-feed 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at the pre-feed 2 sensor
102-0300 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 feed sensor
(optional)
102-0301 Pre-feed 3 Sensor Detects when paper is at the pre-feed 3 sensor
102-0320 Tray 4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 4 feed sensor
(optional)
102-0321 Pre-feed 4 Sensor Detects when paper is at the pre-feed 4 sensor
102-0330 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor Detects when Tray 4 is closed
102-0343 Pre-feed 5 Sensor Detects when paper is at the pre-feed 5 sensor
102-0350 Tray 5 Door Open Sensor Detects when Tray 5 is closed
102-0351 Tray 6 Door Open Sensor Detects when Tray 6 is closed
102-0353 Pre-feed 6 Sensor Detects when paper is at the pre-feed 6 sensor
(optional)
102-0360 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor
102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor
102-0371 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at the exit 2 sensor.
102-0380 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
102-0390 Duplex Jam 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 2 sensor.
102-0435 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover
102-0436 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover
102-0480 Tray 6 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 6
102-0520 Tray 6 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 6 is elevated to the sensor
102-0531 Tray 6 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 is elevated
to sensor 1
102-0532 Tray 6 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 is elevated
to sensor 2
1170 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Display Meaning
102-0533 Tray 6 Install Sensor 1 Detects when Tray 6 install sensor 1
102-0534 Tray 6 Install Sensor 2 Detects when Tray 6 install sensor 2
102-0730 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 knock up home sensor
102-0731 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4 shift tray
102-0732 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray
level sensor 1
102-0733 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray
level sensor 2
102-0734 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate home sensor
102-0735 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate end sensor
102-0736 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 gate solenoid home sensor
104-0000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed
105-0000 Yellow MHV Bias Yellow MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
105-0010 Magenta MHV Bias Magenta MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
105-0020 Cyan MHV Bias Cyan MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
105-0030 Black MHV Bias Black MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
106-0000 Yellow Developer Bias Yellow developer bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0010 Magenta Developer Bias Magenta developer bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0020 Cyan Developer Bias Cyan developer bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0030 Black Developer Bias Black developer bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0031 Black Developer AC Bias Black developer AC bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0032 Cyan Developer AC Bias Cyan developer AC bias voltage on at normal drive
level
106-0033 Magenta Developer AC Bias Magenta developer AC bias voltage on at normal
drive level
106-0034 Yellow Developer AC Bias Yellow developer AC bias voltage on at normal
drive level
106-0200 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit
107-0033 THV(-) Bias THV minus bias voltage on at normal drive level
107-0034 THV CC Bias THV constant current plus bias voltage
107-0035 THV CV Bias THV constant voltage plus bias voltage
107-0162 Yellow Eraser On Yellow eraser lamp on/off
107-0163 Magenta Eraser On Magenta eraser lamp on/off
107-0164 Cyan Eraser On Cyan eraser lamp on/off
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1171
Code Display Meaning
107-0165 Black Eraser On Black eraser lamp on/off
107-0166 Yellow Eraser Detect Detect yellow eraser status
107-0167 Magenta Eraser Detect Detect magenta eraser status
107-0168 Cyan Eraser Detect Detect cyan eraser status
107-0169 Black Eraser Detect Detect black eraser status
107-0201 ITHV Yellow Bias Transfer assembly yellow bias on/off
107-0202 ITHV Magenta Bias Transfer assembly magenta bias on/off
107-0203 ITHV Cyan Bias Transfer assembly cyan bias on/off
107-0204 ITHV Black Bias Transfer assembly black bias on/off
109-0000 Fuser Temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on the fuser
109-0010 Fuser Temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on the fuser
109-0011 LSU Temperature LSU temperature
109-0012 Inner Temperature Inner temperature
109-0013 Outer Temperature Outer temperature
109-0014 Humidity Humidity
109-0020 Fuser Fan Run Ready Detects if fuser fan motor runs at normal speed
109-0021 Exit 2 Fan Run Start/stop exit 2 fan run
109-0022 Exit 2 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 2 fan runs at normal speed
109-0023 Exit 3 Fan Run Start/stop exit 3 fan run
109-0024 Exit 3 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 3 fan runs at normal speed
109-0025 Exit 4 Fan Run Start/Stop exit 4 fan run
109-0026 Exit 4 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 4 fan runs at normal speed
109-0030 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off
109-0034 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if fuser fan runs at normal speed
109-0040 Fuser Fan Run Fuser fan motor on/off
109-0046 Exit Fan Run Exit fan motor on/off
109-0047 Exit Fan Run Ready Detects if the exit fan runs at normal speed
109-0130 Fuser Gap Motor Fuser press control motor on/off
109-0140 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located in the home
position
109-0200 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status
109-0210 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period
109-0300 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit
110-0000 LSU Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if the LSU motor 1 runs at normal speed
1172 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Display Meaning
110-0020 LUS Motor Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if the LSU fan motor 1 runs at normal
speed
110-0060 LSU Motor 1 Run LSU motor 1 on/off
110-0080 LSU LD Power 1 LSU LD 1 power on/off (yellow)
110-0090 LSU LD Power 2 LSU LD 2 power on/off (magenta)
110-0100 LSU LD Power 3 LSU LD 3 power on/off (cyan)
110-0110 LSU LD Power 4 LSU LD 4 power on/off (black)
110-0120 LSU Fan 1 Run Start/stop the LSU fan run
110-0140 LSU HSync 1 Detect the LSU HSync 1 (yellow)
110-0150 LSU HSync 2 Detect the LSU HSync 2 (magenta)
110-0160 LSU HSync 3 Detect the LSU HSync 3 (cyan)
110-0170 LSU HSync 4 Detect the LSU HSync 4 (black)
110-0200 LSU Installed Detect the LSU
110-0320 LSU Shutter Open Detects if the LSU shutter is open
110-0330 LSU Shutter Closed Detects if the LSU shutter is closed
111-0000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
111-0010 Toner Dispense Motor Magenta Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
111-0020 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
111-0040 Toner Sensor Yellow TC sensor in developer tank
111-0050 Toner Sensor Magenta TC sensor in developer tank
111-0060 Toner Sensor Cyan TC sensor in developer tank
111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank
111-0110 Toner Control Voltage Yellow Yellow toner voltage on/off
111-0120 Toner Control Voltage Magenta Magenta toner voltage on/off
111-0130 Toner Control Voltage Cyan Cyan toner voltage on/off
111-0140 Toner Control Voltage Black Black toner voltage on/off
111-0200 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Yellow Yellow supply motor lock sensor
111-0210 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Magenta Magenta supply motor lock sensor
111-0220 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Cyan Cyan supply motor lock sensor
111-0230 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Black Black supply motor lock sensor
111-0300 Toner Reservoir Motor Yellow Yellow reservoir motor on/off
111-0310 Toner Reservoir Motor Magenta Magenta reservoir motor on/off
111-0320 Toner Reservoir Motor Cyan Cyan reservoir motor on/off
111-0330 Toner Reservoir Motor Black Black reservoir motor on/off
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1173
Code Display Meaning
111-0340 Toner Reservoir Level Yellow Yellow reservoir motor on/off
111-0350 Toner Reservoir Level Magenta Magenta reservoir motor on/off
111-0360 Toner Reservoir Level Cyan Cyan reservoir level display
111-0370 Toner Reservoir Level Black Black reservoir level display
112-0010 Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Registration Clear manual offset value of color registration
112-0101 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Status Yellow drum home sensor status display
112-0111 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Status Magenta drum home sensor status display
112-0121 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Status Cyan drum home sensor status display
112-0131 Black Drum Home Sensor Status Black drum home sensor status display
112-0200 ACR Shutter Motor Run ACR shutter motor on/off
112-0210 ACR Shutter Detect Detect ACR shutter
112-0220 ACR Shutter Open ACR shutter open
112-0230 ACR Shutter Close ACR shutter close
112-0300 Front ID Sensor P Read Front ID sensor P value display
112-0310 Front ID Sensor S Read Front ID sensor S value display
112-0320 Rear ID Sensor P Read Rear ID sensor P value display
112-0330 Rear ID Sensor S Read Rear ID sensor S value display
112-0340 Center ID Sensor P Read Center ID sensor P value display
112-0350 Center ID Sensor S Read Center ID sensor S value display
113-0000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the finisher is in place
113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect when a paper is at entrance sensor
113-0360 Finisher Exit Sensor Detect when a paper is at exit sensor
113-0361 Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect when a paper is at compile sensor
113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect paddle home position
113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detect lift tamper home position
113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detect right tamper home position
113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detect stapler door cover is closed
113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detect jam door cover is closed
113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect stapler home position
113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect stapler level
113-0451 Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect stapler ready sensor
113-0461 Finisher Ejector 1 Home Sensor Detect ejector 1 home position
113-0462 Finisher Ejector 2 Home Sensor Detect ejector 2 home position
113-0463 Finisher Ejector 2 Encoder Sensor Detect ejector 2 encoder Sensor
1174 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Display Meaning
113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detect main tray home position
113-0471 Finisher Main Tray Beam Sensor Detect main tray beam sensor
113-0472 Finisher Main Tray Low Limit Sensor Detect main tray low limit sensor
113-0473 Finisher Main Tray Encoder Sensor Detect main tray encoder sensor
113-0481 Finisher Paper Support Sensor Detect paper support home sensor
113-0491 Finisher Traverse Front Sensor Detect traverse front home sensor
113-0492 Finisher Traverse Rear Sensor Detect traverse tear home sensor
113-0501 Finisher Entrance Motor Finisher entrance motor on/off
113-0502 Finisher Exit Motor Finisher exit motor on/off
113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher paddle motor on/off
113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher left tamper motor on/off
113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher right tamper motor on/off
113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher staple unit motor on/off
113-0561 Finisher Ejector 1 Motor Finisher ejector 1 motor on/off
113-0562 Finisher Ejector 2 Motor Finisher ejector 2 motor on/off
113-0563 Finisher Ejector 2 Reverse Motor Finisher ejector 2 reverse direction on/off
113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher main tray motor on/off
113-0571 Finisher Paper Support Motor Finisher paper support motor on/off
113-0581 Finisher Traverse Motor Finisher staple unit traverse motor on/off
113-0591 Finisher Paper Hold Solenoid Finisher paper hold solenoid on/off
113-0600 Finisher Punch Motor Finisher punch motor on/off
113-0610 Finisher Punch Encoder Sensor Detect finisher punch encoder sensor
113-0611 Finisher Punch Position Sensor Detect finisher punch position sensor
113-0612 Finisher Punch Home Sensor Detect finisher punch home sensor
113-0620 Finisher Hopper Install Sensor Detect finisher hopper exit Install sensor
113-0621 Finisher Hopper Full Sensor Detect finisher hopper bin full sensor
113-2000 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer lift sensor
113-2010 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher clamp home sensor
113-2020 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher diverter home sensor
113-2030 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Away Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 away sensor
113-2031 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 home sensor
113-2032 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 encoder sensor
113-2040 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 home sensor
113-2041 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 encoder sensor
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1175
Code Display Meaning
113-2050 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher end fence sensor
113-2060 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Paddle home sensor
113-2070 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge entrance sensor
113-2071 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Middle Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge middle sensor
113-2080 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher entrance sensor
113-2090 2 Bin Finisher Main Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main exit sensor
113-2091 2 Bin Finisher Sub Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub exit sensor
113-2100 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer exit sensor
113-2110 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler home sensor
113-2111 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Rear Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler rear sensor
113-2112 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Font Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler front sensor
113-2113 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Manual Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler manual sensor
113-2114 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Head Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler head sensor
113-2115 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler low sensor
113-2116 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler ready sensor
113-2120 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front tamper sensor
113-2130 2 Bin Finisher Rear tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher rear tamper sensor
113-2140 2 Bin Finisher Main beam Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main beam sensor
113-2141 2 Bin Finisher Main Front Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main Front level sensor
113-2142 2 Bin Finisher Main Rear Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main rear level sensor
113-2143 2 Bin Finisher Main Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main encoder sensor
113-2144 2 Bin Finisher Main Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main full sensor
113-2145 2 Bin Finisher Sub Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub full sensor
113-2150 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet paper sensor
113-2160 2 Bin Finisher Staple Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple paper sensor
113-2161 2 Bin Finisher Staple Button Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple button sensor
113-2170 2 Bin Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher compile paper sensor
113-2180 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge cover sensor
113-2181 2 Bin Finisher Top Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher top cover sensor
113-2182 2 Bin Finisher Front Door Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front door sensor
113-2190 2 Bin Finisher Stack Top Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stack top sensor
113-2200 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge detect sensor
113-2201 2 Bin Finisher Punch Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher punch detect sensor
113-2202 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet detect sensor
1176 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Display Meaning
113-2210 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam home sensor Detects 2 bin finisher booklet exit cam home
sensor
113-2500 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Motor 2 bin finisher buffer lift motor on/off
113-2510 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Motor 2 bin finisher clamp motor on/off
113-2520 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Motor 2 bin finisher diverter motor on/off
113-2530 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 1 motor on/off
113-2540 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 2 motor on/off
113-2560 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Feed Motor 2 bin finisher bridge feed motor on/off
113-2570 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Motor 2 bin finisher entrance motor on/off
113-2580 2 Bin Finisher Exit Feed Motor 2 bin finisher exit feed motor on/off
113-2590 2 Bin Finisher End Fence motor 2 bin finisher End fence motor on/off
113-2600 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Motor 2 bin finisher paddle motor on/off
113-2610 2 Bin Finisher Main Tray Motor 2 bin finisher main tray motor on/off
113-2620 2 Bin Finisher Staple Move Motor 2 bin finisher staple move motor on/off
113-2621 2 Bin Finisher Staple Head Motor 2 bin finisher staple head motor on/off
113-2630 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher front tamper motor on/off
113-2640 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher Rear tamper motor on/off
113-2650 2 Bin Finisher Manual Blue LED 2 bin finisher Manual blue LED On/Off
113-2651 2 Bin Finisher Manual Red LED 2 bin finisher Manual red LED On/Off
113-3000 Booklet Stopper home Sensor Detect booklet stopper home sensor
113-3010 Booklet Staple home Sensor Detect booklet staple home sensor
113-3020 Booklet Front Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet front staple empty sensor
113-3030 Booklet Rear Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet rear staple empty sensor
113-3040 Booklet Knife Home Sensor Detect booklet knife home sensor
113-3050 Booklet Guide Home Sensor Detect booklet guide home sensor
113-3060 Booklet Diverter Home Sensor Detect booklet diverter home sensor
113-3080 Booklet Tamper Home Sensor Detect booklet tamper home sensor
113-3090 Booklet Paddle Home Sensor Detect booklet paddle home sensor
113-3100 Booklet Entrance Paper Sensor Detect booklet entrance paper sensor
113-3110 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor Detect booklet tray paper sensor
113-3120 Booklet Fold Exit Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold exit paper sensor
113-3130 Booklet Press home Sensor Detect booklet press home sensor
113-3500 Booklet Feed Motor Booklet feed motor on/off
113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Booklet fold motor on/off
113-3520 Booklet Stopper Solenoid Booklet stopper solenoid on/off
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1177
Code Display Meaning
113-3530 Booklet Stopper Motor Booklet stopper motor on/off
113-3540 Booklet Tamper Motor Booklet tamper motor on/off
113-3550 Booklet Knife Motor Booklet knife motor on/off
113-3560 Booklet Diverter Motor Booklet diverter motor on/off
113-3570 Booklet Press Motor Booklet press motor on/off
113-3580 Booklet Paddle Motor Booklet paddle motor on/off
113-3590 Booklet Guide Motor Booklet guide motor on/off
113-3600 Booklet Staple Motor Booklet staple motor on/off
113-4000 Punch Scan Home Sensor Detect punch scan home sensor
113-4010 Punch Scan Edge 1 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 1 sensor
113-4011 Punch Scan Edge 2 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 2 sensor
113-4012 Punch Scan Edge 3 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 3 sensor
113-4013 Punch Scan Edge 4 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 4 sensor
113-4020 Punch Home Sensor Detect punch home sensor
113-4030 Punch Position A Sensor Detect punch position A sensor
113-4031 Punch Position B Sensor Detect punch position B sensor
113-4040 Punch Encoder Sensor Detect punch encoder sensor
113-4050 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Detect punch hopper full sensor
113-4060 Punch Type 1 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 1 detect sensor
113-4061 Punch Type 2 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 2 detect sensor
113-4500 Punch Scan Motor Punch scan motor on/off
113-4510 Punch Motor Punch motor on/off
Fax diagnostics
Fax NVM Read/Write
● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list
of configuration values and descriptions that display.
Users can input a code through the text box to search for a configuration value.
After selecting a value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
1178 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Name Description Default Range
20-200 Pause dial time Pause time (value * 1000 ms) Country/region 0-200
value
20-210 Dial pulse M/B ratio 33/66 40/60 Country/region 0=
value OPTION_DP_33
1=
OPTION_DP_40
2=
OPTION_DP_37
3=
OPTION_DP_50
20-220 Auto dial start pause time Pause time before auto-dialing 1 0-10
(second)
20-300 Ring on time Ring on time (ms) 170 90-800
20-310 Ring off time Ring off time (ms) 560 90-800
20-320 Ring detection frequency Sets the call indication frequency 1 1 = 12-80 hz
range that will be detected by LIU.
2 = 16-55 hz
3 = 20-55 hz
4 = 22-55 hz
20-330 Ring on max time Ring on max time (ms) 5100 3000-12000
20-340 Ring off max time Ring off max time (ms) 11100 9000-22000
20-400 DTMF high-frequency level DTMF high-frequency level (dBm) Country/region 0-15
value
20-410 DTMF low-frequency level DTMF low-frequency level (dBm) Country/region 0-15
value
20-420 DTMF timing DTMF duration of on/off output 8 1 = 80/80
(ms)
2 = 70/70
3 = 70/150
4 = 60/60
5 = 80/100
6 = 150/50
7 = 150/240
8 = 100/100
9 = 100/80
20-500 Dial mode Select tone/pulse Country/region 0=
value OPTION_TONE_
MODE
1=
OPTION_PULSE
_MODE
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1179
Code Name Description Default Range
20-520 Error rate Adjust error rate (Off/5%/10%/ 2 0=
20%) OPTION_RATE_
OFF
1=
OPTION_RATE_
5
2=
OPTION_RATE_
10
3=
OPTION_RATE_
20
20-530 Dial tone detect Detect dial tone prior to sending Country/region 0 = OPTION_OFF
value
1 = OPTION_ON
20-540 Loop current detect Detect if loop current is present Country/region 0 = OPTION_OFF
prior to sending value
1 = OPTION_ON
20-550 Busy signal detect Detect busy signal to allow redials Country/region 0 = OPTION_OFF
value
1 = OPTION_ON
20-560 TCF duration Adjust TCF duration (ms) 1500 1000-3000
20-800 Modem speed Select modem start speed 24
20-810 Fax transmission level Adjust fax transmission level (dBm) Country/region Country/region
value value
20-830 Auto dial timeout Adjust auto dial timeout (second) Country/region 30-150
value
20-920 CNG detection count CNG tone detection check count 2 1-15
during ANS/FAX mode
20-930 Caller ID This option is needed to guide Country/region 0 = OPTION_OFF
Caller ID off for user environment value
1 = OPTION_ON
20-940 Ext. phone Ext. phone detection enable/ 1 0 = Disable
disable (default: enable 1)
1 = Enable
21-999 Fax line setting Fax test line setting (dual fax) 0 0 = Line 1
1 = Line 2
21-800 Modem speed line 2 Select modem start speed for line 24
2. This item will display only when
a dual line fax kit is installed
Fax test routines
● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines
1180 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.
Operation procedure When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list
of routines and descriptions that display. Users can input a code through the text box
to search for a routine.
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected
routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.
Code Name Description State Displayed
20-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 1 On/Off
20-014 Single tone 1650Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1650Hz on line 1 On/Off
20-015 Single tone 1850Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1850Hz on line 1 On/Off
20-016 Single tone 2100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 2100Hz on line 1 On/Off
20-020 DTMF # Line1 Emits DTMF # on line 1 On/Off
20-021 DTMF * Line1 Emits DTMF * on line 1 On/Off
20-022 DTMF 0 Line1 Emits DTMF 0 on line 1 On/Off
20-023 DTMF 1 Line1 Emits DTMF 1 on line 1 On/Off
20-024 DTMF 2 Line1 Emits DTMF 2 on line 1 On/Off
20-025 DTMF 3 Line1 Emits DTMF 3 on line 1 On/Off
20-026 DTMF 4 Line1 Emits DTMF 4 on line 1 On/Off
20-027 DTMF 5 Line1 Emits DTMF 5 on line 1 On/Off
20-028 DTMF 6 Line1 Emits DTMF 6 on line 1 On/Off
20-029 DTMF 7 Line1 Emits DTMF 7 on line 1 On/Off
20-030 DTMF 8 Line1 Emits DTMF 8 on line 1 On/Off
20-031 DTMF 9 Line1 Emits DTMF 9 on line 1 On/Off
20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1 Emits V.21 300 bps Line 1 On/Off
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 4800 bps Line1 On/Off
20-043 V.29 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line1 On/Off
20-044 V.29 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.29 9600 bps Line1 On/Off
20-045 V.17 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.17 7200 bps Line1 On/Off
20-046 V.17 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.17 9600 bps Line1 On/Off
20-047 V.17 12000 bps Line1 Emits V.17 12000 bps Line1 On/Off
20-048 V.17 14400 bps Line1 Emits V.17 14400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-049 V.34 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 2400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-050 V.34 4800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 4800 bps Line1 On/Off
20-051 V.34 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 7200 bps Line1 On/Off
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1181
Code Name Description State Displayed
20-052 V.34 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 9600 bps Line1 On/Off
20-053 V.34 12000 bps Line1 Emits V.34 12000 bps Line1 On/Off
20-054 V.34 14400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 14400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-055 V.34 16800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 16800 bps Line1 On/Off
20-056 V.34 19200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 19200 bps Line1 On/Off
20-057 V.34 21600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 21600 bps Line1 On/Off
20-058 V.34 24000 bps Line1 Emits V.34 24000 bps Line1 On/Off
20-059 V.34 26400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 26400 bps Line1 On/Off
20-060 V.34 28800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 28800 bps Line1 On/Off
20-061 V.34 31200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 31200 bps Line1 On/Off
20-062 V.34 33600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 33600 bps Line1 On/Off
21-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 2 On/Off
21-014 Single tone 1650Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1650Hz on line 2 On/Off
21-015 Single tone 1850Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1850Hz on line 2 On/Off
21-016 Single tone 2100Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 2100Hz on line 2 On/Off
21-020 DTMF # Line2 Emits DTMF # on line 2 On/Off
21-021 DTMF * Line2 Emits DTMF * on line 2 On/Off
21-022 DTMF 0 Line2 Emits DTMF 0 on line 2 On/Off
21-023 DTMF 1 Line2 Emits DTMF 1 on line 2 On/Off
21-024 DTMF 2 Line2 Emits DTMF 2 on line 2 On/Off
21-025 DTMF 3 Line2 Emits DTMF 3 on line 2 On/Off
21-026 DTMF 4 Line2 Emits DTMF 4 on line 2 On/Off
21-027 DTMF 5 Line2 Emits DTMF 5 on line 2 On/Off
21-028 DTMF 6 Line2 Emits DTMF 6 on line 2 On/Off
21-029 DTMF 7 Line2 Emits DTMF 7 on line 2 On/Off
21-030 DTMF 8 Line2 Emits DTMF 8 on line 2 On/Off
21-031 DTMF 9 Line2 Emits DTMF 9 on line 2 On/Off
21-040 V.21 300 bps Line2 Emits V.21 300 bps Line2 On/Off
21-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line2 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line2 On/Off
21-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line2 Emits V.27ter 4800 bps Line2 On/Off
21-043 V.29 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line2 On/Off
21-044 V.29 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.29 9600 bps Line2 On/Off
21-045 V.17 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.17 7200 bps Line2 On/Off
21-046 V.17 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.17 9600 bps Line2 On/Off
1182 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Name Description State Displayed
21-047 V.17 12000 bps Line2 Emits V.17 12000 bps Line2 On/Off
21-048 V.17 14400 bps Line2 Emits V.17 14400 bps Line2 On/Off
21-049 V.34 2400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 2400 bps Line2 On/Off
21-050 V.34 4800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 4800 bps Line2 On/Off
21-051 V.34 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 7200 bps Line2 On/Off
21-052 V.34 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 9600 bps Line2 On/Off
21-053 V.34 12000 bps Line2 Emits V.34 12000 bps Line2 On/Off
21-054 V.34 14400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 14400 bps Line2 On/Off
21-055 V.34 16800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 16800 bps Line2 On/Off
21-056 V.34 19200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 19200 bps Line2 On/Off
21-057 V.34 21600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 21600 bps Line2 On/Off
21-058 V.34 24000 bps Line2 Emits V.34 24000 bps Line2 On/Off
21-059 V.34 26400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 26400 bps Line2 On/Off
21-060 V.34 28800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 28800 bps Line2 On/Off
21-061 V.34 31200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 31200 bps Line2 On/Off
21-062 V.34 33600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 33600 bps Line2 On/Off
Scanner diagnostics
Shading test
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test
Purpose – To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical devices
such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.
– Check the quality problem as shown below:
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1183
Operation procedure For the Image Scanner Unit
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green, and
blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading value is
needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.
For the Flow ADF unit
1. Load the shading sheet on the Flow ADF tray.
2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:
Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (Flow ADF)
Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.
3. Check if the printed results are correct.
NOTE:
– When executing Flow ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).
– A Shading Test for the Flow ADF unit must be completed after replacing the Flow ADF unit or
main board.
Verification
1184 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Scanner ADF NVM Read/Write
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner ADF NVM Read/Write
Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and ADF memory.
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through the list
of codes with descriptions and saved values. Users can also directly input a code
through the text box to search for an NVM.
After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled only if the code is writable.
If the selected code is writable and the Edit button is enabled, press the button to
configure the desired value for the code.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code NVM description Default GX model
05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O
05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O
05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point 0 O
05-0030 Simplex Registration Value (Registration 1) 0 O
05-0040 Duplex Registration Value (Registration 2) 0 O
05-0050 Width Guide Max Value 0 O
05-0060 Width Guide Min Value 0 O
Scanner ADF test routines
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner ADF Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and ADF.
Operation procedure When the main Scanner ADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigation
through the list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can input a code
through the text box to search for a routine.
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected
routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference Table below
Code Name Value GX model
06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O
Detecting Sensor 1
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1185
Code Name Value GX model
06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O
Detecting Sensor 2
06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/Close High/Low O
Sensor 1
06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/Close High/Low O
Sensor 2
06-0020 Scanner Platen Scanner Motor Start/Stop O
Forward
06-0030 Scanner Platen Scanner Motor Start/Stop O
Backward
06-0040 Scanner Image Scanner Home High/Low O
Position Sensor
05-0000 Document Length .1 Sensor High/Low O
05-0001 Document Length .2 Sensor High/Low O
05-0020 Document Cover Open Sensor High/Low O
05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low O
05-0050 Document Feed Sensor High/Low O
05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O
Registration Sensor
05-0061 Document Duplex Registration High/Low O
Sensor
05-0070 Document Scan Read Sensor 1 High/Low O
05-0071 Document Scan Read Sensor 2 High/Low O
05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low O
05-0090 Document Pickup Clutch Start/Stop X
05-0110 Document Motor Forward Start/Stop O
05-0111 Document Motor Backward Start/Stop O
05-0123 Document width 1 MSO High/Low O
Sensor
05-0124 Document width 2 MSO High/Low O
Sensor
05-0125 Document width 3 MSO High/Low O
Sensor
05-0130 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O
Forward
05-0131 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O
Backward
05-0140 Document Pickup Roller High/Low X
Detect Sensor
05-0150 Document Stacker Lift Upper High/Low O
Sensor
1186 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Code Name Value GX model
05-0151 Document Stacker Lift Lower High/Low O
Sensor
05-0152 Document Stacker Lift Home High/Low O
Position Sensor
05-0153 Document Scan in Release High/Low O
Sensor
05-0154 Document Separation Up High/Low O
Down Sensor
05-0160 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O
Motor Forward
05-0162 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O
Motor Backward
05-0170 Document Registration 2 Start/Stop O
Motor Forward
05-0171 Document Registration 2 Start/Stop O
Motor Backward
05-0180 Document Stacker Lift Motor Start/Stop O
Forward
05-0181 Document Stacker Lift Motor Start/Stop O
Backward
05-0182 Document Exit Motor Forward Start/Stop O
05-0183 Document Exit Motor Start/Stop O
Backward
05-0184 Document Pickup Release Start/Stop O
Motor Forward
05-0185 Document Pickup Release Start/Stop O
Motor Backward
05-0186 Document Scan In Release Start/Stop O
Motor Forward
05-0187 Document Scan In Release Start/Stop O
Motor Backward
05-0190 Document Width Guide ADC 10Bit (0~1023) O
Sensor
05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Speed Start/Stop O
Simplex
05-0230 Document Jig Test High Speed Start/Stop O
Simplex
Adjustment
Print adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1187
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on the paper in the print engine.
Operation procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - buttons, then press the OK button
to save the changes.
○ Simplex Leading Edge
○ Simplex Side Edge
○ Duplex Leading Edge
○ Duplex Side Edge
NOTE:
○ Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).
○ Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.
○ Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image is adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Margin Test
This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.
Copy adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the copy engine.
Operation procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:
– Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same as the
values of the print adjustment.
– Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray selection, as this
can confuse the adjustment.
NOTE:
– Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).
– Do not choose All for tray selection.
– Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press OK to save
the changes.
○ Simplex Leading Edge
○ Simplex Side Edge
○ Duplex Leading Edge
○ Duplex Side Edge
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. It not, repeat Step 2.
1188 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Scan area adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.
Operation procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart on the scanner glass.
Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left side of the scanner glass and are placed face
down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and Letter.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper value based on
the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the scanner
glass.
5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to
the scanned image.
6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned image.
NOTE: Specifications:
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1189
○ Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
+, otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from
the scanner glass.
8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from
the chart to the scanned image.
9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.
NOTE: Specifications:
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
Flow/non flow/LX ADF adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the flow ADF
automatically.
Operation procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart should be on the Flow ADF tray.
1190 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper
value based on the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from
the Flow ADF.
5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from
the chart to the scanned image.
6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.
NOTE: Specifications:
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer
to Scanner Diagnostics.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
○ Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
+, otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1191
NOTE: Specifications:
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from
the Flow ADF.
8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from
the chart to the scanned image.
9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.
10. If Auto Skew Correction during job box is checked, skewed image is corrected by
digitally rotating the scanned images.
NOTE: When this function is enabled, visual artifact (like checkerboard
patterns) might appear on the image depending on the original contents or copy
option settings.
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to
Scanner Diagnostics.
Auto color sensing (ACS)
● Diagnostics > ACS
Purpose To set the color coverage ratio of auto color mode in the copy function.
– Color Coverage Ratio: The ratio of color contents in the original document.
1192 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Operation procedure Change the level from 1 to 5.
– Classifies a document as color, if color coverage of the document is higher than a
predefined level.
– Level 1 has a higher probability of classifying documents to color, while level 5
has lower probability.
Verification Copy the mono copied original with auto color mode and check if the print out is
monochrome.
Specification Color coverage
– Level 1: 0.01%
– Level 2: 0.05%.
– Level 3: 0.1%
– Level 4: 0.25%
– Level 5: 0.5%
Image management
Auto tone adjustment activation
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is
recommended after changing a unit, such as a toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB,
or after restarting the printer.
Operation procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control execution.
○ Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.
○ On: Normal TRC Control will execute during the determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
○ Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC Control based on the count
of printed pages since the last execution.
○ Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC Control when the
system returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the
configured value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced, the life of the OPC drum is
changed, the density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or humidity in the
room changes suddenly.
Operation procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.
○ Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.
○ On: Full TRC Control will execute during the determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC Control.
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1193
○ Page Count: The system executes Full TRC Control based on the count of
printed pages since the last execution.
○ Time Left Alone: The system executes Full TRC Control when the system
returns from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the configured
value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
Auto tone adjustment
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when image density is poor. Normal TRC Control is
recommended after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, or
after restarting the printer.
Operation procedure Select OK to execute Normal TRC.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is changed, the life of the OPC drum is
changed, the image density is poor, or the temperature and/or humidity in the room
changes suddenly.
Operation procedure Select OK to execute Full TRC.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment > CTD Sensor Cleaning
Purpose To solve the CTD Sensor Failure error.
Operation procedure After cleaning the CTD/CPR sensor, execute this menu.
Print test patterns
Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >
● EP Calibration Pattern1 Contone
Service functions
Main memory clear
Service Functions > Main Memory Clear
● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can be
used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User configured
values return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the printer.
1194 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Debug log
Service Functions > Debug Log
● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:
– Off: This option disables the logging option.
– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.
– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This option
might effect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the system
performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.
Capture log
Service Functions > Capture Log
● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time to
copy to the USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.
2. Tap the Service Mode app. When the pop-up displays, press the area below the pop-up until the
password window appears. Enter 04087617 and press the OK button.
3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to INFO.
4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.
5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.
6. Press the Capture Log button.
7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to JOB
STATUS.
NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash drive.
8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.
Transfer assembly control mode
Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode
●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer
value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation procedure – Transfer Assembly Control Problems
○ Choose the process speed (Full, Half, Lower) based on the type of paper
being used.
○ Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1195
● Gray Spot: Increase T1 PWM value of the issued color
● Non Cyclic White Line: Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color
● OPC Cyclic Ghost: Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color
– T2 Control Problems
○ Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.
○ Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.
● Blur: Increase T1 PWM value
● Poor Transfer: Increase T1 PWM value
● Re-transfer: Decrease T1 PWM value
● White Spot: Decrease T1 PWM value
Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Envelope rotate
Service Functions > Envelope Rotate
● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded envelopes
with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF direction and the
machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.
This function provides the following setting options:
– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction
– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.
– 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.
NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope can only
be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.
If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate the
image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model supports custom
sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL Env (110x220), No 9
Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.
1196 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Drain
Service Functions > Drain
● This menu recovers toner density. The printer prints grayed images after operating over 500 low coverage
images. This menu supports ten levels.
This function provides the following setting options:
– Off (default)
– On
ENWW Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1197
Print quality troubleshooting guide
Image quality problems and solutions
Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external
software applications, and environmental conditions.
To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.
First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that has been
acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.
Figure 3-35 A/S chart (A3)
1198 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Figure 3-36 A/S chart
[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and magnification
[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error
[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the barcode
[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions, and so on
[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)
[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution
[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction
[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction
[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and uniformity
[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of seven colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/
10~100%)
[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of color, mono text
[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of small text
[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to mono white gap
[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit: cm)
[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit: inch)
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1199
How to analyze image defects
See the following flowchart.
TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the remaining life of
the part.
Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.
Figure 3-37 Defect analysis flowchart
How to analyze image defects (rollers)
1200 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Use the following table to isolate rollers suspected of causing defects.
Table 3-24 Roller period table
Roller Periodic
OPC/Drum 94.5 mm
Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm
Magnetic roller (MR) 32.3 mm
Transfer roller 44.0 mm
Transfer roller (T2) 75.4 mm
Fuser Belt (HR) 110 mm
Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1201
Vertical black band
Figure 3-38 Typical faulty images
Table 3-25 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Charge roller (CR) is contaminated. Check if the CR is contaminated.
Replace the Drum unit if there are additional problems.
1202 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-25 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)
Step Cause Action
2 ITB is contaminated. Check if the ITB is contaminated.
● The ITB cleaning is poor.
● The ITB clean-blade is partially broken.
Replace the ITB Cleaner if there are additional problems.
3 The scanner unit is contaminated. Wipe the contaminated part of the surface with a soft
cloth.
● Scan glass contamination
CAUTION: The scanner unit contains fragile parts. Use
● Mirror contamination caution while cleaning.
● CCD sensor contamination
Vertical white band, light band
Figure 3-39 Typical faulty images
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1203
Table 3-26 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller and Remove the foreign substance.
blade.
● Make a hook shape using a sheet (transparency
● The toner on the magnetic roller is partially empty. sheet is recommended).
● Place the hook into the gap between the magnetic
roller and the blade.
● Pull out the foreign substance.
2 The developer unit carrier is insufficient or the life of the ● Print the supplies information report. Check the
developer unit has expired. remaining life of the developer unit. If it is expired,
replace the developer unit.
● Check the developer layer on the magnetic roller. If it
is short, replace the developer unit.
3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.
A foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly
window.
4 OPC motor is scratched. Replace the drum unit.
1204 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Horizontal periodic black band or dot
Figure 3-40 Typical faulty images
Table 3-27 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Horizontal periodic band or dot (CR, 38 mm) Clean the contaminated surface on the charge roller with a
soft cloth.
● The surface of the charge roller (CR) is contaminated.
If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.
● CR is scratched.
2 Horizontal periodic band or dot (OPC, 94 mm) Clean the contaminated surface on the OPC drum with a
soft cloth.
● The surface of the OPC drum is contaminated or
scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.
3 The charge roller contact plate has debris or is Clean the charge roller contact plate.
contaminated.
If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.
If the problem persists after replacing the drum unit,
replace the HVPS board.
Horizontal periodic light/dark band or dot
Figure 3-41 Typical faulty images
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1205
Table 3-28 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Horizontal periodic band (OPC, 94.2 mm) This problem will resolve itself over time.
● OPC was left exposed for too long. If the problem is not resolved, replace the drum unit.
● OPC is damaged by a high voltage in a short amount
of time.
2 Horizontal periodic light/dark band (magnetic roller, 37 Replace the developer unit.
mm)
● The magnetic roller is in poor condition.
● V-groove of the magnetic roller surface is not
uniform.
Foggy image
Figure 3-42 Typical faulty images
Table 3-29 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.
2 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS board.
● HVPS is damaged or broken.
1206 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-29 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)
Step Cause Action
3 Toner is over supplied. Replace the developer unit.
● TC sensor operates abnormally.
4 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Check the transfer assembly connection in the HVPS.
● Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check if the transfer assembly roller spring in the ITB is
connected correctly.
Replace the HVPS board.
Light image
Figure 3-43 Typical faulty images
Table 3-30 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 TRC operates abnormally. Perform TRC three to four times.
2 Poor transfer has occurred. Force a jam during the print job. Check the image on the
transfer belt. If the image on the transfer belt is normal,
refer to the Blurred image section.
3 Output voltage of the HVPS is abnormally low. Replace the HVPS board.
● Color density decreases.
4 TC down and toner spills. Replace the developer unit.
5 Toner spills by eraser. Check if the eraser is contaminated.
Replace the drum unit.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1207
Blurred image
Figure 3-44 Typical faulty images
Table 3-31 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, higher quality paper.
2 T2 transfer voltage is low. Turn up the T2 transfer voltage.
3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between T2 high voltage terminal
and HVPS THV terminal is correct.
Check if the connection between the HVPS and ITB is
correct.
4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS.
1208 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Incorrect color registration
Figure 3-45 Typical faulty images
Table 3-32 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 CPR sensor is contaminated. Execute CPR manually.
2 Environment has changed. To recognize the environment change, execute CPR after a
certain amount of time.
3 Belt surface is contaminated. Remove the ITB. If the surface of the belt is contaminated,
clean it with soft cloth.
Uneven pitch and jitter image
Figure 3-46 Typical faulty images
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1209
Table 3-33 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Check for foreign substance in the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.
● Developer unit gears
● Drum unit gears
● Main drive unit gears
If the problem persists, replace the abnormal units.
● Developer unit
● Drum unit
● Main drive unit
2 Under 1 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, remove and tighten the screws.
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner
assembly.
Skewed image
Figure 3-47 Typical faulty images
Table 3-34 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 ● Tray is not installed properly. Reinstall the tray properly.
● Too much paper is loaded in the
tray.
● The tray guide is not set
properly.
1210 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Table 3-34 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)
Step Cause Action
2 The surface of the pickup/reverse/ Clean or replace the contaminated roller.
feed roller is contaminated or worn
out.
3 If the skewed image occurs during a Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
copy job, check the Flow ADF
installation. Adjust the Flow ADF skew.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1211
Blank copy
Figure 3-48 Typical faulty images
Table 3-35 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Laser scanner assembly operation error Check laser scanner assembly connections
2 All connections on the HVPS board are connected correctly Reconnect all connections
3 Check if the related parts are damaged or broken Replace the HVPS board, main board, or laser scanner
assembly
4 Check the connection between the scanner PCA and the Reconnect the harness
main board
If the connection is correct, replace the main board
1212 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Poor fusing performance
Figure 3-49 Typical faulty images
Table 3-36 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Cause Action
1 Check the paper type. Make sure the paper type displayed on the control panel is
the same type of paper being used for the print job.
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed
varies.
● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed
● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed
● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half Speed
2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.
3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure roller for Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.
4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor
● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally
● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally
Check the halogen lamp.
If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the fuser
unit.
5 Check if the pressure control system operates properly. Check the pressure control system.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1213
Stain on back of paper
Figure 3-50 Typical faulty images
Table 3-37 Troubleshooting procedure
Step Check item Action
1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.
out?
2 Is there any stain caused by poor Clean the transfer belt.
cleaning on the transfer belt?
If the problem persists, replace the ITB unit.
3 Is the fuser belt and pressure roller Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
dirty?
4 Check the pressure roller surface for Replace the fuser unit.
damage or scratches.
1214 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out
Figure 3-51 Typical faulty images
Troubleshooting procedure
1. Enter SVC Mode → Service Functions → TR Control Mode.
2. Select T2 Control Mode.
3. Select the paper setting based on the site. (Paper Group, Paper Side, Paper Direction)
4. Increase value for T2 PWM and check if the blur problem is resolved.
5. When the problem persists after changing the T2 Control Mode values, change the T1 Control Mode values.
6. Decrease the value for each color and see whether the symptom disappears.
In this case, [-4] was applied and solved the blur.
7. As there can be variation for each device, change T1, T2 and observe the results.
Other errors
Image system problem
● Toner cartridge detection error
● Image contamination (pressure roller contamination)
Toner cartridge detection error
Symptom
● Toner cartridge is installed, but Not Installed message displays.
Cause
● Toner cartridge is not properly installed.
● Toner cartridge e-label harness is defective.
● E-label PCA or e-label Chip is defective.
● E-label connection (modular connector) is defective.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1215
● E-label Joint PCA is defective.
● Bad connection between the main board and the e-label Joint PCA.
Troubleshooting
● Toner cartridge installation problem:
– Check if the toner cartridge is properly installed.
– If the cartridge comes out automatically, check the cartridge fixing hook.
– If the cartridge fixing hook is damaged, replace the cartridge cap or cartridge.
● E-label harness problem:
– Make sure the e-label harness is correctly connected.
Check the modular jack for damage or abnormal assembly.
– If the modular jack harness is defective, replace it with a new one.
If the modular jack has moved into the toner cartridge, remove it.
● E-label PCA problem or e-label data problem:
– Replace the toner cartridge.
● E-label connection (modular connector) installation problem:
– Open the front cover. Remove the toner cartridge.
– Make sure that the e-label connection (modular connector) is correctly installed.
– If the modular connector is not installed correctly, open the rear cover and reinstall.
● E-label Joint PCA problem:
– If the e-label Joint PCA, modular jack pin, or main board interface connector are damaged, replace the
PCA (see the previous step).
● Bad connection between the main board and the e-label Joint PCA:
– Check the connection between the main board and the e-label Joint PCA. If the connection is bad,
replace the harness, the e-label Joint PCA, or the main board.
Image contamination (pressure roller contamination)
Symptom
● Image (front/back side of paper) is contaminated with toner
Cause
● Toner is contaminated on the surface of pressure roller with low coverage, mainly simplex, and low duty
jobs.
Troubleshooting
1. Install Vx.D6.08 or latest version.
1216 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
2. Make sure Clean Fuser function is set to Auto.
Vx.D6.08 or later version has Clean Fuser: Auto function as default.
If the previous setting used is On mode, that pre-existing setting value will be kept as before. Otherwise, it
will be changed to Auto.
On mode can be set at desired intervals as required.
SVC mode → Service Functions → Clean Fuser → Auto
3. To execute fuser cleaning function manually, press Execute Now.
4. Repeat step 3 up to six times until you cannot find any contamination on the fuser cleaning sheet.
If the contamination on the fuser cleaning sheet still exists, clean the pressure-roller with soft brush or
scraper with care.
– Open the fuser jam cover. Remove three screws, and then remove the brush.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1217
– Check the surface of pressure roller and remove the toner contamination while carefully rotating the
pressure roller one cycle.
Fuser problem
● Acoustic noise in fuser uni
● Image hot offset problem
● Error “fusing unit not compatible” problem
Acoustic noise in fuser uni
● Symptom: Acoustic noise from the fuser assembly in the early stages of printing.
● Cause: Fuser belt edges are damaged.
Troubleshooting
▲ Replace the fuser unit.
Image hot offset problem
● Symptom: Image at the leading edge of the paper is duplicated after 110 mm.
● Cause: The fusing temperature is high.
Troubleshooting
▲ Lower the fusing temperature in SVC mode until the problem disappears. The default value is 10, and it is
recommended to change the value up to 8.
1218 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
How to change the plain temperature offset
a. Enter SVC mode, and select Engine NVM Rear/Write.
b. Select the Plain Temperature offset menu.
c. Press the OK button after adjusting the value. (1 = 2℃)
d. Press the Home button to exit SVC mode.
Error “fusing unit not compatible” problem
● Symptom: Error Fusing unit not compatible message appears.
● Cause: Harness for EEPROM signal is damaged by the sharp edge of the fuser frame.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1219
Troubleshooting
▲ Check if the EEPROM signal harness is damaged.
If so, replace the fuser unit (from 2015.08.11 the new part was applied) or insulate the damaged spot of
harness by wrapping each harness up.
NOTE: The pre-existing AT tape might need to be removed, and then re-apply the insulation for each
damaged harness.
NOTE: New design was applied from 2015.08.11 which doesn’t have the sharp edge on the harness path
Scanner and Flow ADF problems
● Noise of Flow ADF hinge/crack of Flow ADF/Flow ADF does not stay open
● Flow ADF is not recognized
● During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occurs
Noise of Flow ADF hinge/crack of Flow ADF/Flow ADF does not stay open
Symptom
● A noise comes from the Flow ADF hinges when it is opened or closed.
● The Flow ADF hinge is cracked.
● When the Flow ADF is opened to access the scanner glass, the unit should remain at a 50° angle (±10°).
The Flow ADF does not remain open as expected.
1220 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Troubleshooting
1. Remove the Flow ADF connector cover.
2. Remove the connector and one screw.
3. Lift and remove the Flow ADF unit.
4. Remove four screws from the hinge unit. Remove and replace the hinge unit.
5. Reassemble the Flow ADF.
Flow ADF is not recognized
Symptom
● The Flow ADF installation is not recognized.
Cause
● The Flow ADF power cable fails.
Troubleshooting
1. Reassemble the Flow ADF power cable. If the problem is not resolved, replace the power cable.
2. Adjust the harness and fix it with a cable tie.
During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occurs
Symptom
● During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occurs.
Troubleshooting
1. Check if the Sponge-Damper Separation has changed position.
2. If yes, refer to following guide.
a. Remove three screws.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1221
b. Remove the linker by pressing its upper side from an inner direction. Then remove the front cover.
c. Remove four screws.
d. Remove the pickup assembly.
1222 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
e. Replace the Flow ADF housing separation.
Drive unit problem
● Machine makes noise during print job
Machine makes noise during print job
Symptom
● Machine makes noise during a print job.
Cause
● The gear train needs to be greased.
● An old type gear is assembled.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode.
2. Execute a fuser motor test.
Service Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Fuser Motor Forward
3. Remove the fuser unit and execute the fuser motor test again.
4. If the printer still makes a noise during a print job, replace the fuser drive exit assembly.
5. If the problem is not resolved, replace the fuser unit.
Feeding system problem
● Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper
● Printer cannot feed paper
● Envelope wrinkle
Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper
Symptom
● Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1223
Cause
● Bad harness connection on the main board.
● Connector defect of the main board.
Troubleshooting
1. Check the harness connection. Reconnect the harness if it is not connected correctly.
2. Check the pickup connector on the main board.
If the connector has a problem with the soldering, replace the main board.
Printer cannot feed paper
Symptom
● The printer cannot feed paper from Tray 2 or Tray 3.
Cause
● Feed motor problem
● Feed motor connection problem
● Main board defect
Troubleshooting
● Check the feed motor operation.
– Open the right door and push the cover switch forcibly.
– Enter service mode.
– Select the following menu items:
EDC Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routine > Feed motor > On/Off
Check the operating status of the two feed rollers.
– If the feed rollers cannot rotate, open the rear cover and check the motor and gears.
● Check the connection between the main board and the feed motor.
● If the problem persists, replace the main board.
Envelope wrinkle
Symptom
● Envelope is wrinkled when printed from Tray 1.
1224 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode.
2. Select Envelope Rotate. (Service Functions > Envelope Rotate)
3. Select a menu item: Off, 90 degrees, or 180 degrees.
Laser scanner assembly problem
● Laser scanner assembly
Laser scanner assembly
Symptom
● The laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise while in printing mode.
Cause
● The laser scanner assembly motor is defective.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode and execute the laser scanner assembly motor test.
2. If the laser scanner assembly motor running sound is loud, replace the laser scanner assembly.
3. If the laser scanner assembly motor running sound is not loud, check the other unit.
Electrical circuit problem
● LVPS output voltage drop error
● Hard disk drive (HDD) makes a loud noise
● Networking not function
● Control panel malfunction
● Home screen icon is missing or control panel is broken
LVPS output voltage drop error
Symptom
● An error message occurs on the control panel (C3–1312, S3–3121, M1–4111, M1–4211).
Cause
● 24V channel output voltage drops to under 21.6V and 5V channel output is normal.
Troubleshooting
1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) to determine if 24V voltage comes out.
2. If 24V voltage does not come out, check 24V on/off signal pin on the main board.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1225
a. The voltage at 24V on/off signal pin is 0V. → Main board and signal is normal.
b. The voltage at signal pin is 4~5.3V → Main board and signal is abnormal
3. If Main board and signal is normal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check other parts (such as the
fuser, motor, scanner harness, and so on) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the LVPS.
4. If Main board and signal is normal and just one or two or three 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect
some harness from abnormal 24V output channel before replacing the LVPS.
5. If Main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness,
connector and main board.
Hard disk drive (HDD) makes a loud noise
Symptom
● The Hard disk drive (HDD) makes a loud noise.
Cause
● The HDD has defects.
Troubleshooting
● Replace the HDD.
Networking not function
Symptom
● Network is not functioning.
Cause
● Network line itself is not working properly.
● Network configuration is wrong.
● Some related electronic components in the main board have defects.
Troubleshooting
1. Connect a network line to the PC and complete a ping test.
2. Complete a ping test after connecting the network line to the SET. If the connection is working, check the
network configuration which might have been set incorrectly.
3. If the ping test does not have a result, open the rear cover and check the main board for visible defects on
the network related components such as the connector (CN16), capacitor (C192), and other close
components. Surge voltage from the outside can cause defects.
4. If any of the components have visible defects, then replace the main board.
1226 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Control panel malfunction
Symptom
● When touching a button, another button is pressed. For example, when touching the Home button, another
menu is executed, or when touching the "5" button, other items are entered, such as "4," "6," "cos," etc.
Cause
● Touch IC is influenced by the interference between TX frequency and power noise frequency.
Troubleshooting
1. If the power cable is connected to the multi-tap, unplug and plug it into an independent outlet.
2. If the touch malfunction persists, check the following:
– Press the power button until a pop-up window displays.
– Press and hold inside of the pop-up window area, avoiding the Cancel and Turn Off buttons, until the
password window appears.
– Enter 8378 and press Done.
– Select Utilities.
– Change the Touch Config value:
○ After changing Touch Config value, select Home.
○ Priority: 1.(default) → 4. 401K_500K → 5. 500K_599K → 3. 148K_290K → 2. 86K_216K
– Check the touch operation.
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 1227
○ If the touch malfunction persists, change Touch Config to another value and test the touch
operation again.
Home screen icon is missing or control panel is broken
Symptom
● Home screen icon is missing or the control panel screen is broken.
Cause
● UI software error.
Troubleshooting
● Enter service mode.
● Execute Main Memory Clear (Service Functions > Main Memory Clear)
1228 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models)
1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.
Figure 3-52 Open ADF and loosen screws
2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.
Figure 3-53 Adjust ADF hinge
a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
ENWW Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models) 1229
Figure 3-54 Adjust hinge
b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow. (1
scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
Figure 3-55 Adjust hinge
3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass. Close the ADF
unit to attach the sponge.
1230 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew
1. Open the Flow ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.
2. Adjust the position of the Flow ADF hinge according to the skew status.
a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
ENWW Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1231
b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow. (1
scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
1232 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
3. Detach the Flow ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the Flow ADF sponge on the scanner glass.
Close the Flow ADF unit to attach the sponge.
ENWW Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1233
1234 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW
4 Connection diagrams
● Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)
● Connection Diagram (Scanner)
● Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)
● Connection Diagram (Side/Tray 1/Feed/Registration/Pickup)
● Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
● Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
ENWW 1235
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)
HDD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
SATA SIGNA L
SATA PO W ER
CN 22-SATA PO W ER
CN 19-SATA SIGN AL
SATA_RX_N
SATA_RX_P
SATA_TX_P
SATA_TX_N
5V2_SATA
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
EXIT/DU PLEX
I.5m m / 14*2P
Color
CN 33 EXIT/DU PLEX
4 1 14 1 A_DU P_RET TO NER CRUM
DU P_RET 3 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET 1.5mm / 17*1P
M OT STEP 2 3 12 3 nB_DU P_RET CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02261A JC39-02214A
1 4 11 4 B_DU P_RET 3.3V_CRUM 1 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
5 10 5 A_DU PLEX1 3 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M K
4 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K
3 6 9 6 nA_DUPLEX1 DGN D 4 2 4 1 4 1
DUP1 M O T STEP 2 7 8 7 nB_DU PLEX1 1 5
1 8 7 8 B_DU PLEX1
JC39-02214A
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
3 9 6 9 R_5V_PS SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
D up RETU RN 10 5 10 DGND 7 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M C
2 SCL_CRUM_ TB_C
SEN 11 4 11 nSEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN DGN D 8 2 4 1 4 1
1
1 5
2 12 3 12 DGND
EXIT TEM P
1 13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP 9
JC39-02214A 4 1 4
3.3V_CRUM 5 1
SDA_CRUM_ TB_M 10 4 2 3 2 3
14 1 14 NC SCL_CRUM_ TB_M 11 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M M
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 3
DGN D 12 2 4 1 4 1
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS 1 5
BIN FU LL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 3.3V_CRUM 13 1
JC39-02214A
5 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14 4 2 3 2 3
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M Y
BIN FU LL2 2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND DGN D 16 2 4 1 4 1
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT2 1 5
NC 17
JC39-02190A
7 8 21 R_5V_PS
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
Mono
TO NER CRUM
3 10 5 24 24V4 1.5mm / 17*1P
EXIT GATE
SO L
SO LEN O ID 2 CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02237A 5
1 11 4 25 EN _EXIT_SO L 3.3V_CRUM 1 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
12 3 26 R_5V_PS 3 3 2 3 2 BTL CRU M
3 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K 3
D UP 13 2 27 DGND 4 2 4 1 4 1
2 DGN D
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSEN SE_JAM_ DU PLEX1 1 5
1
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
FU SER DRIVE 3 2 3 2 DEVE CRU M
SCL_CRUM_ TB_C 7 3
1.5mm / 16*2P 8 2 4 1 4 1
DGN D
1 5
JC39-02195A CN 30 FU SER DRIVE
10 1 R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 9
9 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER 5V_PS 10 2 1 ERASER LED
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_FU SER M_ O N _ERASER 11 1 2
7 4 nEN_BLDC_FU SER
FU SER BLDC
6 12
BLDC 5
5 NC
6 R_DGND
DGN D
3.3V_CRUM 13
4 7 DG ND SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14
3 8 DG ND SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15
2 9 24V2_SW DGN D 16
1 10 24V2_SW NC 17
3 11 FAN_FUSER_O UT
FUSER OU T 2 12 FB_OUT_FAN _FUSER_OUT
FAN 1 13 DG ND
SIDE CO M 1 3 14 DG ND
Color
2 2 TO N ER RESERVOIR
COVER OPEN N .O . 15 CO VER_O PEN _SIDE
3 1 I.5mm / 11*2P
N .C. 16 nCO VER_O PEN_SIDE
CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02257A
4 17 A_FUSER_REL A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
TO N ER
3 18 nA_FUSER_REL nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
FU SER REL M O T STEP 2 19 nB_FU SER_REL nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
SU PP
M O T_KC
1 20 B_FU SER_REL B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1
3 3
1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1 R_5V_PS 5 TN R LO CK
2 2
EXIT FAN 1 2 8 22 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT1 DGN D 6 SEN S_KC
1 1
3 7 23 DG ND nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7
3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2 A_RES_KC 8 4
EXIT FAN 2 2 5 5 25 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT2 nA_RES_KC 9 3 RESERVO IR
1 6 4 26 DG ND nB_RES_KC 10 2 M O T_KC
JC39-02191A B_RES_KC 11 1
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT3 A_TNR_SU P_M Y 12 4
29 DG ND TO N ER
1 9 1 nA_TNR_SUP_M Y 13 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_MY 14 2
30 R_5V_PS M O T_M Y
3 3 B_TN R_SU P_M Y 15 1
Fuser 2 31 DG ND
2
POSI 1 32 nSENS_FU SER_PO S1 R_5V_PS 16 3
1 RES LO CK
DGN D 17 2
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_MY 18 1 SEN S_M Y
FU SER DRAWE R
A_RES_MY 19 4
I.5m m / 9*2P
JC39-02218A JC39-02217A nA_RES_M Y 20 3 RESERVO IR
CN 40 FUSER DRAW ER nB_RES_M Y 21 2 M O T_M Y
1 11 1 DGND B_RES_M Y 22 1
FU SER N C TH ERM
CEN TER
3
2
1
2
3
4
10
9
8
2
3
4
DGND
N C_C_TD
N C_C_TC
Mono
TO N ER RESERVOIR
I.5mm / 11*2P
3 5 7 5 DGN D CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck
N C TH ERM JC39-02242A
2 6 6 6 N C_S_TD A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
SIDE TO NER
1 7 5 7 N C_S_TC nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M OT
8 4 8 nDETECT_FU SER B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1
9 3 5 3
R_5V_PS TN R LO CK
10 2 6 2
DGN D SEN S
11 1 1
21P-RW ZV-K4GG -P4
21R-RW ZV-K2G G-P4
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7
JC39-02243A
A_RES_KC 8 7 1 4
JST
JST
nA_RES_KC 9 6 2 3 RESERVO IR
6 1 10 9 R_5V_PS 10
nB_RES_KC 5 3 2 M OT
5 2 9 10 3.3V_CRUM 11
B_RES_KC 4 4 1
4 3 8 11 ADC_CU RL_TEST
3 7 3 5 3
4 12 DGND RES FU LL
FUSER 2 6 2 6 2
5 13 SDA2_FU SER SEN S
EEPRO M 1 5 1 7 1
6 14 SCL2_FU SER
7 4 15 THERM_ REAR1
8 3 16 THERM_ REAR2
JC39-02244A 4
DGN D 12 4 1
M_ TC_VIN _K 13 3 2 3 TC
9 2 17 THERM_ FRO N T1 14 2 3 2 SENSO R
24V1_TC
10 1 18 THERM_ FRO N T2 15 1 4 1
M_ TN R_VCON _K
R_5V_PS 16
DGN D 17
nSEN SE_RES_FULL 18
A_RES_MY 19
nA_RES_M Y 20
nB_RES_M Y 21
To FDB B_RES_M Y 22
1236 Chapter 4 Connection diagrams ENWW
Connection Diagram (Scanner)
???
CN 55 ???
1 3.3V_MICOM
2 PA30|SWCLK
3 PA31|SWDIO
4 DGND
5 nRST_XMEGA
FLOW DOCUMENT FEEDER
-1.5mm /17*2P
CN 42 ADF
M S1_STEP_SCAN 1
CUR_STEP_SCAN 2
DIR_STEP_SCAN 3
nEN _STEP_SCAN 4
PLS_STEP_SCAN 5
PW M _W LED 6
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 2 7
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 1 8
??? nSEN SE_SCAN _HO M E 9
-1.5mm /6*1P nSEN SE_APS2 10
nSEN SE_APS1 11
CN 51 ??? nDETECT_RSDF 12
6 1 6 1 DG N D nSENSE_PAPER_RADF 13
5 2 5 2 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R1 nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_1 14
4 3 4 3 5V_PS TXD_ADF 15
3 4 3 4 DG N D RXD_ADF 16
2 5 2 5 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R2 nRST_RSDF 17
1 6 1 6 5V_PS nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_2 18
DGN D 19
DGN D 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
3.3V_SCAN 23
DGN D 24
5V_W KUP 25
DGN D 26
5V_SCAN 27
5V_SCAN 28
DGN D 29
24V_SCAN 30
24V_SCAN 31
24V_SCAN 32
24V_SCAN 33
M S2_STEP_SCAN 34
DCIS
40P FFC
CN 43 DCIS
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_P 1
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_N 2
DGN D 3
LVDO _DCIS_4_P 4
LVDO _DCIS_4_N 5
DGN D 6
LVDO _DCIS_3_P 7
LVDO _DCIS_3_N 8
DGN D 9
LVDO _DCIS_2_P 10
LVDO _DCIS_2_N 11
DGN D 12
RX_CLK_DCIS_P 13
RX_CLK_DCIS_N 14
DGN D 15
LVDO _DCIS_1_P 16
DCIS
LVDO _DCIS_1_N 17
DGN D 18
ADF
LVDO _DCIS_0_P 19
LVDO _DCIS_0_N 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
SDI_DCIS 23
SCLK_DCIS 24
ScannerUnit
SDO _DCIS 25
SLO AD_DCIS 26
DGN D 27
DGN D 28
PI_SH_DCIS 29
DGN D 30
3.3V_SCAN 31
3.3V_SCAN 32
3.3V_SCAN 33
3.3V_SCAN 34
3.3V_SCAN 35
3.3V_SCAN 36
3.3V_SCAN 37
3.3V_SCAN 38
DGN D 39
DGN D 40
CCDM
BBP 50P FFC
50P
CN 41 BBP CN 44 CCDM
1 5V DGN D 1
2 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX1 CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ P 2
3 EN _M P_CLU TCH CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ N 3
4 N EN_STEP_FU SER_REL DGN D 4
5 CO VER_OPEN _SIDE SLO AD_CCDM 5
6 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SCLK_CCDM 6
7 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_KC SDI_CCDM 7
8 EN _EXIT_SO L DGN D 8
9 N EN_STEP_DUP_RET PITG_CCDM 9
10 NSENSE_T1_PO S nRST_AFE 10
11 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SDO _CCDM 11
12 PW M _M P_SO L DGN D 12
13 CLK_BLDC_FU SER LVDO _CCDM _4_N 13
14 N EN_BLDC_FUSER LVDO _CCDM _4_P 14
15 CO VER_OPEN _FRO N T DGN D 15
16 N SEN SE_P_EM PTY2 LVDO _CCDM _3_N 16
17 PLS_STEP_T1 LVDO _CCDM _3_P 17
18 N EN_STEP_T1 DGN D 18
19 nEN_STEP_FEED RX_CLK_CCDM _N 19
20 NSENSE_FUSER_PO S1 RX_CLK_CCDM _P 20
21 nEN_STEP_REGI DGN D 21
22 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _2_N 22
23 nSEN SE_CU RL1 LVDO _CCDM _2_P 23
24 N SEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 DGN D 24
25 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_M Y LVDO _CCDM _1_N 25
26 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX2 LVDO _CCDM _1_P 26
27 PLS_STEP_DU P_RET DGN D 27
28 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _0_N 28
29 N SEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN LVDO _CCDM _0_P 29
30 N SEN SE_P_REGI DGN D 30
31 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX2 3.3V_SCAN 31
32 PLS_STEP_FEED 3.3V_SCAN 32
33 PLS_STEP_PICKU P1 3.3V_SCAN 33
34 PLS_STEP_PICKU P2 3.3V_SCAN 34
35 PLS_STEP_REG I 3.3V_SCAN 35
36 nSEN SE_CU RL2 3.3V_SCAN 36
37 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED1 3.3V_SCAN 37
38 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED2 3.3V_SCAN 38
39 N SEN SE_P_FEED DGN D 39
40 N SEN SE_P_FU SER_O UT DGN D 40
41 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX2 5V_SCAN 41
42 N EN_STEP_PICKU P1 5V_SCAN 42
43 N EN_STEP_PICKU P2 5V_SCAN 43
44 ADC_FB_FR 5V_SCAN 44
45 ADC_FB_REGI DGN D 45
46 ADC_FB_FEED DGN D 46
47 FB_DU P2 10V_CCD 47
48 FB_PU1 10V_CCD 48
49 FB_PU2 10V_CCD 49
50 DGN D 10V_CCD 50
BBP
16P
CN 54 BBP
1 5V
2 N EN_BLDC_O PC_K
3 N READY_BLDC_O PC_K
4 N EN_BLDC_O PC_C
5 N READY_BLDC_O PC_C
6 N EN_BLDC_O PC_M
7 N READY_BLDC_O PC_M
8 N EN_BLDC_O PC_Y
9 N READY_BLDC_O PC_Y
10 NSEN SE_SHUT_ACR
11 NREADY_BLDC_FU SER
12 N EN_STEP_RES_KC
13 DIR_STEP_RES_KC
14 N EN_STEP_RES_M Y
15 DIR_STEP_RES_M Y
16 DGN D
ENWW Connection Diagram (Scanner) 1237
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)
SPEAKER
HUB
FDIJOINT
-1.5m m / 11P
CN20 FDIJO INT
DGND 1
DGND 2
3.3VSUSP 3
5V_SUSP 4
nDETECT_FDI 5
NOT_READY_FDI 6
EN_COPY_EXIT_FDI 7
nEN_COPY_CNT_FDI 8
nDETECT_PSIZE_FDI 9
nDETECT_COLOR_DFI 10
nEN_FDI 11
N/W RJ45
CN1 NETW ORK 1
TD+ 2
TD- 3
RD+ 4
TERM1
Color Only LSU SIGNAL M Y 5
TERM2 6
50FFC RD- 7
CN25 LSU SIGNAL TERM3 8
MY TERM4 9
1 DGND GREEN- 10
2 PW M _LD_POW ER_M GREEN+ 11 NTWORK
3 DGND YELLOW - 12
4 nHSYNC_M _DP YELLOW +
5 nHSYNC_M _DN
6 DGND
7 nVDO_M _B1_DP
USB
8 nVDO_M _B1_DN
9 DGND CN14 USB 1
10 nSH_M1 USB3D_VBUS 2
11 nSH_M2 USB3D_DN 3
12 DGND USB3D_DP 4
13 VDO_M _B2_DP DGND 5
14 nVDO_M _B2_DN USB3D_PXN 6
15 DGND USB3D_PXP 7
16 nVDO_M _B3_DP DGND 8
17 nVDO_M _B3_DN USB3D_RXN 9
18 DGND USB3D_RXP
19 nSH_M3
20 nSH_M4
21 DGND PC
22 nVDO_M _B4_DP
23 nVDO_M _B4_DN USB HOST Ch2
24 DGND
25 CN17 USB HOST Ch2 1
nLDON_LSU_M
26 USB3H_VBUS_REAR2 2
nLDON_LSU_Y
27 USB3H_REAR2_DN 3
DGND
28 USB3H_REAR2_DP 4
nHSYNC_Y_DP
29 DGND 5
nHSYNC_Y_DN
30 USB3H_REAR2_RXN 6
DGND
31 USB3H_REAR2_RXP 7
nVDO_Y_B1_DP
32 DGND 8
VDO_Y_B1_DN
33 USB3H_REAR2_TXN 9
DGND
34 USB3H_REAR2_TXP
nSH_Y1
35 nSH_Y2
36 DGND
EXT.DRIVE
37 nVDO_Y_B2_DP
38 nVDO_Y_B2_DN USB HOST Ch1
39 DGND
40 nVDO_Y_B3_DP CN16 USB HOST Ch1 1
41 nVDO_Y_B3_DN USB3H_VBUS_REAR1 2
42 DGND USB3H_REAR1_DN 3
43 nSH_Y3 USB3H_REAR1_DP 4
44 nSH_Y4 DGND 5
45 DGND USB3H_REAR1_RXN 6
46 nVDO_Y_B4_DP USB3H_REAR1_RXP 7
47 nVDO_Y_B4_DN DGND 8
48 DGND USB3H_REAR1_TXN 9
LASER SCANNER 49
50
PW M _LD_POW ER_Y
DGND
USB3H_REAR1_TXP
ASSEMBLY CARD READER
(COLR) LSU SIGNAL KC
60FFC
CN2 LSU SIGNALKC
1 DGND
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 DGND
Mono Only
5 DGND
6 DGND LSU
7 DGND 40FFC
8 DGND
9 DGND CN28 LSU
10 PW M _LD_POW ER_C DGND 1
11 DGND NC 2
12 nVDO_C_B4_DN 24V3 3
13 nVDO_C_B4_DP 24V3 4
14 DGND NC 5
15 nSH_C4 DGND 6
16 nSH_C3 nSTART_LSU_M OT 7
17 DGND nREADY_LSU 8
18 nVDO_C_B3_DN CLK_LSU_M OT 9
19 nVDO_C_B3_DP 5V_LSU 10
20 DGND 5V_LSU 11
21 nVDO_C_B2_DN DGND 12
22
23
nVDO_C_B2_DP
DGND
PW M _LD_POW ER_K
DGND
13
14 LASER SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
24 nSH_C2 nHSYNC_K_DP 15
25 nSH_C1 nHSYNC_K_DN 16
26 17
(MONO)
DGND DGND
27 nVDO_C_B1_DN nVDO_K_B1_DP 18
28 nVDO_C_B1_DP nVDO_K_B1_DN 19
29 DGND DGND 20
30 nHSYNC_C_DN nSH_K1 21
31 nHSYNC_C_DP nSH_K2 22
32 DGND DGND 23
33 nLDON_LSU_C nVDO_K_B2_DP 24
34 nLDON_LSU_K nVDO_K_B2_DN 25
35 DGND DGND 26
36 nVDO_K_B4_DN nVDO_K_B3_DP 27
37 nVDO_K_B4_DP nVDO_K_B3_DN 28
38 DGND DGND 29
39 nSH_K4 nSH_K3 30
40 nSH_K3 nSH_K4 31
41 DGND DGND 32
42 nVDO_K_B3_DN nVDO_K_B4_DP 33
43 nVDO_K_B3_DP nVDO_K_B4_DN 34
44 DGND DGND 35
45 nVDO_K_B2_DN nLDON_LSU_K 36
46 nVDO_K_B2_DP DGND 37
47 DGND DGND 38
48 nSH_K2 DGND 39
49 nSH_K1 CON_DETECT_LSU 40
50 DGND
51 nVDO_K_B1_DN
52 nVDO_K_B1_DP
53 DGND
54 nHSYNC_K_DN
55 nHSYNC_K_DP
56 DGND
57 PW M _LD_POW ER_K
58 DGND
59 ADC_LSU_TEMP
60 CON_DETECT_LSU
1238 Chapter 4 Connection diagrams ENWW
Connection Diagram (Side/Tray 1/Feed/Registration/Pickup)
Color Only REAR/FRONT/LED
I.5m m /10*2P TB CRUM
1.5m m /8*1P Color
JC39-02229A JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED
1 1 15 1 ACR_REAR CN48 TB CRUM
LEFT 2 2 14 2 5VA ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
ACR 3 3 13 3 DGND 5VA 2
REAR 4 4 12 4 NC DGND 3
5 5 11 5 PW M _ACR_LED_REAR ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4
JC39-02239A JC39-02258A
1 6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P R_5V_PS 5 1 3 3
2 2 T1 POSI
RIGHT 2 7 9 7 5VA DGND 6 2
3 1 SENSOR
ACR 3 8 8 8 DGND SENS_T1_POS 7 1
FRONT 4 9 7 9 NC
5 10 6 10 PW M _ACR_LED_FRONT DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 PAPER REGI
2
5V_PS 10 SENSOR
1 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
2 12 4 12 5VA
CENTER
3 13 3 13 DGND
CTD
Mono
4 14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S TB CRUM
5 15 1 15 PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 1.5m m /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM
ACR SHUTTER 2 1 5 16 DGND ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 JC39-02236A 7 1 JC39-02235A 1
M OT DC 1 2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1 6 2
5VA 2 2
JC39-02220A DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
3 3 3 18 R_5V_PS 4 4
ACR SHUTTER ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4
2 4 2 19 DGND 3 5
SENS PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 5 5
1 5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEM P 7 1 7 1 TEM P
PICKUP 8
DGND 3 1 3
9 PAPER REGI
nSENSE_P_REGI 2 2 2
10 SENSOR
CN49 PICKUP 5V_PS 1 3 1
JC39-02234A 1 JC39-02204A
3 1 9 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EM PTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EM PTY1
JC39-02201A 4 m icroSD SOCKET
3 4 6 R_5V_PS
2 5 5 5 DGND
PAPER_LIFT1 CN12 microSD SOCKET
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1 1
DATA2_SD
2
3 7 3 7 DGND DATA3_SD
3
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1 CM D_SD
4
1 9 1 9 5V_PS 3.3V
5
CLK_SD
6
4 10 A_PICKUP1 DGND
7
3 11 nA_PICKUP1 DATA0_SD
PICKUP1 8
M OT STEP 2 12 nB_PICKUP1 DATA1_SD
9
1 13 B_PICKUP1 DGND
10
DGND
11
3 14 R_5V_PS DGND
1 10 12
2 15 DGND DGND
PAPER_EM PTY2 2 9 13
1 16 nSENSE_P_EM PTY2 DGND
3 8 14
DGND
3
JC39-02202A 17 R_5V_PS
4 7
2 5 6 18 DGND M SOK
PAPER_LIFT2
1 6 5 19 nSENSE_C_LIFT2
CN21 M SOK
20 DGND 1
3 7 4 DGND
FEED2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2 2
2 8 3 SCK_M SOK
22 5V_PS 3
1 9 2 DGND
4
10 1 M SOI_M SOK
5
DGND
4 23 A_PICKUP2 6
nSS_M SOK
PICKUP2 3 24 nA_PICKUP2 7
M OT STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
DGND
M SIO_M SOK
8
1 26 B_PICKUP2 9
3_3V_PS
10
SCL0_M SOK
11
3_3V_PS
FEED_REGI 12
SDA0_M SOK
DEBUGGER M AIN
CN53 FEED_REGI
JC39-02336A -2.0mm /4*1P
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5 2 24V4 CN8 DEBUGGER M AIN
FEED M OT
STEP 3 4 3 nA_FEED 3.3V 1
4 3 4 nB_FEED RXD_M CB 2
HYBRID
5 2 5 24V4 TXD_M CB 3
6 1 6 B_FEED DGND 4
1 6 7 A_REGI DEBUGGER SCAN
2 5 8 24V1_SW -2.0mm /4*1P
REGIM OT
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
CN9 DEBUGGER SCAN
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 11 24V1_SW 3.3V 1
5 2 2
12 B_REGI RXD_SCB
6 1 3
TXD_SCB
M P CLUTCH DGND 4
1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
DEBUGGER ENGINE
-2.0mm /4*1P
SIDE /MP CN10 DEBUGGER
ENGINE
1.5m m /20*2P
3.3V 1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A CN32 SIDE / M P /PTB RXD_ENG 2
2 1 5 1 20 1 24V3 TXD_ENG 3
M P SO L
1 2 4 2 19 2 PW M _MP _SOL DGND 4
INNER
JC39-02210A ENGINE PANEL
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
-1.5m m /5*1P FINISHER
M P EM PTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EM PTY CN11 ENGINE PANEL
DGND 1
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS 5V_SUSP 2
M P PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_W IDTH RXD_ENG_PANEL 3
W IDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND R_5V_SUSP 4
JC39-02211A TXD_ENG_PANEL 5
3 4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
M P PAPER
2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH
1 6 1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH DUAL FAX
3 1 3 12 9 12 DGND CN24 DUALFAX
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8 13 nSENSE_P_FEED 5V_SUSP 1 FINISHER
14 5V_PS
1
JC39-02208A
3 1 14 7 DGND
3.3V
2
3
3K
4 15 6 15 A_DUPLEX2 3.3V 4
DUP2 3 16 5 16 nA_DUPLEX2 DGND 5
M OT STEP 2 17 4 17 nB_DUPLEX2 DGND 6
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2 CM L_M ODEM 1 7
3 CM L_M ODEM 2 8 *****-****/
19 2 19 NC AOUT0 9 M OLEX
20 1 20 NC AOUT1 10
nRST_M ODEM 1 11
JC39-02338A 1 6
JC39-02240A 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS nCTS_M ODEM 1 12
3 54679-1619/
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND nCTS_M ODEM 2 13
M OLEX
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1 nRTS_M ODEM 1 14
nRTS_M ODEM 2 15
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS DGND 16
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND nDETECT_MO DEM 1 17
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2 nDETECT_MO DEM 2 18
TXD_M ODEM1 19
4 7 4 TXD_M ODEM2 20
3 8 3 RXD_M ODEM1 21
PTB CRUM
Mono
2 9 2 RXD_M ODEM2 22
1 10 1 nRI_MOD EM _1 23
nRI_MOD EM _2 24
nINT_M ODEM _1 25
nINT_M ODEM _2 26
nDCD_M ODEM _1 27
PTB 4 1 7 27 DGND nDCD_M ODEM _2 28
7 14
W ASTE 3 2 6 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL nRST_M ODEM _2 29
8 13
FULL 2 3 5 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED DGND 30
9 12
1 4 4 30 R_5V_PS
10 11
11 10 31 3.3V_CRUM
JC39-02207A 12 9 32 SCL2_PTB
13 8 33 SDA2_PTB
14 7 34 DGND
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX 6 2
2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2 7 1
1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM _DUPLEX2
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 39 DGND
2 2 2 19 2
OUT 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
1 3 1 20 1
JC39-02209A
3 1 3
FAN
2 2 2
SIDE
1 3 1
To FDB
2-292246-2/
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A TYCO
3 1 6 1
CURL1 2 2 5 2
1 3 4 3
2-292249-2/
3 4 3 4 TYCO
CURL2 2 5 2 5
1 6 1 6
7
8 DCF
Color 9
10
LC T HCF
ENWW Connection Diagram (Side/Tray 1/Feed/Registration/Pickup) 1239
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
T1 /ERASER /OPC CRUM
-1.5mm /16*2P OPC HOM E
CN36 T1 / ERASER /
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM CN29 O PC HO M E
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
JC39-02240A
R_5V_PS 1 3
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K DGND 2 2
3 3 4 3
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_K 3 1
4 4 3 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4 SDA_CRUM _OPC_K
2 R_5V_PS 4 3
5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM _OPC_K
1 DGND 5 2
6 1 6 1 6 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_C 6 1
R_5V_PS 7 3
JC39-02256A DGND 8 2
1 1 6 1 6 7 5V_PS 9 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_M
2 2 5 2 5 8 ON_ERASER_C
3 3 4 3 R_5V_PS 10 3
4 4 3 4 4 9 3.3V_CRUM 11 2
DGND
3 10 SDA_CRUM _OPC_C 12 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_Y
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM _OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND
2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND OPC K
15 NC
16 NC CN29 OPC K JC39-02239A
JC39-02256A 1 10
DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 9
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS 2
CLK_BLDC_OPC_K 8
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M 3
nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 7
3 3 4 3 4
nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 6
5
4 4 3 4 4
3
19
20
3.3V_CRUM
SDA_CRUM _OPC_M
NC
6 5 BLDC
2 BRK_BLDC_OPC_K 4
5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM _OPC_M 7
1 DGND 3
6 1 6 1 22 DGND 8
DGND 2
9
DGND 1
10
DGND
11
JC39-02256A NC
12
1 1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3
4 4 3 4 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
3 26 SDA_CRUM _OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM _OPC_Y T/C SENSOR
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND -1.5m m /15*2P
CN34 T/C SENSOR
1 4 29 A_T1 DGND 1 JC39-02260A JC39-02259A
2 3 30 nA_T1 4 1 4
TC_VIN_K 2 3 2 3
3 2 31 nB_T1 3
24V1_TC 2 3 2
4 1 32 B_T1 4
TNR_VCON_K 1 4 1
DGND 5 4 1
JC39-02259A 4
TC_VIN_C 6 3 2 3
24V1_TC 7 2 3 2
TNR_VCON_C 8 1 4 1
R_5V_PS 9
12 1 3
DGND 10
11 2 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_K 11
10 3 1
R_5V_PS 12
9 4 3
DGND 13
BLDC OPC KCMY 8 5 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_C 14
7 6 1
JC39-02342A
CN47 BLDC OPC NC 15
6 7 3
JC39-02232A KCM Y 5 8 2
10 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 4 9 1
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 3 10 3
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 2 11 2
6 5 NC
BLDC 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
1 12 1
4 7 DGND DGND 16
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
3 8 DGND TC_VIN_M 17
3 2 3
2 9 24V1_SW 24V1_TC 18
2 3 2
1 10 24V1_SW TNR_VCON_M 19
1 4 1
10 11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C DGND 20
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
9 12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C TC_VIN_Y 21
3 2 3
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 24V1_TC 22
2 3 2
7 14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C TNR_VCON_Y 23
1 4 1
6 15 NC
BLDC 5 16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 24
4 17 DGND DGND 25
3 18 DGND nSENSE_FULL_RES_M 26
2 19 24V7
1 20 24V7 R_5V_PS 27
DGND 28
10 21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_FULL_RES_Y 29
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
8 23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M NC 30
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
6 25 NC
BLDC 5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
4 27 DGND
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7 HVPS2 /SKEW MO TOR
-1.5mm /12*2P
10 31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y CN4 HVPS2 / SKEW CN2
9 32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y M O TOR
33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
JC39-02228A 12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K
8 nEN_DEVE_AC_K 1 12
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_C 2 11 11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C
6 35 NC 10 10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M
BLDC 5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y
nEN_DEVE_AC_M
nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
3
4 9 9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
4 37 DGND ADC_READ_HVPS_24V 5 8 8 ADC_READ_HVPS_24V
3 38 DGND DGND 6 7 7 GND
2 39 24V5 DGND 7 6 6 GND
1 40 24V5 DGND 8 5 5 GND
3.3V_PS 9 4 4 3.3V
24V2_SW 10 3 3 24V
24V2_SW 11 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 12 1 1 24V
A_SKEW _Y 13 12
nA_SKEW _Y 14 11
B_SKEW _Y 15 10
nB_SKEW _Y 16 9
A_SKEW _M 17 8
nA_SKEW _M 18 7
B_SKEW _M 19 6
nB_SKEW _M 20 5
A_SKEW _C 21 4
nA_SKEW _C 22 3
B_SKEW _C 23 2
nB_SKEW _C 24 1
W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU
CN38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_ FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1
DGND 8 3 1 COM
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.
DGND 11 4 1 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1
R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 10 1 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9 2 1 2
R_5V_PS 20 8 3 3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02186A
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23 5 6 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 4 7 1 2
R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 1 10 1
NC 28
LSU PD /RESERVOIR SENSOR
-1.5m m /22*1P
CN26 LSU P M OTOR JC39-02231A
5V_LSU 1
5V_LSU 2
DGND 3
24V2 4
DGND 5
nSTART_LSU_M OT 6
nREADY_LSU 7
CLK_LSU_M OT 8
1240 Chapter 4 Connection diagrams ENWW
Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
M ono Only
HVPS(MONO)
HVPS
24FFC
HEATER SW ITCH
M AIN SW ITCH
CN31 HVPS
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
24V2_SW 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 3 3 24V
ADC_HVPS_24V 4 4 ADC_HVPS_24V
24V2_SW 5 5 24V
GND 6 6 GND
GND 7 7 GND
3.3V 8 8 3.3V
GND 9 9 GND
NC 10 10 NC
ADC_READ_M HV 11 11 ADC_READ_M HV
JC39-02197A
AC
PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid 12 12 PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid
JC39-02203A
PW M _M HV 13 13 PW M _M HV
PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid 14 14 PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid
9
3
C
J
1
2
0
-
A
7
ToFUSER
PW M _SAW 15 15 PW M _SAW
ADC_READ_THV 16 16 ADC_READ_THV
INLET
PW M _THV_N 17 17 PW M _THV_N
nEN_DEVE 18 18 nEN_DEVE
PW M _FUSER_BIAS 19 19 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _DEVE_DC 20 20 PW M _DEVE_DC
GND
PW M _THV_P 21 21 PW M _THV_P
PW M _DEVE_VPP 22 22 PW M _DEVE_VPP
JC39-02199A
PW M _DEVE_AC 23 23 PW M _DEVE_AC
GND 24 24 GND
JC39-02248A
4
3
2
1
HEATER SW ITCH
4
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
M AIN SW ITCH
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN10
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN5
NEUTRAL
LIVE
CN1
COM M ON
LAM P2
LAM P1
CN6
FUSER
DEVE HV M 2
INLET
JC39-02249A
To INPUT OPTION
THV M
JC39-02247A
SAW /M HV
CN2 1
1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL 2
M ono :SM PS TYPE3R
TYPE5 3
Color SM
INPUT OPTION
(OPTI
CN7 (Blue)
1 LIVE CN3
2 NEUTRAL
JC39-02246A
1 LIVE 1
O N/SCAN)
: PS TYPE4
FDB
2 NEUTRAL FUSER HV M 2
TYPE3R TYPE3R
DCF
JC39-02193A
CON1 CN8(Red)
LIVE 1 1 LIVE CN4
NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL 9
3
C
J
1
2
0
-
A
6
JC39-02196A
JC39-02192A
ColorOnly
HVPS
220V Only
35FFC
HVPS(COLOR)
CN11
CN3 HVPS
ON_FUSER_CENTER 1
1
REACTOR
1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
ON_FUSER_RELAY 5
nDETECT_HVPS
ON_SM PS_RELAY 7
FUSER_ON
24VS
RELAY_ON
24V_ON/OFF
GND
CON4
+24V3
GND
+24V2
GND
+24V1
GND
+5V
CON3
2
ON_FUSER_SIDE 2
PW M _D_AC_FREQ 2 2 PW M _D_AC_FREQ
TYPE3R S
ZERO_CROSS 10
SM PS TYPE 3R
M AIN IF
PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y 3 3 PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y
AC_SENSE 9
ADC_R_M HV_K 4 4 ADC_R_M HV_K
+24VS2 6
+24VS1 4
PW M _D_DC_Y 5 5 PW M _D_DC_Y
CN12
GND 8
GND 3
CN9
IGNAL
NC 6 6 NC
1
PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M 7 7 PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M
2
PW M _THV+_CC_SEL 8 8 PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PW M _D_DC_M 9 9 PW M _D_DC_M
JC27-00009A PW M _THV+CC_Hyb 10 10 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb
2
C
J
0
-
7
A
9 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C 11 11 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C
PW M _M HV_K 12 12 PW M _M HV_K
SM PS TYPE5 6*2P PW M _D_DC_C 13 13 PW M _D_DC_C
CN5 SM PS TYPE5 PW M _M HV_C 14 14 PW M _M HV_C
1 5V1 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K 15 15 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K
2 5V2 PW M _M HV_M 16 16 PW M _M HV_M
SM PS TYPE 5 PW M _D_DC_K 17 17 PW M _D_DC_K
TYPE5 3 24V1
4 24V2 PW M _M HV_Y 18 18 PW M _M HV_Y
CN3 JC39-02213A(C) ADC_R_THV2
CN1 +24V1 1 1
9
3
C
J
2
0
-
(
A
4
) M)
M
JC39-02344A(
5
6
24V3 ADC_R_THV2
ADC_R_M HV_C
19
20
19
20 ADC_R_M HV_C
1 LIVE 24V4 HV_OPC_Y
GND 2
JC39-02225A
7 DGND PW M _THV_2 21 21 PW M _THV_2
2 NEUTRAL +24V2 3
8 DGND ADC_R_M HV_M 22 22 ADC_R_M HV_M HV_OPC_M
GND 4 23 23 PW M _THV2_CLEAN
9 DGND PW M _THV2_CLEAN
+24V3 5 ADC_R_M HV_Y 24 24 ADC_R_M HV_Y
10 DGND HV_OPC_C
GND 6 25 25 PW M _SAW
11 DGND PW M _SAW
+24V4 7 26 26 ADC_R_ITHV_Y
12 DGND ADC_R_ITHV_Y HV_OPC_K
(M ain SYSTEM )
GND 8 27 27 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _FUSER_BIAS
SM PS TYPE5
SM PS TYPE3 4*2P ADC_R_ITHV_M 28 28 ADC_R_ITHV_M
ADC_R_IHTV_K 29 29 ADC_R_IHTV_K
TYPE5SIGNAL CN6 SM PS TYPE4
PW M _ITHV_Y 30 30 PW M _ITHV_Y
/ TYPE3R
CN4 JC39-02212A(C) 8 1 ADC_R_IHTV_C 31 31 ADC_R_IHTV_C
5V_OPT
JC39-02223A
HV_DEVE_Y
GND 1 1
3
C
J
2
0
-
9
A
4
) M)
M
(
JC39-02343A( 7 2 24V5 PW M _ITHV_M 32 32 PW M _ITHV_M
+24V_ON/OFF 2 6 3 PW M _ITHV_K 33 33 PW M _ITHV_K
24V6 HV_DEVE_M
GND 3 5 4 PW M _ITHV_C 34 34 PW M _ITHV_C
24V7
4 5 GND 35 35 GND
DGND HV_DEVE_C
3 6 DGND
SM PS TYPE 5 2 7 DGND
1 HV_DEVE_K
8 DGND
CN2
+5V1 1
GND 2
JC39-02226A
HV_T1_Y 1
+5V2 3 AC CTRL./FDB /PAPER 2
GND 4
DET 1.5m m /17*2P HV_T1_M 3
JC39-02221A(C) CN39 AC CTRL./ 4
1
J
-
9
3
C
2
0
M
(
A
) M)
JC39-02233A( FDB / PAPER DET HV_T1_C 5
9
3
C
J
1
2
0
-
A
6
JC39-02196A 6
17 1 ZEROCROSS
10 1 HV_T1_K 7
16 2 AC_SENS
9 2
15 3 DGND
8 3
14 4 ON_SM PS_RREAY
7 4
5 24V3
JC39-02227A
6 5 13
12 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY T2 HV
5 6
11 7 24VS_FUSER
4 7
10 8 DGND
3 8
9 9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
2 9
8 10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
1 10 1
3
2 11 11 EN_24V_ENGINE 2
7
12 DGND
JC39-02224A
1 12 6 HV_SAW
3
5
4
3
2 13 5 13 EN_24V_OPTION
1 14 4 14 DGND
3 15 3 15 FAN_SM PS
SM PS
FAN
2 16 2 16 FB_OUT_FAN_SM PS
1 17 1 17 DGND
4 18 nDETECT_CST1
PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2
3 19 DGND
2 20 ADC_P_SIZE1
1 21 DGND
4 22 nDETECT_CST2
3 23 DGND
2 24 ADC_P_SIZE2
1 25 1.8V_PS
3 26 FAN_DEVE
DEVE / OPC
2 27 FB_OUT_FAN_DEVE
FAN
1 28 DGND
4 29 ADC_OUT_TEM P
3 30 DGND
2 31 ADC_OUT_HUM I
1 32 3.3V_PS
OU T TEM P
/HUM ID
33 NC
34 NC
ENWW Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) 1241
1242 Chapter 4 Connection diagrams ENWW
5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker
● Product specification and description
● Service approach
● Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers)
● Problem solving
● Finisher system diagram
● Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher
ENWW 1243
Product specification and description
Finisher system
Finisher sectional view
Sensor location
Figure 5-1 Sensor locations
Table 5-1 Sensor locations
Item Name Item Name
1 Bridge Unit Entrance Sensor 10 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)
2 Bridge Unit Output Sensor 11 Feed Buffer Output Sensor
3 Feed Entrance Paper Sensor 12 Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor
4 Diverter Home Sensor 13 Stacker Full Sensor
1244 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-1 Sensor locations (continued)
Item Name Item Name
5 Feed Main Output Sensor 14 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)
6 Feed Top Output Sensor 15 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)
7 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector) 16 Fold Output Paper Sensor
8 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter) 17 Booklet Compile Paper Sensor
9 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)
Roller location
Figure 5-2 Roller location
Table 5-2 Roller location
Item Name Item Name
1 Top Output Roller 8 TB Entrance Roller
ENWW Product specification and description 1245
Table 5-2 Roller location (continued)
Item Name Item Name
2 Top Middle Roller 9 Feed Buffer Output Roller
3 Finisher Compile Output Roller 10 BM Compile Output Roller
4 Middle Roller 11 BM Folding Roller
5 Entrance Roller 12 BM C-Folding Roller
6 TB Output Roller 13 BM Folding Output Roller
7 TB Middle Roller
1246 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Jam removal guide
Figure 5-3 Jam removal guide
Table 5-3 Jam removal guide
Item Name Item Name
1 Top Door Guide 6 SD Jam Clear Cover
2 Bridge Unit Door 7 Booklet Feed Jam Clear Cover
3 Booklet Module 8 BM C-Folding Roller Knob
4 Middle Roller Knob 9 Booklet Lower Feed Jam Clear Cover
5 Feed Buffer Output Roller Knob
ENWW Product specification and description 1247
Paper path
Figure 5-4 Paper path
Table 5-4 Paper path
Item Name
1 Finisher Main Tray - Staple & Punch (Optional)
2 Finisher Top Tray - Punch (Optional)
3 Booklet Tray – Folding & Staple
1248 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Electrical parts layout
Finisher and booklet module
Figure 5-5 Electrical parts layout (1 of 2)
ENWW Product specification and description 1249
Figure 5-6 Electrical parts layout (2 of 2)
Table 5-5 Electrical parts layout
Item Part code Description Function
S1 Sensor-RP A Feed Entrance Paper Sensor
S2 Photo Sensor Feed Top Output Sensor
S3 Sensor-RP A Feed Main Output Sensor
S4 Sensor-RP A Feed Buffer Output Sensor
S5 Photo Sensor Diverter Home Sensor
S6 Photo Sensor Buffer Home Sensor
S7 Photo Sensor Rear Tamper Home Sensor
1250 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-5 Electrical parts layout (continued)
Item Part code Description Function
S8 Photo Sensor Front Tamper Home Sensor
S9 AS-Sensor EF Home Sensor
S10 Photo Sensor Main Paddle Home Sensor
S11 Photo Sensor Main Tray Front Level Sensor
S12 Photo Sensor Main Tray Rear Level Sensor
S13 Photo Sensor SCU Home Sensor
S14 AS-Sensor Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)
S15 AS-Sensor Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)
S16 Photo Sensor Main Tray Encoder Sensor
S17 Photo Sensor Offline Staple Position Sensor
S18 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Offline Sensor
S19 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Home Sensor
S20 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Mid-Rear Sensor
S21 Photo Sensor Stapler Move Mid-Front Sensor
S22 Photo Sensor Stacker Full Sensor
S23 AS-Sensor Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)
S24 AS-Sensor Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)
S25 Photo Sensor Grip Home Sensor
S26 Photo Sensor PE EJT Home Sensor
S27 Photo Sensor PE EJT Away Sensor
S28 Sensor-RP A Compile Paper Sensor
S29 Photo Sensor GE Encoder Sensor
S30 Photo Sensor PE Encoder Sensor
S31 Photo Sensor Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor
S32 Photo Sensor TE Presser Home Sensor
S33 Photo Sensor Blade Home Sensor
S34 Sensor-RP A Fold Output Paper Sensor
S35 Photo Sensor Separate Pawl Home Sensor
S36 Photo Sensor Guide Home Sensor
S37 Photo Sensor Booklet Paddle Home Sensor
S38 Photo Sensor Booklet Tamper Home Sensor
S39 Sensor-RP A Booklet Compile Paper Sensor
S40 Photo Sensor Stopper Home Sensor
ENWW Product specification and description 1251
Table 5-5 Electrical parts layout (continued)
Item Part code Description Function
S41 AS-Sensor Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector)
S42 AS-Sensor Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter)
SW1 Micro Switch Front Door I/L Switch
SW2 Micro Switch Top Door I/L Switch
SW3 Micro Switch Stacker Upper Limit Switch
P1 3K Main PCA Finisher Main PCA
P2 Switch PCA Offline Staple OP PCA
P3 Booklet PCA Booklet Main PCA
M1 Assembly, HB Motor Feed Entrance Motor
M2 Assembly, HB Motor Feed Output Motor
M3 Assembly, PM Motor Buffer Motor
M4 Assembly, PM Motor End Fence Motor
M5 Assembly, PM Motor Main Paddle Motor
M6 Assembly, PM Motor Front Tamper Motor
M7 Assembly, PM Motor Rear Tamper Motor
M8 AS-Motor DC Ejector Grip-Eject Motor
M9 AS-Motor DC Ejector Pre-Eject Motor
M10 Assembly, PM Motor SCU Motor
M11 Assembly, 3657 DC Motor Main Tray Moving Motor
M12 Assembly, HB Motor Stapler Move Motor
M13 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Feed Entrance Motor
M14 Assembly, PM Motor TE Presser Motor
M15 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Tamper Motor
M16 Assembly, PM Motor Stopper Moving Motor
M17 Assembly, PM Motor Separate Pawl Motor
M18 Motor BLDC-Main Folding Roller Motor
M19 Motor BLDC-Main Blade Motor
M20 Assembly, PM Motor C Fold Motor
M21 Assembly, PM Motor Booklet Paddle Motor
M22 Solenoid Stopper Solenoid
1252 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Bridge Unit
Figure 5-7 Bridge Unit
Table 5-6 Bridge Unit
Item Part code Description Function
M23 Assembly, HB Motor Bridge Unit
S43 Photo Sensor Bridge Unit Door Sensor
S44 Sensor-RP A Bridge Unit Entrance Sensor
S45 Photo Sensor Bridge Unit Output Sensor
Punch unit
Figure 5-8 Punch unit
Table 5-7 Punch unit
Item Part code Description Function
M24 AS-HB Motor Punch Scan Motor
ENWW Product specification and description 1253
Table 5-7 Punch unit (continued)
Item Part code Description Function
S46 AS-Sensor Punch Scan Home Motor
S47 AS-Sensor Hole Punch Hopper Sensor
P4 AS-PCB Punch Punch PCA
P5 AS-PCB Punch Sensor Punch Scan Sensor PCA
Each unit functions
Figure 5-9
Item Unit Function
1 Frame unit Finisher main frame and exterior.
2 Stapler unit Device used for putting staples in to sheets of paper.
1254 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
(continued)
Item Unit Function
3 Feed unit Transports the paper to the compile and eject unit.
4 Compile unit Compiles the paper.
5 Eject unit Transports the stacked paper to the tray.
6 Stacker unit Stacks the stapled papers on the tray.
7 Booklet unit Folds paper, completes stapling jobs, and transports paper to
the tray.
8 Bridge Unit Transports the paper from the main machine to the finisher
entrance.
9 Punch unit Device used for punching on the paper.
PCA connection information
Finisher PCA
Figure 5-10 Finisher PCA
Table 5-9 Finisher PCA
CN No. Connection CN No. Connection
CN1 PSU, ENGINE INTERFACE CN9 SAFETY SWITCH
CN2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH CN10 STAPLER
ENWW Product specification and description 1255
Table 5-9 Finisher PCA (continued)
CN No. Connection CN No. Connection
CN3 TOP DOOR SWITCH CN11 EJECTOR
CN4 FRONT PATH CN12 FRONT LOWER
CN5 FRONT COMPILE CN13 SCU
CN6 Bridge Unit CN14 STACKER
CN7 PUNCH CN15 BOOKLET
CN8 REAR UPPER CN16 LOG
Switch PCA
Figure 5-11 Switch PCA
Table 5-10 Switch PCA
CN No. Connection
CN1 Offline Staple LED and Button
Booklet maker PCA
Figure 5-12 Booklet maker PCA
CN No. Connection
CN1 Finisher interface
CN3 Log
1256 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
CN No. Connection
CN4 Stapler/Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor
CN5 Booklet Feed Entrance Motor/TE Presser Motor
CN6 Blade Home Sensor/Booklet Tamper Home Sensor/ Booklet Compile Paper Sensor
CN7 Booklet Paddle Motor/Separate Pawl Motor
CN8 Fold Output Paper Sensor/Guide Home Sensor/C Fold Motor
CN9 Stopper Solenoid/Stopper Moving Motor
CN10 Folding Roller Motor/Blade Motor
Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under the
weight of the product.
Precautions when replacing parts
Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the printer, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.
● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.
● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.
● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.
● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
Precautions when handling PCA
Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.
● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA
– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
● Precautions when replacing a PCA
ENWW Service approach 1257
– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.
– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.
● Precautions when checking a PCA
– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.
– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.
– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their
original positions.
– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.
Before performing service
● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.
● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.
1258 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
After performing service
● Plug in the power cable.
● Verify the functions of the printer that might have been impacted by service procedures. Make sure the
printer is in complete working order.
● Replace any accessories removed for service.
Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:
Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.
4. Print a configuration page.
5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.
6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Ordering
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
or
partsurfer.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the
HP SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
ENWW Service approach 1259
Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.
1260 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/
stacker and booklet finishers)
● ESD precautions
● Top output bin
● Right top cover
● Top cover
● Front door
● Rear cover
● Front cover
● Front lower cover
● Booklet tray
● Caster cover
● Lower shield assembly
● Upper shield assembly
● Controller PCA
● Stapler unit
● Dummy feed guide
● Top jam access cover
● Top lower feed assembly
● Ejector unit
● Front tamper unit
● Rear tamper unit
● Feed entrance motor (M1)
● Feed exit motor (M2)
● Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3)
● Front tamper motor (M6)
● Rear tamper motor (M7)
● SCU motor (M10)
● Main tray moving motor (M11)
● Booklet finisher front cover
● Booklet finisher
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1261
● Booklet finisher PCA
● Booklet finisher fold stopper unit
● Booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
● TE presser motor (M14)
● Stopper moving motor (M16)
● Separate pawl motor (M17)
● Folding roller motor (M18)
● Blade motor (M19)
● C fold motor (M20)
ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1262 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Top output bin
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the top output bin
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output bin on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC63-05002B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, M Tray
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1263
Step 1: Remove the top output bin
▲ Raise the end of the top output bin (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-13 Remove the top output bin
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1264 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Right top cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right top cover of the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01448B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher sub - Inlet guide
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1265
Step 1: Remove the right top cover
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-14 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
1266 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1267
Top cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01446B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, top
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
1268 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-15 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
Figure 5-16 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1269
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-17 Remove six screws
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-18 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1270 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1271
Front door
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01444A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher sub - door
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
1272 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-19 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1273
Figure 5-20 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-21 Remove six screws
1274 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-22 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-23 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1275
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-24 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-25 Release the lower hinge pin
1276 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-26 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-27 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1277
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1278 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Rear cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC63-04988B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, rear
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1279
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-28 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1280 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-29 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-30 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1281
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-31 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-32 Remove seven screws
1282 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-33 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1283
Front cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC63-04986B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover, front
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
1284 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-34 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1285
Figure 5-35 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-36 Remove six screws
1286 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-37 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-38 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1287
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-39 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-40 Release the lower hinge pin
1288 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-41 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-42 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1289
Figure 5-43 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-44 Remove one screw
1290 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-45 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1291
Front lower cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC63-04987B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Cover - tray booklet finisher
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
1292 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-46 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1293
Figure 5-47 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-48 Remove six screws
1294 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-49 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-50 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1295
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-51 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-52 Release the lower hinge pin
1296 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-53 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-54 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1297
Figure 5-55 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-56 Remove one screw
1298 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-57 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the front lower cover (finisher)
▲ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-58 Remove three screws and the front lower cover
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1299
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1300 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Booklet tray
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet tray
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tray on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC61-07253B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Tray - guide booklet finisher
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1301
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-59 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-60 Install the booklet tray
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1302 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1303
Caster cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only)
● Step 2: Remove the caster cover
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC63-04985B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Caster cover
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
1304 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 1: Remove the booklet tray (booklet finishers only)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-61 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-62 Install the booklet tray
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1305
Step 2: Remove the caster cover
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-63 Remove four screws
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-64 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
1306 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1307
Lower shield assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower shield assembly on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01417B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Lower shield assembly (finisher)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
1308 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-65 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1309
Figure 5-66 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-67 Remove six screws
1310 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-68 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-69 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1311
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-70 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-71 Release the lower hinge pin
1312 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-72 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-73 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1313
Figure 5-74 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-75 Remove one screw
1314 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-76 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-77 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1315
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-78 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-79 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
1316 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-80 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-81 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1317
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-82 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-83 Remove four screws
1318 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-84 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-85 Disconnect two connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1319
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-86 Locate sensors
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1320 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Upper shield assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the upper shield assembly on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01475A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher sub - shield
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1321
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-87 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1322 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-88 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-89 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1323
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-90 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-91 Lift the top hinge pin
1324 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-92 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-93 Release the lower hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1325
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-94 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-95 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
1326 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-96 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-97 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1327
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-98 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-99 Remove seven screws
1328 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-100 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-101 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1329
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-102 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-103 Remove four screws
1330 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-104 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-105 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1331
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-106 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-107 Disconnect two connectors
1332 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-108 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-109 Lower the output tray
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1333
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-110 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-111 Release the shield
1334 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-112 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-113 Locate sensors
Step 10: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1335
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1336 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Controller PCA
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the controller PCA
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the controller PCA on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC92-02790B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Controller PCA (finisher)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1337
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-114 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1338 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-115 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-116 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1339
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-117 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-118 Remove seven screws
1340 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-119 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the controller PCA
▲ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.
Reinstallation tip: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-120 Remove the controller PCA
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1341
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1342 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Stapler unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Remove the staple unit
● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the staple unit on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01412A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Staple Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1343
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Staple a document and verify that the stapler functions correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-121 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1344 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-122 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-123 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1345
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-124 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-125 Lift the top hinge pin
1346 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-126 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-127 Release the lower hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1347
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-128 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-129 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
1348 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-130 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-131 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1349
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-132 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-133 Remove seven screws
1350 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-134 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the staple unit
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.
Figure 5-135 Move the staple unit to the front
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1351
2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).
Figure 5-136 Remove the staple cartridge
3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-137 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
1352 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-138 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws
5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-139 Remove the staple unit
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1353
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1354 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Dummy feed guide
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01161A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Assy-Guide Dummy-Feed
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1355
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-140 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1356 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-141 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-142 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1357
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-143 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-144 Remove seven screws
1358 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-145 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)
▲ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-146 Remove two screws and the feed guide
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1359
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1360 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Top jam access cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor
● Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
● Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam access cover for the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01455A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Top Jam
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1361
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-147 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1362 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-148 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-149 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1363
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-150 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-151 Lift the top hinge pin
1364 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-152 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-153 Release the lower hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1365
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-154 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-155 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
1366 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-156 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-157 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1367
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-158 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-159 Remove seven screws
1368 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-160 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-161 Remove the feed exit motor
4
3
1
2
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1369
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-162 Remove two screws
2. Remove the top jam access cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-163 Remove the top jam access cover
Step 8: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1370 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1371
Top lower feed assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
● Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01454A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub-Top Lower
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
1372 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-164 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1373
Figure 5-165 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-166 Remove six screws
1374 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-167 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-168 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1375
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-169 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-170 Release the lower hinge pin
1376 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-171 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-172 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1377
Figure 5-173 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-174 Remove one screw
1378 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-175 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-176 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1379
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-177 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the feed exit motor (finisher)
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-178 Remove the feed exit motor
4
3
1
2
1380 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 7: Remove the top jam access cover
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-179 Remove two screws
2. Remove the top jam access cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-180 Remove the top jam access cover
Step 8: Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)
1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the buffer motor housing, and then tilt the
motor aside to access the screws under it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1381
Figure 5-181 Remove two screws
2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).
Figure 5-182 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector
1382 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-183 Remove three screws
4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.
Figure 5-184 Remove the feed assembly
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1383
5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-185 Locate sensors and connector
Step 9: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1384 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Ejector unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
● Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01409A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Ejector Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1385
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-186 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1386 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-187 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-188 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1387
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-189 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-190 Lift the top hinge pin
1388 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-191 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-192 Release the lower hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1389
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-193 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-194 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
1390 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-195 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-196 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1391
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-197 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-198 Remove seven screws
1392 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-199 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-200 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1393
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-201 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-202 Remove four screws
1394 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-203 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-204 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1395
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-205 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-206 Disconnect two connectors
1396 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-207 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-208 Lower the output tray
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1397
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-209 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-210 Release the shield
1398 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-211 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-212 Locate sensors
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1399
Figure 5-213 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-214 Disconnect three connectors
1400 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-215 Remove two screws
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-216 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1401
5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).
Figure 5-217 Rotate the sensor
1
3
6. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-218 Remove one screw
1402 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-219 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-220 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1403
9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-221 Remove one screw
10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-222 Remove the rear tamper shaft
1404 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-223 Disconnect one connector
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-224 Disconnect one connector
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1405
13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-225 Disconnect one connector
14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-226 Remove two screws
1406 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-227 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 5-228 Remove the ejector unit
1 2
3
17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1407
Figure 5-229 Reinstall the front tamper shaft
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
Figure 5-230 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft
Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1408 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1409
Front tamper unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
● Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit
● Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC82-00901A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Tamper Front
1410 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-231 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1411
Figure 5-232 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-233 Remove six screws
1412 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-234 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-235 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1413
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-236 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-237 Release the lower hinge pin
1414 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-238 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-239 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1415
Figure 5-240 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-241 Remove one screw
1416 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-242 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-243 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1417
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-244 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-245 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
1418 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-246 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-247 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1419
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-248 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-249 Remove four screws
1420 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-250 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-251 Disconnect two connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1421
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-252 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-253 Lower the output tray
1422 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-254 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-255 Release the shield
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1423
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-256 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-257 Locate sensors
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
1424 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-258 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-259 Disconnect three connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1425
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-260 Remove two screws
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-261 Remove one screw
1426 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).
Figure 5-262 Rotate the sensor
1
3
6. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-263 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1427
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-264 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-265 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws
1428 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-266 Remove one screw
10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-267 Remove the rear tamper shaft
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1429
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-268 Disconnect one connector
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-269 Disconnect one connector
1430 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-270 Disconnect one connector
14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-271 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1431
15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-272 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 5-273 Remove the ejector unit
1 2
3
17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
1432 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-274 Reinstall the front tamper shaft
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
Figure 5-275 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft
Step 11: Remove the front tamper unit
▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1433
Figure 5-276 Remove the front tamper
Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1434 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Rear tamper unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
● Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit
● Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC82-00898A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Tamper Rear
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1435
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-277 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1436 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-278 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-279 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1437
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-280 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-281 Lift the top hinge pin
1438 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-282 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-283 Release the lower hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1439
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-284 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-285 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
1440 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-286 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-287 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1441
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-288 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-289 Remove seven screws
1442 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-290 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-291 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1443
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-292 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-293 Remove four screws
1444 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-294 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-295 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1445
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-296 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-297 Disconnect two connectors
1446 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-298 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-299 Lower the output tray
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1447
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-300 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-301 Release the shield
1448 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-302 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-303 Locate sensors
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1449
Figure 5-304 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-305 Disconnect three connectors
1450 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-306 Remove two screws
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-307 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1451
5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).
Figure 5-308 Rotate the sensor
1
3
6. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-309 Remove one screw
1452 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-310 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-311 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1453
9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-312 Remove one screw
10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-313 Remove the rear tamper shaft
1454 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-314 Disconnect one connector
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-315 Disconnect one connector
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1455
13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-316 Disconnect one connector
14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-317 Remove two screws
1456 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-318 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 5-319 Remove the ejector unit
1 2
3
17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1457
Figure 5-320 Reinstall the front tamper shaft
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
Figure 5-321 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper unit
▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1458 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-322 Remove the rear tamper
Step 12: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1459
Feed entrance motor (M1)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1)
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed entrance motor on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC31-00163B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
1460 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-323 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1461
Figure 5-324 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-325 Remove six screws
1462 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-326 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-327 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1463
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-328 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the feed entrance motor (M1)
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed entrance motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-329 Remove the feed entrance motor
3 4
1
2
1464 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1465
Feed exit motor (M2)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2)
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the feed exit motor on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC31-00163B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
1466 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-330 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1467
Figure 5-331 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-332 Remove six screws
1468 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-333 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-334 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1469
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-335 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the feed exit motor (M2)
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the feed exit motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when
reinstalling the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-336 Remove the feed exit motor
4
3
1
2
1470 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1471
Buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor, gear, and sensor on the
finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01453A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher sub - drive buffer
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
1472 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-337 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1473
Figure 5-338 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-339 Remove six screws
1474 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-340 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-341 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1475
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-342 Remove one screw
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-343 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 4: Remove the buffer motor, gear, and sensor
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
1476 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-344 Disconnect two connectors and remove two screws
2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft.
Figure 5-345 Slide the gear off of the shaft
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1477
3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.
Figure 5-346 Remove the sensor
4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following:).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
a. Remove two screws (callout 1)
Figure 5-347 Remove two screws
1478 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-348 Remove the buffer motor
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1479
Front tamper motor (M6)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
● Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher)
● Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7)
● Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01001A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive Motor, Step
1480 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-349 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1481
Figure 5-350 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-351 Remove six screws
1482 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-352 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-353 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1483
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-354 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-355 Release the lower hinge pin
1484 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-356 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-357 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1485
Figure 5-358 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-359 Remove one screw
1486 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-360 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-361 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1487
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-362 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-363 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
1488 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-364 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-365 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1489
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-366 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-367 Remove four screws
1490 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-368 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-369 Disconnect two connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1491
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-370 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-371 Lower the output tray
1492 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-372 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-373 Release the shield
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1493
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-374 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-375 Locate sensors
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
1494 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-376 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-377 Disconnect three connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1495
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-378 Remove two screws
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-379 Remove one screw
1496 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).
Figure 5-380 Rotate the sensor
1
3
6. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-381 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1497
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-382 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-383 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws
1498 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-384 Remove one screw
10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-385 Remove the rear tamper shaft
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1499
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-386 Disconnect one connector
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-387 Disconnect one connector
1500 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-388 Disconnect one connector
14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-389 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1501
15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-390 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 5-391 Remove the ejector unit
1 2
3
17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
1502 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-392 Reinstall the front tamper shaft
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
Figure 5-393 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft
Step 11: Remove the front tamper (finisher)
▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1503
Figure 5-394 Remove the front tamper
Step 12: Remove the front tamper motor (M7)
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-395 Remove two screws
1504 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-396 Release the belt and remove the motor
Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1505
Rear tamper motor (M7)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
● Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher)
● Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7)
● Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01001A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive Motor, Step
1506 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-397 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1507
Figure 5-398 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-399 Remove six screws
1508 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-400 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-401 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1509
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-402 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-403 Release the lower hinge pin
1510 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-404 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-405 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1511
Figure 5-406 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-407 Remove one screw
1512 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-408 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-409 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1513
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-410 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-411 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
1514 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-412 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-413 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1515
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-414 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-415 Remove four screws
1516 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-416 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-417 Disconnect two connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1517
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-418 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-419 Lower the output tray
1518 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-420 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-421 Release the shield
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1519
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-422 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-423 Locate sensors
Step 10: Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
1520 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-424 Move the staple unit to the center
2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-425 Disconnect three connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1521
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-426 Remove two screws
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-427 Remove one screw
1522 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
finisher (callout 3).
Figure 5-428 Rotate the sensor
1
3
6. Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-429 Remove one screw
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1523
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-430 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-431 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws
1524 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-432 Remove one screw
10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-433 Remove the rear tamper shaft
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1525
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-434 Disconnect one connector
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 5-435 Disconnect one connector
1526 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-436 Disconnect one connector
14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-437 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1527
15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-438 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 5-439 Remove the ejector unit
1 2
3
17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
1528 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-440 Reinstall the front tamper shaft
b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).
Figure 5-441 Reinstall the rear tamper shaft
Step 11: Remove the rear tamper (finisher)
▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1529
Figure 5-442 Remove the rear tamper
Step 12: Remove the rear tamper motor (M7)
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-443 Remove two screws
1530 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-444 Release the belt and remove the motor
Step 13: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1531
SCU motor (M10)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
● Step 5: Remove the rear cover
● Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
● Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
● Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
● Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10)
● Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the SCU motor on the finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01156A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
1532 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-445 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1533
Figure 5-446 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-447 Remove six screws
1534 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-448 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the front door (finisher)
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.
Figure 5-449 Lift the top hinge pin
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1535
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-450 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-451 Release the lower hinge pin
1536 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-452 Remove the lower hinge pin
5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-453 Remove one screw and the front door
Step 4: Remove the front cover (finisher)
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1537
Figure 5-454 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
Figure 5-455 Remove one screw
1538 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-456 Remove five screws and the front cover
Step 5: Remove the rear cover
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-457 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1539
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-458 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 6: Remove the booklet tray (finisher)
1. Raise the booklet tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-459 Remove the booklet tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
1540 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Special installation instructions: Booklet tray
▲ Position the tabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-460 Install the booklet tray
Step 7: Remove the caster cover (finisher)
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-461 Remove four screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1541
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-462 Remove the caster cover
3
1 2
Step 8: Remove the lower shield assembly (finisher)
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raise the lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
Figure 5-463 Remove four screws
1542 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-464 Release the lower shield
2 1
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-465 Disconnect two connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1543
4. If you are replacing the lower shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the lower
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-466 Locate sensors
Step 9: Remove the upper shield assembly (finisher)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-467 Lower the output tray
1544 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-468 Remove six screws
3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
Reinstallation tip: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-469 Release the shield
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1545
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-470 Disconnect one connector
5. If you are replacing the upper shield assembly, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the upper
shield. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-471 Locate sensors
Step 10: Remove the SCU motor (M10)
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).
1546 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-472 Disconnect one connector
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.
Figure 5-473 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1547
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.
Figure 5-474 Remove two screws and the motor
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: SCU motor (M10)
▲ When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and
slot in the printer.
Figure 5-475 Install the motor and bracket
Step 11: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1548 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1549
Main tray moving motor (M11)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11)
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main tray moving motor (M11) on the
finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01415B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
1550 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-476 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1551
Figure 5-477 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-478 Remove six screws
1552 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-479 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-480 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1553
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-481 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the main tray moving motor (M11)
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-482 Lower the output tray
1554 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).
Figure 5-483 Open two retainers
1
2
3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-484 Disconnect three connectors
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1555
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of the
bracket.
Figure 5-485 Disconnect one connector
5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.
Figure 5-486 Remove four screws and the motor assembly
1556 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-487 Remove the motor assembly
7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)
a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.
Figure 5-488 Remove the bushing
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1557
b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly bracket,
and then install the bushing.
Figure 5-489 Install the bushing
c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.
Figure 5-490 Install the motor assembly
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
1558 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1559
Booklet finisher front cover
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher front cover.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01478B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Cover F Bm
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
1560 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-491 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1561
Booklet finisher
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01416A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Booklet Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
1562 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-492 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1563
Figure 5-493 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-494 Remove six screws
1564 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-495 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-496 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1565
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-497 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher
1. Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher.
Figure 5-498 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher
1566 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 5-499 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw
2
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 5-500 Release the metal bracket
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1567
4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet finisher.
Figure 5-501 Remove one screw
1 2
5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.
Figure 5-502 Slide the right rail
1568 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet finisher.
Figure 5-503 Remove one screw
7. Lift the booklet finisher up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet finisher.
Figure 5-504 Remove the booklet finisher
8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Booklet finisher
▲ When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
finisher.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1569
Figure 5-505 Position the hooks
9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
Figure 5-506 Align arrows
1570 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
Figure 5-507 Align arrows
11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet finisher slot.
Figure 5-508 Extend the right rail
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1571
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1572 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Booklet finisher PCA
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher
● Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA
● Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher PCA.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC92-02790B
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Booklet finisher PCA
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1573
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-509 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1574 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-510 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-511 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1575
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-512 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-513 Remove seven screws
1576 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-514 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher
1. Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher.
Figure 5-515 Slide the booklet finisher away from the finisher
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1577
2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 5-516 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw
2
3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 5-517 Release the metal bracket
1578 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet finisher.
Figure 5-518 Remove one screw
1 2
5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.
Figure 5-519 Slide the right rail
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1579
6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet finisher.
Figure 5-520 Remove one screw
7. Lift the booklet finisher up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet finisher.
Figure 5-521 Remove the booklet finisher
8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Booklet finisher
▲ When installing the booklet finisher, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
finisher.
1580 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-522 Position the hooks
9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
Figure 5-523 Align arrows
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1581
10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet finisher aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
Figure 5-524 Align arrows
11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet finisher slot.
Figure 5-525 Extend the right rail
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher PCA
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
1582 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-526 Remove two screws
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.
Figure 5-527 Remove one screw and the metal cover
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1583
3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet finisher PCA.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-528 Remove four screws and the PCA
Step 6: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1584 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Booklet finisher fold stopper unit
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
● Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit
● Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet finisher fold stopper unit.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01432A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher Sub - Face Down Stopper Unit
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1585
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-529 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
1586 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-530 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-531 Remove six screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1587
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-532 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-533 Remove seven screws
1588 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-534 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-535 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1589
Step 5: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
Figure 5-536 Remove two screws
2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
Figure 5-537 Remove two screws
1590 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-538 Remove the lower right shield
Step 6: Remove the fold stopper unit
1. On the left side of the booklet finisher, remove two screws through access openings in the jam access
cover (callout 1).
Figure 5-539 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1591
2. Raise the jam access cover.
Figure 5-540 Raise the jam access cover
3. Raise the booklet width guide.
Figure 5-541 Raise the booklet width guide
1592 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. On the right side of the booklet finisher, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three
connectors (callout 2).
Figure 5-542 Disconnect three connectors
5. Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-543 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1593
6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove
it.
Figure 5-544 Release the guide arm
7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.
Figure 5-545 Lower the width guide
1594 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
8. On the right side of the booklet finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 5-546 Remove one screw
9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the right
(callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-547 Remove the fold stopper unit
10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit
▲ Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher
and verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment,
and run another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1595
Figure 5-548 Adjust the alignment gauge
Step 7: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1596 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet feed entrance motor on the booklet
finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01152A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1597
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-549 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the booklet feed entrance motor (M13)
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away from the
booklet finisher and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1598 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-550 Remove the booklet feed entrance motor
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1599
TE presser motor (M14)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the TE presser motor on the booklet finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01155A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
1600 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-551 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the TE presser motor (M14)
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the TE presser
motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-552 Remove the TE presser motor
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1601
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1602 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Stopper moving motor (M16)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
● Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stopper moving motor on the booklet
finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01155A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1603
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-553 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
Figure 5-554 Remove two screws
1604 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
Figure 5-555 Remove two screws
3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-556 Remove the lower right shield
Step 3: Remove the stopper moving motor (M16)
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the stopper moving
motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1605
Figure 5-557 Remove the stopper moving motor
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1606 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Separate pawl motor (M17)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17)
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the separate pawl motor on the booklet finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01001A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive, motor step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1607
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-558 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the separate pawl motor (M17)
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the separate pawl
motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-559 Remove the separate pawl motor
1
2
1608 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1609
Folding roller motor (M18)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
● Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
● Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
● Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18)
● Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the folding roller motor on the booklet finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC31-00144A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Folding roller motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
1610 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the right top cover (finisher)
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
Reinstallation tip: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-560 Remove six screws and the right top cover
Step 2: Remove the top cover (finisher)
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1611
Figure 5-561 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-562 Remove six screws
1612 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-563 Disconnect one connector and release retainer
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Step 3: Remove the rear cover (finisher)
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.
Figure 5-564 Remove seven screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1613
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-565 Remove four screws and the rear cover
Step 4: Remove the folding roller motor (M18)
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding roller
motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-566 Remove the folding roller motor
1614 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 5: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1615
Blade motor (M19)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
● Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19)
● Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the blade motor on the booklet finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC90-01435A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Finisher sub - bm main blade
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
1616 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-567 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the booklet finisher lower right shield
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
Figure 5-568 Remove two screws
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1617
2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet finisher (callout 1).
Figure 5-569 Remove two screws
3. Slide the booklet finisher out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the lower right shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-570 Remove the lower right shield
Step 3: Remove the blade motor (M19)
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the blade motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
1618 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Figure 5-571 Remove the blade motor
Step 4: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1619
C fold motor (M20)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
● Step 2: Remove the C fold motor
● Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the C fold motor on the booklet finisher.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
JC93-01154A
To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.
● Drive Motor, Step
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
1620 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Step 1: Remove the booklet finisher front cover
▲ Slide the booklet finisher slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet finisher to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet finisher front cover.
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-572 Remove five screws and the cover
1 4
2
3
Step 2: Remove the C fold motor
1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1). These
arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.
Figure 5-573 Check arrow alignment
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1621
2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-574 Disconnect two connectors
3. Remove four screws (callout 1).
Figure 5-575 Remove four screws
1622 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release the
belt (callout 3).
Figure 5-576 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt
1 2
5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet finisher.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft might
become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet finisher PCA shield
and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.
Figure 5-577 Remove the bracket and motor
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1623
6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.
Figure 5-578 Remove two screws
7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: C fold motor
a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while installing the
gear and belt.
Figure 5-579 Install one screw
1624 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
Figure 5-580 Check arrow alignment
c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear
(callout 1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.
Figure 5-581 Align arrows
Step 3: Unpack the replacement assembly
1. Dispose of the defective part.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement procedures (stapler/stacker and booklet finishers) 1625
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at
an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller or pad
can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves when
handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
1626 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Problem solving
Control panel message document (CPMD)
Refer to Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview on page 1038 for more details.
Clear paper jams
Clear paper jams in the Booklet maker
Clear jams in the top output area
1. Open the top cover.
ENWW Problem solving 1627
2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.
3. Remove any jammed paper.
Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path
1. Open the booklet maker door.
1628 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Release the lever.
3. Turn the knob.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area
1. Open the booklet maker door.
ENWW Problem solving 1629
2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.
1630 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
3. Turn the knob to advance the jammed paper.
4. Remove the jammed paper/booklet from the output area.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area
1. Open the booklet maker door.
ENWW Problem solving 1631
2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.
3. Open the vertical tray by pulling outward on the green tab.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area
1. Open the booklet maker door.
1632 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.
ENWW Problem solving 1633
3. Pull the green tab.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.
6. Remove the jammed paper.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area
1. Open the booklet maker door.
1634 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.
3. Open the roller door.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
ENWW Problem solving 1635
5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.
6. Remove the jammed paper.
Clear jams in the IPTU
1. Lift the IPTU cover and clear any jammed paper inside the IPTU.
2. Close the IPTU cover.
Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF)
1. Open the staple cartridge access door.
1636 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
2. Rotate the lever to the left to release the hooks that secure the inner finisher (they hold the IF in place).
3. Slide the inner finisher partially out.
ENWW Problem solving 1637
4. Release the lever to open the right cover on the inner finisher.
5. Lift the inner finisher jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper inside the rear of the inner
finisher.
6. Close the inner finisher jam access cover.
7. Close the inner finisher right cover.
1638 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
8. Open the output side jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
9. Close the output side jam access cover.
10. Slide the inner finisher in until it clicks into place.
11. Close the staple cartridge access door.
Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher
Clear jams in the High-volume finisher output area
1. Open the top cover.
ENWW Problem solving 1639
2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.
3. Remove any jammed paper.
1640 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Finisher system diagram
PCA structure diagram
Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH PCA.
Figure 5-582 Finisher system diagram
PCA function
● FINISHER PCA
This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● SWITCH PCA
This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple operation.
● BOOKLET MAKER PCA
This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● HOLE PUNCH PCA
This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
ENWW Finisher system diagram 1641
Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher
Booklet finisher 1
Figure 5-583 Booklet finisher 1
13
15
1642 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-11 Booklet finisher 1
Ref Description Part number Qty
3 Caster cover JC63-04985B 1
4 Cover, front JC63-04986B 1
5 Cover-f, lower JC63-04987B 1
6 Cover, rear JC63-04988B 1
7 Cover-t, tray 2 JC63-04996B 1
8 Cover-m, tray JC63-05002B 1
9 Cover-s, tray JC63-05003B 2
15 (1) Tray - guide booklet finisher JC61-07253B 1
15 (2) Cover - tray booklet finisher JC63-04978B 1
17 Finisher sub-top door JC90-01445B 1
18 Finisher sub-top cover JC90-01446B 1
20 Finisher sub-cover f bm JC90-01417B 1
Not shown Harness, finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1643
Booklet finisher 2
Figure 5-584 Booklet finisher 2
1644 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-12 Booklet finisher 2
Ref Description Part number Qty
4 Finisher sub-ejector unit JC90-01409A 1
5 Roller, main-feed entrance JC66-04722A 1
12 Bearing ball 6601-001478 6
13 Rail 6102-003369 2
14 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
16 Finisher sub-right jam JC90-01457A 1
19 Finisher sub-tamper rear JC82-00898A 1
20 Finisher sub-tamper front JC82-00901A 1
Not shown Finisher sub-exit main JC90-01451A 1
Not shown Harness, top cover JC39-02310A 1
Not shown Finisher sub-booklet unit JC909-01416A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1645
Booklet finisher 3
Figure 5-585 Booklet finisher 3
1646 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-13 Booklet finisher 3
Ref Description Part number Qty
2 Feed roller main exit JC66-04726A 1
3 Feed roller top-mid exit JC66-04725A 1
4 Feed roller mid-exit JC66-04724A 1
5 Finisher sub feed JC90-01672A 1
6 Spring JC61-07414A 2
9 Bushing JC61-00426A 2
11 Bearing ball 6601-001478 6
12 Main-brush, exit JC67-00817A 1
13 Finisher sub exit JC90-01674A 1
14 Finisher sub-top jam JC90-01455A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1647
Booklet finisher 4
Figure 5-586 Booklet finisher 4
1648 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-14 Booklet finisher 4
Ref Description Part number Qty
2 Finisher sub-clutch div JC90-01474A 1
4 Finisher sub-end fence JC90-01466A 1
5 Clutch drive JC90-01404A 1
6 Roller, top-feed exit JC66-04727A 1
9 Roller, feed JC66-04523A 1
12 Gear JC66-04602A 1
17 Actuator JC66-04526A 1
18 Cover-t, tray JC63-04995B 1
19 Seal JC62-01328A 1
22 Guide JC61-07206A 1
25 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003649 1
26 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003647 2
28 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003645 2
29 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003640 1
30 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003639 1
31 Bearing ball 6601-003062 2
33 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
36 Finisher sub-hb mtr JC90-01459A 2
37 Finisher sub-ef mtr JC90-01467A 1
38 Finisher sub-drv buff JC90-01453A 1
39 Finisher sub-div cam JC90-01458A 1
43 Solenoid JC90-01675A 1
44 Motor - BM exit cam JC90-01673A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1649
Booklet finisher 5
Figure 5-587 Booklet finisher 5
1650 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-15 Booklet finisher 5
Ref Description Part number Qty
2 Finisher sub-staple unit JC90-01412A 1
8 Actuator JC66-04528A 1
9 Roller, feed JC66-04523A 1
10 Ground JC63-04984A 1
17 Guide JC61-07192A 1
18 Guide JC61-07189A 1
23 Frame mount JC61-06663A 1
24 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003652 2
25 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003270 1
26 Top-brush exit JC67-00818A 1
27 Compiler-brush, ceiling front JC67-00820A 1
28 Compiler-brush, ceiling rear JC67-00819A 1
29 Tray motor JC90-01415B 1
31 Motor JC90-01414A 1
Not shown PCA - 3K main JC92-02791A 1
Not shown E ring 6044-000125 1
Not shown Cable clamp 6502-001131 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher rear upper JC39-02312A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front upper JC39-02313A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher punch relay JC39-02314A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple relay JC39-02315A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple safety JC39-02316A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher eject relay JC39-02317A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front lower JC39-02318A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher stack relay JC39-02319A 1
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1651
Booklet finisher 6
Figure 5-588 Booklet finisher 6
1652 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-16 Booklet finisher 6
Ref Description Part number Qty
8 Magnet JC81-08263A 1
7 Finisher sub-booklet unit JC90-01416A 1
12 Front cover JC63-04986B 1
13 Hinge JC66-04767A 2
14 Cover-f, lower JC63-04987B 1
15 Caster JC63-04985B 1
16 Rear cover JC63-04988B 1
17 Finisher sub-tray bm unit JC90-01417B 1
20 Finisher sub-inlet guide JC90-01448B 1
22 Finisher sub-top cover JC90-01446B 1
23 Finisher sub-HB mtr JC90-01402B 1
25 Finisher sub-top door JC90-01445B 1
Not shown Stack full harness JC39-02331A 1
Not shown Csp acuator duplex JC81-07930A 1
Not shown CS spring acuator stack JC81-09396A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1653
Booklet finisher 7
Figure 5-589 Booklet finisher 7
1654 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-17 Booklet finisher 7
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher - engine side bracket JC90-01442A 2
3 Cover-s, tray JC63-05003B 2
4 Cover-m, tray JC63-05002B 1
5 Cover-t, tray 2 JC63-04996B 1
6 Shipping lock for booklet JC61-007149A 1
7 Tray support JC61-06668A 2
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1655
Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold exit
Figure 5-590 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold exit
1656 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-18 Three fold motor, curl pawl motor, curl pawl, and three fold exit
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub-3 fold motor JC90-01396A 1
1-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01154A 1
1-2 Gear JC66-04579A 1
1-4 E-ring 6044-000125 2
1-5 Screw, machine M3 6001-000130 4
1-6 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
1-7 Bushing JC61-00423A 1
2-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01153A 1
3 Finisher sub-curl pawl JC90-01398A 1
4 Finisher sub - 3 fold exit JC90-01399A 1
4-5 C-ring 6044-000159 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1657
Low exit, hb motor, and top guide
Figure 5-591 Low exit, hb motor, and top guide, floor standing finisher
1658 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-19 Low exit, hb motor, and top guide, floor standing finisher
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub-low exit JC90-01400A 1
1-2 Roller, exit, fold JC66-04744A 1
1-3 Roller, feed-fold exit JC66-04721A 1
1-7 Bushing JC61-00426A 4
1-8 E-ring 6044-000129 2
2-2 Motor, step JC31-00163B 2
2-3 Cable clamp 6502-001131 1
3 Finisher sub-guide top JC90-01406A 1
3-3 Spring, es JC61-07431A 2
3-4 Spring, es JC61-07430A 4
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1659
SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide
Figure 5-592 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide
3-3
3-3
1660 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-20 SCU motor, STK motor, and entrance guide
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Motor, lift assembly JC90-01414A 1
1-1 Motor, step JC93-01156A 1
1-2 Gear JC66-04604A 1
1-5 Cable clamp 6502-001131 1
1-6 E-ring 6044–000125 2
2 Motor, tray JC90-01415B 1
2-1 Cartridge, ICT-PIN JC70-40542A 1
2-2 Stacker, CSP-worm JC81-07637A 1
2-9 Motor, lift JC31-00178B 1
2-11 Bearing ball 6601-001478 3
2-12 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
3 Finisher sub-entrance guide JC90-01424A 1
3-1 Bushing JC61-02372A 2
3-3 Harness, 3K finisher top cover JC39-02310A 2
3-11 Actuator JC66-04520A 1
3-13 Actuator JC66-04644A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1661
Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor
Figure 5-593 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor
1662 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-21 Entrance motor, low paddle, alignment, and paddle motor
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01155A 1
1-2 Driver motor, step JC93-01152A 1
1-5 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
2 Finisher sub-low paddle JC90-01429A 1
2-1 Roller, feed JC66-04719A 8
2-3 Paddle holder JC61-07225A 4
4-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01001A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1663
Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam
Figure 5-594 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam
1664 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-22 Drive buffer, top lower, and top jam
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01155A 1
1-2 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
2 Finisher sub-top lower JC90-01454A 1
2-1 Actuator, top exit JC66-04525A 1
2-3 Spring, TS JC61-07411A 1
2-6 Harness, 3k finisher exit path JC39-02322A 1
2-7 Sensor JC32-00020A 1
3 Finisher sub-top jam JC90-01455A 2
3-6 Seal JC62-01328A 1
3-7 Spring, ts JC61-07417A 1
3-8 Spring, es JC61-07415A 4
3-9 Spring, ts JC61-07410A 1
3-10 Spring, es JC61-07409A 2
3-11 Guide, diverter JC61-07205A 1
3-12 Guide, top jam JC61-07196A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1665
FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade
Figure 5-595 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade
1666 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-23 FD stopper unit, jam clear, and BKT main blade
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub-fd stopper unit JC90-01432A 1
1-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01155A 1
1-5 Timing pulley JC66-04583A 2
1-11 Spring, cs JC61-07403A 1
1-12 Spring, ts JC61-07401A 1
1-13 Spring, es JC61-07400A 1
1-22 Solenoid JC33-00038A 1
2 Finisher sub-jam clear JC90-01433A 1
3 Finisher sub-bkt main blade JC90-01435A 1
3-1 Gear, helical 4 JC66-04595A 1
3-2 Gear, helical 3 JC66-04594A 1
3-4 Motor BLDC, Type 2 JC31-00144A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1667
Fold roller, main blade, and top frame
Figure 5-596 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame
3-3
1668 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-24 Fold roller, main blade, and top frame
Ref Description Part number Qty
1-1 Gear, helical 2 JC66-04593A 1
1-2 Gear, helical 1 JC66-04592A 1
1-3 Gear, double JC66-04573A 1
1-5 Motor BLDC, Type 2 JC31-00144A 1
2 Finisher sub-main blade JC90-01437A 1
2-3 Bushing JC61-00423A 1
2-4 Bushing JC61-00426A 2
2-13 Gear, helical JC66-04591A 2
3 Finisher sub-top frame JC90-01440A 1
3-3 Harness, 3k finisher top cover JC39-02310A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1669
Three fold blade
Figure 5-597 Three fold blade
1670 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-25 Three fold blade
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Finisher sub-3 fold blade JC90-01438A 1
1 Finisher sub-exit roller JC90-01395A 1
2 Finisher sub-guide three fold JC90-01394A 1
2-4 Spring, es JC61-07391A 2
3 Sheet-jam guide JC63-05044A 3
4 Sheet-fold exit JC63-05041A 2
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1671
Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide
Figure 5-598 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide
1672 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-26 Door, top door, top cover, and registration guide
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub-door JC90-01444A 1
1-2 Cover, link JC63-05004A 2
2 Finisher sub-top door JC90-01445B 1
3 Finisher sub-top cover JC90-01446B 1
3-1 PCA, 3k switch JC92-02789A 1
3-2 Magnet, as JC81-08263A 1
3-3 Button lens JC64-00996A 1
3-4 Button, staple JC64-00995A 1
4 Finisher Sub - Inlet Guide JC90-01448B 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1673
Entrance guide, mid jam, and main exit
Figure 5-599 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main exit
1674 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-27 Entrance guide, mid jam, and main exit
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub-ent guide JC90-01449A 2
1-4 Spring, ES JC61-07408A 2
1-7 Sensor, rp JC32-00020A 1
2 Finisher sub-mid jam JC90-01450A 1
3 Finisher sub-exit main JC90-01451A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1675
Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
Figure 5-600 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
1-7
1676 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-28 Transfer buffer, right jam, div cam, hb motor, and paddle motor
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub exit JC90-01674A 1
1-3 Spring, TS JC61-07413A 2
1-4 Spring, ES JC61-07409A 2
1-5 Guide, buff div JC61-07204A 1
1-8 Sensor, rp JC32-00020A 1
2 Finisher sub-right jam JC90-01457A 1
2-1 Magnet JC81-08263A 1
2-2 Spring, TS JC61-07418A 1
3 Finisher sub-div cam JC90-01458A 1
3-1 Ict-pin, paralled, p/u JC70-40360A 1
4 Finisher sub-hb motor JC90-01459A 2
4-1 Motor step, ip JC31-00163B 2
5-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01001A 1
5-3 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1677
Front alignment (tamper)
Figure 5-601 Front alignment (tamper)
1678 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-29 Front alignment (tamper)
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Finisher sub-tamper, front JC90-01464A 1
13 Driver motor, step JC93-01001A 1
14 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
15 Timing belt, gear 6602-003644 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1679
Rear alignment (tamper)
Figure 5-602 Rear alignment (tamper)
1680 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-30 Rear alignment (tamper)
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Finisher sub-tamper, rear JC90-01465A 1
1 Driver motor, step JC93-01001A 1
12 Timing belt, gear 6602-003644 1
15 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1681
Shield
Figure 5-603 Shield
1682 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-31 Shield
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Finisher sub-shield JC90-01475A 1
1-1 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
1-9 Cover, stacker JC63-04999B 1
1-10 Spring, ts JC61-07428A 1
1-11 Spring, ts JC61-07427A 1
2-1 Drive motor, step JC93-01001A 1
3 Finisher sub-base low JC90-01476A 1
3-2 Spring, ts JC61-07392A 1
3-3 Leg bracket JC61-07279A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1683
PCA bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle
Figure 5-604 PCA bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle
1684 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-32 PCA bm, cover f bm, idle fold, and paddle
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 BM PCA wiring loom assy JC90-01477A 1
2 Finisher sub-cover f bm JC90-01478B 1
3 Finisher sub-idle fold JC90-01479A 1
4 Finisher sub-paddle JC90-01480A 1
4-1 Finisher sub-paddle, wing JC90-01463A 2
4-2 Finisher sub-paddle, mid JC90-01462A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1685
Finisher sub booklet
Figure 5-605 Finisher sub booklet
1686 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-33 Finisher sub booklet
Ref Description Part number Qty
0 Finisher sub-booklet 4 JC90-01502A 1
1 Spring TS JC61-07398A 1
2 Spring TS JC61-07397A 1
8 PCA, bookletmaker JC92-02790B 1
Not shown Saddle staple unit JC81-09881B 1
Not shown Corner staple unit JC81-09882B 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1687
Bridge Unit
Figure 5-606 Bridge Unit
1688 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
Table 5-34 Bridge Unit
Ref Description Part number Qty
3 Magnet JC81-08263A 1
4 Roller, brg-feed entrance JC66-04733A 1
5 Roller, brg-feed JC66-04732A 2
7 Actuator, sensor JC66-04569A 1
10 Spring, ts JC61-07432A 1
17 Bush-6, d(l) JC61-00884A 3
18 Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Pa JC39-02328A 1
19 Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Sub JC39-02327A 1
20 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003648 2
21 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003645 1
22 Bearing ball 6601-001478 2
23 Cable clamp 6502-001131 1
24 E-ring 6044-000125 2
25 Screw, tap type m4 6003-001256 4
26 Screw, machine m3 6001-000130 4
27 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 1
28 Finisher sub-hb mtr JC90-01402A 1
Not shown Clutch drive JC90-01404A 1
ENWW Stapler/Stacker Finisher and Booklet Finisher 1689
1690 Chapter 5 Stapler/Stacker and booklet maker ENWW
6 Inner finisher
● Product Specification and Description
● Service approach
● Removal and replacment (inner finisher)
● Problem solving
● Block Diagram
● Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams
ENWW 1691
Product Specification and Description
Specification
Item Description
Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm
Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open
Media Sizes ● Main: 148 - 320 mm x 140-457.2 mm (58.3-126 inch x 55.1-180 inch)
● Top: 98 - 297 mm x 140-432 mm (38.6-116.9 inch x 55.1-170.1 inch)
Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/Glossy/
Envelope
Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)
● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)
Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)
Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)
Weight 15 kg (33 lb.)
Tray1 Finishing Capacity 50 Sheets @ 80gsm
Tray1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Center)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)
Tray2 Finishing Capacity 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm
Table 6-1 Paper Size Specification
Name Paper size Orienta Output Staple position
tion
mm Inches Directio Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
n
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X
Monarch Env 98.4 x 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X
190.5
PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X
152.4
1692 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Table 6-1 Paper Size Specification (continued)
Name Paper size Orienta Output Staple position
tion
mm Inches Directio Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
n
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X
457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O O X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 — W 148-320 X W 98-297 X X X
~
L 140-1200 - L 140-1200 - L 140-1200
L 5.5-47
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.
ENWW Product Specification and Description 1693
Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O
B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O
B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X
Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X
Env
PostCard 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X
4X6 152.4
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O
342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O
1694 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O
Tabloid 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X
Extra 457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ - X X X X X
L 140-1200 L 5.5-47
Table 6-2 Media performance
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch
Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O
Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O
Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X
Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X
Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O
Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O
Bond O O O O
Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O
LetterHead O O O O
Pre-Punched O O O X
Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O
Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X
Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X
ENWW Product Specification and Description 1695
Table 6-2 Media performance (continued)
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch
Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X
Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O
Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X
Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X
Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X
Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X
Tab O X X O
Perforated Paper (75-90 g/m2) X O X X
Finisher System
Sectional view
Figure 6-1 Finisher system—sectional view
Table 6-3 Finisher system—sectional view
Item Description Item Description
1 Entrance sensor 7 Jam Door Open Sensor
2 Passthru Sensor 8 Front Door Open Sensor
3 Paddle Home Sensor 9 Stacker Tray Home Sensor
4 Tamper Home_F Sensor 10 Paper Feed roller
5 Tamper Home_R Sensor 11 Paper Exit roller
6 Eject Home Sensor 12 Turning Knob
1696 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Paper path
Figure 6-2 Finisher system—paper path
Table 6-4 Finisher system—paper path
Item Description
1 Finisher Main Tray – Staple / offset / Punch
2 Finisher Top Tray – Stack only
ENWW Product Specification and Description 1697
Electrical parts layout
Figure 6-3 Finisher system—electrical parts layout
Table 6-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout
Item Description Function
S1 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Entrance Sensor
S2 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Shaft Docking Sensor
S3 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Dust Box Sensor
S4 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001381) Sub Stay Sensor
S5 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler Position Sensor_Rear
S6 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple Position Sensor_ Center 1
S7 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Staple Position Sensor_ Center 2
S8 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Exit Sensor
S9 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Stapler Position Sensor_Front
S10 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) End Defence Sensor
S11 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject Sensor
S12 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper Support Sensor
1698 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Table 6-5 Finisher system—electrical parts layout (continued)
Item Description Function
S13 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Eject 2 Motor Sensor
S14 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tamper Position Sensor_Rear
S15 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Paper Holder Position Sensor
S16 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tray Home Position Sensor
S17 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Tamper Position Sensor_Front
S18 Photo- Interrupter (0604-001415) Main Paddle Position Sensor
S19 JC81-07403A AS- Sensor
S20 JC81-07396A AS- Sensor
S21 JC39-01610A Switch Front cover open
S22 JC39-02175A Switch Jam door open
M1 JC31-00169A Entrance Motor
M2 JC31-00009C EJECTOR_1_Motor
M3 Mabuchi EJECTOR_2_Motor
M4 JC31-00149A Tamper_Motor_Front
M5 JC31-00149A Tamper_Motor_Rear
M6 JC31-00149A Paper Support
M7 KIG Tray Motor
M8 JC31-00149A Main Paddle Motor
M9 JC31-00169A Exit Motor
M10 JC31-00149A Traverse Motor
M11 TDS-10SL Paper Holder Solenoid
ENWW Product Specification and Description 1699
Block Diagram
Figure 6-4 Finisher system—block diagram
PBA Connection Information
Figure 6-5 Finisher system—PBA connection information
Table 6-6 Finisher system—PBA connection information
No. Connection
1 CN3 : REAR Joint I/F
2 CN1 : REAR Sensor
3 CN10 : Traverse Mid Sensor
4 CN8 : Debug
5 CN2 : REAR I/F
6 CN7 : FRONT I/F
7 CN6 : Stacker Switch
8 CN9 : Solenoid
9 CN4 : Ejector & Supporter I/F
10 CN5 : Main I/F
1700 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under the
weight of the product.
Before performing service
● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.
● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.
ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
After performing service
● Plug in the power cable.
● Verify the functions of the printer that might have been impacted by service procedures. Make sure the
printer is in complete working order.
● Replace any accessories removed for service.
Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:
Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.
4. Print a configuration page.
ENWW Service approach 1701
5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.
6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Ordering
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
or
partsurfer.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the
HP SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.
1702 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Removal and replacment (inner finisher)
● ESD precautions
● Entrance sensor
● Entrance motor
● Exit sensor
● Exit motor
● Front Jogger Motor
● Front Jogger Home Sensor
● Rear Jogger Motor
● Rear Jogger Home Sensor
● Stapler
● Stapler position sensor assembly
● Traverse Motor
● Stacker Motor
● Stacker Encoder Sensor
● Stacker Lower Limit Switch
● Stack Beam Sensor
● Stack Position Sensor
● Paper Holding Lever Solenoid
● Paper Support Motor
● Paper Support Home Sensor
● Ejector Motor assembly
● Main Paddle Motor
● Main Paddle Home Sensor
● Main Paddle
● Ejector assembly
● Punch Dust Full Sensor
● End Fence Home Sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1703
ESD precautions
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
1704 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Entrance sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Entrance sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Entrance sensor assembly part number
0604-001381 Entrance sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1705
Step 1: Remove the entrance sensor
1. On the right-side of the printer remove three screws, and then remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-6 Remove the entrance sensor (1 of 7)
2. On the right, back-side of the printer remove the e-ring, and then remove the shaft-side plate. Unplug the
connector.
Figure 6-7 Remove the entrance sensor (2 of 7)
1706 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. On the right, front-side of the printer remove the sheet-punch front.
Figure 6-8 Remove the entrance sensor (3 of 7)
4. Remove the e-ring and washer, and then remove the punch dummy.
Figure 6-9 Remove the entrance sensor (4 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1707
5. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove, four screws. Remove the handle, and then remove the
punch dummy cover.
Figure 6-10 Remove the entrance sensor (5 of 7)
6. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the sensor bracket.
Figure 6-11 Remove the entrance sensor (6 of 7)
7. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-12 Remove the entrance sensor (7 of 7)
1708 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Entrance motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the entrance motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Entrance motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Entrance motor assembly part number
JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1709
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-13 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-14 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1710 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-15 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-16 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1711
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-17 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
1712 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 2: Remove the entrance motor
1. Disconnect the sensor cable at the rear.
2. Remove the cable restraint at the rear.
3. Release two tabs that engage with the frame, and then remove the guide middle lower.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flag.
4. Remove two screws.
Figure 6-18 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
5. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.
Figure 6-19 Remove the entrance motor (6 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1713
6. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-20 Remove the entrance motor (7 of 7)
1714 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Exit sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the exit sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Exit sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Exit sensor assembly part number
JC66-04199A Feed actuator sensor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1715
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-21 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-22 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1716 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-23 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-24 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1717
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-25 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
1718 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 2: Remove the exit sensor
▲ Remove the hook, and then remove the exit sensor.
Figure 6-26 Remove the exit sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1719
Exit motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the exit motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Exit motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Exit motor assembly part number
JC31-00169B Exit motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1720 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the exit motor
1. Remove the front cover.
Figure 6-27 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3)
2. Remove two screws, and then unplug the motor connector.
Figure 6-28 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1721
3. Remove the exit motor from the BKT motor feed exit.
Figure 6-29 Remove the exit motor (3 of 3)
1722 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Front Jogger Motor (Front Tamper)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Front Jogger Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Front Jogger Motor assembly part number
JC82-00899A Front Jogger Motor assembly (Front Tamper)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1723
Step 1: Remove the front jogger motor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-30 Remove the front jogger motor (1 of 22)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-31 Remove the front jogger motor (2 of 22)
1724 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-32 Remove the front jogger motor (3 of 22)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-33 Remove the front jogger motor (4 of 22)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1725
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-34 Remove the front jogger motor (5 of 22)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-35 Remove the front jogger motor (6 of 22)
7. Remove two screws and then remove the lower PBA cover.
1726 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-36 Remove the front jogger motor (7 of 22)
9. Remove one screw, and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-37 Remove the front jogger motor (8 of 22)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1727
10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
Figure 6-38 Remove the front jogger motor (9 of 22)
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.
Figure 6-39 Remove the front jogger motor (10 of 22)
1728 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
12. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-40 Remove the front jogger motor (11 of 22)
13. Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.
Figure 6-41 Remove the front jogger motor (12 of 22)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1729
14. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.
Figure 6-42 Remove the front jogger motor (13 of 22)
15. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.
Figure 6-43 Remove the front jogger motor (14 of 22)
1730 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
16. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.
Figure 6-44 Remove the front jogger motor (15 of 22)
17. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.
Figure 6-45 Remove the front jogger motor (16 of 22)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1731
18. Remove the ring-c, actuator-home paddle, AS pulley S2M48T, and cam-paddle A.
Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite side.
Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out
Figure 6-46 Remove the front jogger motor (17 of 22)
19. Remove the e-ring and bush-6_D.
Figure 6-47 Remove the front jogger motor (18 of 22)
1732 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
20. Remove the main paddle A unit / B unit, and then carefully remove the shaft from its retainer.
NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the paddle.
Figure 6-48 Remove the front jogger motor (19 of 22)
21. Remove four screws.
Figure 6-49 Remove the front jogger motor (20 of 22)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1733
22. Unplug the connector, and then pull the finisher sub-tamper front up to remove.
Reinstallation tip: Position the upper left-corner of the sub tamper, and then carefully rotate it counter-
clockwise into position.
Figure 6-50 Remove the front jogger motor (21 of 22)
23. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-51 Remove the front jogger motor (22 of 22)
1734 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Front Jogger Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number
0604-001381 Front Jogger Home Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1735
Step 1: Remove the front jogger home sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-52 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-53 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1736 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-54 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-55 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1737
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-56 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-57 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
1738 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-58 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-59 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1739
10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
Figure 6-60 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.
Figure 6-61 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)
1740 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
12. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-62 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 15)
13. Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.
Figure 6-63 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (1 of 6)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1741
14. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.
Figure 6-64 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (2 of 6)
15. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.
Figure 6-65 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (3 of 6)
1742 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
16. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.
Figure 6-66 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (4 of 6)
17. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.
Figure 6-67 Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly (5 of 6)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1743
18. Remove the ring-C, actuator-home paddle, AS pulley S2M48T, and cam-paddle A.
Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite side.
Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out
Figure 6-68 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 15)
19. Remove the e-ring and bush-6_D.
Figure 6-69 Remove the front jogger home sensor (11 of 15)
1744 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
20. Remove the main paddle A unit / B unit, and then carefully remove the shaft from its retainer.
NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the paddle.
Figure 6-70 Remove the front jogger home sensor (12 of 15)
21. Remove four screws.
Figure 6-71 Remove the front jogger home sensor (13 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1745
22. Unplug the connector, and then remove the front jogger home sensor.
Figure 6-72 Remove the front jogger home sensor
23. Remove the tamper front sub assembly.
1746 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Rear Jogger Motor (Rear Tamper)
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Rear Jogger Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Rear Jogger Motor assembly part number
JC82-00800A Rear Jogger Motor assembly (rear tamper)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1747
Step 1: Remove the rear jogger motor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-73 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-74 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1748 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-75 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-76 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1749
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-77 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-78 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
1750 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-79 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-80 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1751
10. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-81 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 15)
11. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.
Figure 6-82 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3)
1752 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
12. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-tamper rear.
Figure 6-83 Remove the rear jogger motor (2 of 3)
13. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger motor.
Figure 6-84 Remove the rear jogger motor (3 of 3)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1753
14. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.
Figure 6-85 Remove the rear jogger motor (1 of 3)
15. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-tamper rear.
Figure 6-86 Remove the rear jogger motor (2 of 3)
1754 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
16. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger motor.
Figure 6-87 Remove the rear jogger motor (3 of 3)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1755
Rear Jogger Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly part number
0604-001381 Rear Jogger Home Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1756 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the rear jogger home sensor
Remove the rear jogger home sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub-cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-88 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 11)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-89 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 11)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1757
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-90 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 11)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-91 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 11)
1758 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-92 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 11)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-93 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 11)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1759
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-94 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 11)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-95 Remove the front jogger home sensor (9 of 11)
1760 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
10. Remove three screws, unplug two connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-96 Remove the front jogger home sensor (10 of 11)
11. Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear jogger home sensor.
Figure 6-97 Remove the rear jogger home sensor (11 of 11)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1761
Stapler
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stapler
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the stapler assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Stapler assembly part number
JC90-01342A Stapler assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1762 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the stapler
1. Remove the front cover.
Figure 6-98 Remove the exit motor (1 of 3)
2. Remove two screws, and then unplug the motor connector.
Figure 6-99 Remove the exit motor (2 of 3)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1763
3. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler unit.
NOTE: Ensure the tab on the back of the stapler unit clears the chassis while removing.
Figure 6-100 Remove the stapler (1 of 2)
4. Remove two screws, and then remove the finisher sub-staple.
Figure 6-101 Remove the stapler (2 of 2)
1764 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Stapler position sensor assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
● Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stapler position sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Stapler position sensor assembly part number
0604-001415 Stapler position sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1765
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-102 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-103 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1766 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-104 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-105 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1767
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-106 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
1768 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 2: Remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly
1. Open the cover top tray sub-assembly, and then remove one screw securing the guide-exit lower.
Figure 6-107 Remove the Paddle Shaft sub assembly paddles (1 of 6)
2. Remove four screws securing the guide-harness A.
Figure 6-108 Remove the Paddle Shaft sub assembly paddles (2 of 6)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1769
3. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt.
Figure 6-109 Remove the Paddle Shaft sub assembly paddles (3 of 6)
4. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the bushing.
Figure 6-110 Remove the Paddle Shaft sub assembly paddles (4 of 6)
1770 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Lift up and remove the sub paddle shaft sub assembly.
Figure 6-111 Remove the Paddle Shaft sub assembly paddles (5 of 6)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1771
Step 3: Remove the staple position sensor assembly
1. Remove two screws from the front of the printer. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket
support.
Figure 6-112 Remove the stapler position sensor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two screws from the rear of the printer.
Figure 6-113 Remove the stapler position sensor (2 of 7)
1772 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Loosen three cable restraints. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the finisher sub-stay
bracket.
Figure 6-114 Remove the stapler position sensor (3 of 7)
4. Remove one screw from the front of the printer.
Figure 6-115 Remove the stapler position sensor (4 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1773
5. Remove one screw from the rear of the printer.
Figure 6-116 Remove the stapler position sensor (5 of 7)
6. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable restraints, and then unplug the FFC cable.
NOTE: The FFC is glued to the support bracket. However, the sensors can be replaced without removal of
the FFC.
Reinstallation tip: Connect the sensors, lock the cable restraints, and then connect the FCC.
Figure 6-117 Remove the stapler position sensor (6 of 7)
1774 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
7. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-118 Remove the stapler position sensor (7 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1775
Traverse Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the traverse motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Traverse Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Traverse Motor assembly part number
JC93-00999A Traverse Motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1776 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-119 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-120 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1777
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-121 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-122 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
1778 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-123 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1779
Step 2: Remove the traverse motor
1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the finisher sub-staple travers.
Figure 6-124 Remove the traverse motor (1 of 2)
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-125 Remove the traverse motor (2 of 2)
3. Use the following steps when reinstalling the traverse motor:
a. Apply tension to the spring by pushing toward the center of the printer, and then tighten the screw.
Tightening the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.
b. Lower the motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley.
c. Secure the bracket with three screws.
d. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt.
e. Tighten the screw.
1780 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Stacker Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stacker motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Keyboardr assembly part number
JC90-01334B Stacker tray motor
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1781
Step 1: Remove the stacker motor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-126 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-127 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1782 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-128 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-129 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1783
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-130 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-131 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove Lower PBA cover.
1784 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-132 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-133 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1785
10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
Figure 6-134 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.
Figure 6-135 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)
1786 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
12. Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the stacker motor.
Figure 6-136 Remove the stacker motor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1787
Stacker Encoder Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly part number
0604-001415 Stacker Encoder Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1788 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the stacker encoder sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-137 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-138 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1789
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-139 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-140 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
1790 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-141 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-142 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1791
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-143 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-144 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)
1792 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
Figure 6-145 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.
Figure 6-146 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1793
12. Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-147 Remove the stacker encoder sensor
1794 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Stacker Lower Limit Switch
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly part number
JC90-01320A Stacker Lower Limit Switch assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1795
Step 1: Remove the stacker lower limit switch
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-148 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-149 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1796 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-150 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-151 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1797
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-152 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-153 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
1798 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-154 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-155 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1799
10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
Figure 6-156 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.
Figure 6-157 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)
1800 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
12. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-158 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (1 of 2)
13. Open three clamps, unplug the connector, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-159 Remove the stacker lower limit switch (2 of 2)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1801
Stack Beam Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stack Beam Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Stack Beam Sensor assembly part number
0603-001309 Stack Beam Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1802 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the stack beam sensor
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-160 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-161 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1803
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-162 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-163 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
1804 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-164 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-165 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1805
8. Remove two screws from both sides of the finisher sub-stacker plate. Remove the bracket, and then
remove the sensor.
Figure 6-166 Remove the stack beam sensor
1806 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Stack Position Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Stack Position Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Stack Position Sensor assembly part number
0603-001309 Stack Position Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1807
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-167 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-168 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1808 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-169 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-170 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1809
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-171 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
1810 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.
Figure 6-172 Remove the tray
2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.
Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.
Figure 6-173 Remove the sub-tray
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1811
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-174 Remove the PBA
4. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).
Figure 6-175 Remove the PBA
1812 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-176 Remove the sub-stacker plate
6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-177 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1813
7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.
Figure 6-178 Release the motor paddle sub assembly
8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness front.
Figure 6-179 Remove the guide harness front
1814 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-180 Release the finisher sub-motor tray
10. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-181 Remove one screw
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1815
11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.
Figure 6-182 Release the sensor
12. Do the following:
a. Disconnect the sensor.
b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
c. Remove the stack position sensor.
Figure 6-183 Remove the sensor
1816 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid assembly part number
JC33-00037A Solenoid TDS
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1817
Step 1: Remove the paper holding lever solenoid
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-184 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-185 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
1818 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the tray.
Figure 6-186 Remove the front jogger home sensor (1 of 15)
4. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.
NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second
wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack
and pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.
Figure 6-187 Remove the front jogger home sensor (2 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1819
5. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-188 Remove the front jogger home sensor (3 of 15)
6. Remove four screws from both sides.
Figure 6-189 Remove the front jogger home sensor (4 of 15)
7. Remove two screws and then remove lower PBA cover.
1820 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-190 Remove the front jogger home sensor (5 of 15)
9. Remove one screw and then remove the cable guide. Unplug the connector, and then remove the main
paddle home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-191 Remove the front jogger home sensor (6 of 15)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1821
10. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.
Figure 6-192 Remove the front jogger home sensor (7 of 15)
11. Remove the wire harness from the harness guide, remove three screws, and then remove the guide-
harness front.
NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.
Figure 6-193 Remove the front jogger home sensor (8 of 15)
1822 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
12. Remove one screw, and then remove stack lower limit switch bracket.
Figure 6-194 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)
13. Remove the second screw.
Figure 6-195 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1823
14. Disconnect one connector.
Figure 6-196 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)
15. Remove two screws on the solenoid bracket.
Figure 6-197 Remove the paper holding lever solenoid (1 of 4)
16. Disconnect the connector from the main board.
17. Remove the solenoid assembly.
1824 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Paper Support Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor
● Step 2: Remove the paper support motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Support Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Paper Support Motor assembly part number
JC93-01001A Paper Support Motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1825
Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.
Figure 6-198 Remove the tray
2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.
Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.
Figure 6-199 Remove the sub-tray
1826 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-200 Remove the PBA
4. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).
Figure 6-201 Remove the PBA
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1827
5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-202 Remove the sub-stacker plate
6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-203 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly
1828 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.
Figure 6-204 Release the motor paddle sub assembly
8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness front.
Figure 6-205 Remove the guide harness front
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1829
9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-206 Release the finisher sub-motor tray
10. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-207 Remove one screw
1830 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.
Figure 6-208 Release the sensor
12. Do the following:
a. Disconnect the sensor.
b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
c. Remove the stack position sensor.
Figure 6-209 Remove the sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1831
Step 2: Remove the paper support motor
1. Disconnect one connector.
2. Remove four screws.
3. Remove the cables from their restraints at the front of the ejector.
4. Disconnect the motor and the sensor cable at the rear
1832 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Remove the cables from the cable restraints at the rear.
NOTE: The black paddle is inside the chrome bracket at rear of ejector
6. Remove the ejector.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1833
Paper Support Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
● Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Support Home Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Paper Support Home Sensor assembly part number
0604-001415 Paper Support Home Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1834 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-210 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-211 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1835
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-212 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-213 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
1836 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-214 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1837
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.
Figure 6-215 Remove the tray
2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.
Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.
Figure 6-216 Remove the sub-tray
1838 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-217 Remove the PBA
4. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).
Figure 6-218 Remove the PBA
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1839
5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-219 Remove the sub-stacker plate
6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-220 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly
1840 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.
Figure 6-221 Release the motor paddle sub assembly
8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness front.
Figure 6-222 Remove the guide harness front
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1841
9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-223 Release the finisher sub-motor tray
10. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-224 Remove one screw
1842 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.
Figure 6-225 Release the sensor
12. Do the following:
a. Disconnect the sensor.
b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
c. Remove the stack position sensor.
Figure 6-226 Remove the sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1843
Step 3: Remove the paper support home sensor
1. Disconnect one connector.
2. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-227 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)
3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 6-228 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4)
1844 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
4. Remove the paper support with attention for pinion.
Figure 6-229 Remove the paper support home sensor (3 of 4)
5. Remove the sensor from the paper support.
Figure 6-230 Remove the paper support home sensor (4 of 4)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1845
Ejector Motor assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
● Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Ejector Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Ejector Motor assembly part number
JC90-01332A Ejector Motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1846 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-231 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-232 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1847
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-233 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-234 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
1848 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-235 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1849
Step 2: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.
Figure 6-236 Remove the tray
2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.
Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.
Figure 6-237 Remove the sub-tray
1850 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-238 Remove the PBA
4. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).
Figure 6-239 Remove the PBA
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1851
5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-240 Remove the sub-stacker plate
6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-241 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly
1852 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.
Figure 6-242 Release the motor paddle sub assembly
8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness front.
Figure 6-243 Remove the guide harness front
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1853
9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-244 Release the finisher sub-motor tray
10. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-245 Remove one screw
1854 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.
Figure 6-246 Release the sensor
12. Do the following:
a. Disconnect the sensor.
b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
c. Remove the stack position sensor.
Figure 6-247 Remove the sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1855
Step 3: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
1. Disconnect one connector on the paper support motor.
2. Remove one screw on the paper support home sensor.
Figure 6-248 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)
3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 6-249 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4)
1856 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
4. Remove the e-clip and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.
Figure 6-250 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6)
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).
5. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-251 Remove the ejector motor assembly (2 of 6)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1857
6. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two belt-timing gears, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-252 Remove two belt-timing gears
7. Remove the clip, remove the belt-timing gear, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-253 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw
1858 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
8. Remove the cable from restraint, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Remove the motor assembly.
Figure 6-254 Disconnect connectors
Figure 6-255 Remove the motor assembly
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1859
Main Paddle Motor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle Motor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Main Paddle Motor assembly part number
JC93-01001A Main Paddle Motor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1860 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the main paddle motor
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor assembly.
Figure 6-256 Remove the motor assembly
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-257 Remove the main paddle motor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1861
Main Paddle Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly part number
0604-001415 Main Paddle Home Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1862 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the main paddle home sensor
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove one screw. Open the clamp, and then remove the bracket-paddle sensor.
Figure 6-258 Remove the bracket-paddle sensor
3. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.
Figure 6-259 Remove the main paddle home sensor
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1863
Main Paddle
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the main paddle
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Main Paddle assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Main Paddle part number
JC63-04957A Main paddle A
JC63-04958A Main paddle B
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1864 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the main paddle
▲ Open the cover top tray sub assembly, and then remove the main paddle A unit and main paddle B unit.
Figure 6-260 Remove the main paddle
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1865
Ejector assembly
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor
● Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
● Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Ejector assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Ejector assembly part number
JC90-01332A Ejector assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1866 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the stack position sensor
1. Remove four screws, and then, remove the tray.
Figure 6-261 Remove the tray
2. Remove the finisher sub-tray frame by rotating the pulley.
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the device while assembling.
Hold the arms, and then drop the first wheel into the channel (on both sides). Simultaneously let the
second wheel rest on the channel (on both sides). Gently squeeze wheels into the channel. The rack and
pinion might need to be engaged several times to achieve a level assembly.
Figure 6-262 Remove the sub-tray
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1867
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the PBA cover.
Figure 6-263 Remove the PBA
4. Remove four screws.
NOTE: Also, remove two screws, and then remove the lower PBA cover (not shown).
Figure 6-264 Remove the PBA
1868 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
5. Disconnect two in-line connectors, and then, remove the finisher sub-stacker plate.
Figure 6-265 Remove the sub-stacker plate
6. Remove one screw, disconnect the connector, release the cable guide, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor sub assembly.
Figure 6-266 Remove the main paddle home sensor sub assembly
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1869
7. Remove three screws, disconnect the connector, and then release the motor paddle sub assembly.
NOTE: Move the wire harness out of the guide to access one screw.
Figure 6-267 Release the motor paddle sub assembly
8. Remove three screws, release the wire harness from the guide, and then remove the guide harness front.
Figure 6-268 Remove the guide harness front
1870 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
9. Remove three screws, disconnect two connectors, and then release the finisher sub-motor tray.
Figure 6-269 Release the finisher sub-motor tray
10. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-270 Remove one screw
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1871
11. Open three clamps, disconnect the connector, and then release the switch.
Figure 6-271 Release the sensor
12. Do the following:
a. Disconnect the sensor.
b. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
c. Remove the stack position sensor.
Figure 6-272 Remove the sensor
1872 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 2: Remove the paper ejector motor assembly
1. Disconnect one connector on the paper support motor.
2. Remove one screw on the paper support home sensor.
Figure 6-273 Remove the paper support home sensor (1 of 4)
3. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 6-274 Remove the paper support home sensor (2 of 4)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1873
4. Remove the e-clip and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.
Figure 6-275 Remove the ejector motor assembly (1 of 6)
Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).
5. Remove one screw.
Figure 6-276 Remove the ejector motor assembly (2 of 6)
1874 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
6. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two belt-timing gears, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-277 Remove two belt-timing gears
7. Remove the clip, remove the belt-timing gear, and then remove one screw.
Figure 6-278 Remove the belt-timing gear and one screw
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1875
8. Remove the cable from restraint, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Remove the motor assembly.
Figure 6-279 Disconnect connectors
Figure 6-280 Remove the motor assembly
1876 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 3: Remove the paper ejector assembly
1. Remove two screws.
Figure 6-281 Remove two screws
2. Unplug the harness, and then remove the ejector assembly.
Figure 6-282 Remove the ejector assembly
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1877
Punch Dust Full Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
● Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly part number
0604-001381 Punch Dust Full Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
1878 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Step 1: Remove the entrance motor covers
1. Remove the finisher sub cover front and the cover-rear.
a. Remove two screws in the front and one screw in the top-right of the finisher sub-cover front.
b. Remove the handle.
c. From the right side of the finisher sub-cover front, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to
remove the finisher sub-cover front.
d. Remove the cover-rear.
Figure 6-283 Remove the entrance motor (1 of 7)
2. Remove two shoulder screws at the rear of the printer, and then remove the finisher sub-cover middle and
finisher sub-cover compile by lifting off the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 6-284 Remove the entrance motor (2 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1879
3. On the front of the printer remove the e-ring and bushing. On the rear of the printer remove the e-ring,
pulley, bushing, belt, spring (slightly hidden from view), and then remove the guide reverse and roller feed.
Figure 6-285 Remove the entrance motor (3 of 7)
Figure 6-286 Remove the entrance motor (4 of 7)
1880 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
4. Remove six screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the sensor.
Figure 6-287 Remove the entrance motor (5 of 7)
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1881
Step 2: Remove the punch dust full sensor
1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly.
Figure 6-288 Remove the punch dust full sensor sub-assembly
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch dust full sensor.
Figure 6-289 Remove the punch dust full sensor
1882 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
End Fence Home Sensor
● Introduction
● Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove the End Fence Home Sensor assembly.
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts
End Fence Home Sensor assembly part number
0604-001381 End Fence Home Sensor assembly
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip
After performing service
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
ENWW Removal and replacment (inner finisher) 1883
Step 1: Remove the end fence home position sensor
1. Follow steps 1-5 in the traverse front home sensor disassembly procedure.
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 6-290 Remove the end fence home sensor
1884 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Problem solving
Control panel message document (CPMD)
Refer to Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview on page 1038 for more details.
ENWW Problem solving 1885
Block Diagram
1886 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
ENWW Block Diagram 1887
Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams
Sub-inner finisher
Figure 6-291 Sub-inner finisher
6-1
1888 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Table 6-7 Sub-inner finisher
Ref Description Part number Qty
Complete Inner innisher whole unit Y1G00-67901 1
1 Paper support JC90-01310A 1
2 Paper support, rear JC90-01311A 1
3 Alignment, front (Front Tamper) JC82-00899A 1
4 Alignment, rear (Rear Tamper JC82-00900A 1
5 Ejector unit assy JC90-01332A 1
6 Assy - stacker tray motor JC90-01334B 1
6-1 Handle - lock release JC66-04233A 1
7 Lower exit guide JC90-01336A 1
8 Tray JC90-01337B 1
10 Staple Y1G14-67901 1
11 IF punch dummy JC90-01343A 1
Not shown Harness, inisher to copier PWR JC39-02169A 1
Not shown Assy - Tray sensor kit JC82-01039A 1
Not shown Assy - Paddle kit JC82-01038A 1
ENWW Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams 1889
Sub 1 - Inner finisher
Figure 6-292 Sub 1- Inner finisher
1890 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Table 6-8 Finisher sub 1
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Cover, front JC90-01321B 1
2 Cover, middle JC90-01322B 1
3 Cover, compile JC90-01323B 1
4 Stacker plate JC90-01324B 1
4-1 IF Photo Interrupter 0603-001309 1
5 IF Cover, rear JC63-04750B 1
6 IF Cover PCA JC63-04792B 1
Not shown Lift motor JC31-00178B 1
ENWW Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams 1891
Sub 7 Inner finisher
Figure 6-293 Sub 7 - Inner finisher
1892 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Table 6-9 Sub 7 - Inner finisher
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Assy - inner finisher stapler JC90-01342A 1
1-1 Stapler assembly JC59-00040A 1
2 IF punch dummy JC90-01343A 1
2-1 Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 1
Not shown Staple cartridge – Inner finisher, booklet finisher Y1G14-67901 1
ENWW Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams 1893
Sub 8 - Inner finisher
Figure 6-294 Sub 8 - Inner finisher
1894 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
Table 6-10 Finisher sub 8
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Photo-interrupter 0604-001415 2
2 Inner finisher PCA JC92-02774B 1
4 Timing-belt, gear 6602-003644 1
5-1 Paddle absorber, rubber a JC63-04957A 2
5-2 Paddle absorber, rubber b JC63-04958A 2
8 Roller, feed-entrance JC66-04243A 2
10 Motor, entrance JC90-01344A 1
13 Actuator, feed sensor JC66-04199A 1
14 Actuator tray JC90-01313A 1
15 Sensor, actuator tray JC90-01314A 1
15-2 Solenoid TDS JC33-00037A 1
16 Tray lower limit JC90-01320A 1
16-3 Actuator tray limit JC66-04200A 1
17-1a Drive - motor step JC93-01001A 1
19-1 Roller, feed-exit JC66-04244A 1
19-2 Compile guide, front JC61-07449A 1
19-3 Compile guide, rear JC61-07450A 1
20-1 Motor - exit step JC31-00169B 1
21 Tray frame JC90-01319A 1
22 PCA inner finisher rear JC92-02780A 1
Not shown Inner Finisher Staple Unit JC81-07408B 1
Not shown Assy - paddle kit JC82-01038A 1
Not shown Assy - tray sensor kit JC82-01039A 1
ENWW Inner finisher Parts and Diagrams 1895
1896 Chapter 6 Inner finisher ENWW
A Glossary
● Glossary of terms
ENWW 1897
Glossary of terms
The following glossary includes terminology commonly used with printing, as well as terminology used in this
service manual.
802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g/n 802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11
Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper
for scanning.
BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is
usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP
servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless workstation”
computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. The CCD locking mechanism is also
used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.
Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an
entire set before printing additional copies.
Control Panel The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where control or monitoring instruments are
displayed. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.
Coverage Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage
means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has complicated
images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as
much as the coverage.
Default The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.
DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides
configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the
client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses
to client hosts.
DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all data within
the machine, such as printing data and received fax data.
DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI
results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on both
sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during one print
cycle.
Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the printer
has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs,
usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20
working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the
functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
ESD An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects
caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.
1898 Appendix A Glossary ENWW
Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring
and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data
link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.
FIH A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-party
devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.
Flow document feeder A flow document feeder is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper
so that the machine can scan both sides of the paper.
FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that
supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and
a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to make
sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser
printer.
Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very
popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to
grayscale. Colors are represented by various shades of gray.
Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large
number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device
which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.
IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and communicate
with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.
IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs, media
size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP also
supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing solution.
ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed
of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and commercial
standards.
JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for other
images.
JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.
LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.
LVPS - SMPS Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) / Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)
MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a
unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e.g., 00–00–0c-34–
11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by the manufacturer, and used
as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.
ENWW Glossary of terms 1899
MFP Multi Function Printer (MFP) is an office printer that includes multiple functionality in one physical body, such
as a printer, copier, fax, scanner, etc.
MHV Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage between
500 V and 5 kV).
Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier
signal to decode transmitted information.
OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit
containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced
appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and
paper.
Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.
PCA Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components must
be assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.
PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol.
PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has been released in
varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.
PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF represents
two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript (PS) PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in electronic and
desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
Print Media Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or copier.
PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the
number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.
Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between
two computing endpoints.
Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the resolution.
SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and
miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
Interprocess communication mechanism.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP is a
relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message are specified and the
message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the
server.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is
the network address and which part is the host address.
TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.
TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data
that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image
that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have
been made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used in laser
printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be fused by a
combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.
1900 Appendix A Glossary ENWW
TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-compliant
software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and
Apple Macintosh operating systems.
URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The first
part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the domain
name where the resource is located.
USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect
computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single
computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears ligher when viewed by transmitted light.
Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been used by papermakers to
identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document
format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic documents. It is an
XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-independent document format.
ENWW Glossary of terms 1901
1902 Appendix A Glossary ENWW
B Revision History
Revision History
Table B-1 Revision History
Revision
Number Revision Date Revision Notes
6.0 December, 2018 Added/updated E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.
Added or updated repair topics for the E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series:
● ADF whole unit (LX models) on page 730
● Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX/du models) on page 734
● Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX/du models) on page 740
● Document feeder (ADF) contact image sensor (CIS) (LX/du models) on page 747
● Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX/du models) on page 759
● Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX/du model) on page 768
● Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX/du models) on page 773
● Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX/du models) on page 781
● Document feeder feed motor (LX models) on page 788
● PCA-Scanner (LX/du models only) on page 794
● ADF white backing (LX/du bundles) on page 211
● Island of data (IOD; du models) on page 263
● Formatter (du models) on page 275
● Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models) on page 269
● Accelerator board (GX ADF only) on page 260
5.0 September, 2018 Added the E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.
Updated parts numbers throughout document to remove "SAM-" prefix and updated new part
numbers as identified.
4.0 July, 2018 Minor content edits (including graphics)
ENWW Revision History 1903
Table B-1 Revision History (continued)
Revision
Number Revision Date Revision Notes
3.0 November, 2017 Updated code data for Diagnostics and Service Functions
Replaced Product Overview with the UG-style Printer Views and removed the previous
“Machine external view” section.
Updated R&R TOC level to 1.
Replaced references to SAW with WISE and removed QR codes.
Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with the UG content
Moved specifications out of the appendix to the Product Specifications chapter
Added additional specification content to the Product Specifications chapter from the UG
Removed the lists of tables and figures and the alphabetical and numerical lists of parts
Replaced the glossary with the updated glossary from Topaz
Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the R&R sections for the main printer and both
finishers.
Removed the Samsung precaution sections
Updated part numbers, part descriptions, diagrams, and photos
Integrated over 250 new edits into existing content, including updated video links and part
numbers. Reformatted tables and resource pages, added xrefs, and changed critical
terminology.
2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels
Add error code and CPMD overview
Added “How to search for documentation” section.
Updated toner average yield data
Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2 JIS
1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release
1904 Appendix B Revision History ENWW
C Certificate of Volatility
ENWW 1905
Certificate of Volatility
Figure C-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 3)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E876XXdn X3A87A= E87640dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
X3A90A= E87650dn Boise, ID 83714
HP Color LaserJet Managed X3A93A= E87660dn
Flow MFP E876XX z X3A86A= E87640z
X3A89A= E87650z
X3A92A= E87660z
5CM64A = E87640du
5CM65A = E87650du
5CM66A = E87660du
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter Yes No Operation system and When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM 3GB- Obsidian print/scan buffer the memory is erased.
1 GB –Accel
board
4 GB - Main
Formatter
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear
backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP side: SPI Flash 4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data
data required for the device to
function. User modifications
are limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Samsung MSOK : Yes No TPM NVRAM - stores HP- Drive lock password can be
MSOK – TPM NVRAM 2 KB signed immutable ID certificate changed through the
MSOK – EEProm 32 KB and associated RSA key pair device embedded web
MSOK – CRUM 32 KB in locked memory. server interface.
EEProm - stores device No other data stored on the
lifecycle data (e.g. device page MSOK can be cleared.
counts), copy of device speed
license, and SED (self-
encrypting drive) drive lock
password.
CRUM - stores device page
counts, consumables
information, device speed
information, and product serial
number.
1906 Appendix C Certificate of Volatility ENWW
Figure C-2 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 3)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
2 – Hard Drives (1 – HP 320GB/ea Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Secure Storage Erase –
formatter & 1 – Main board) OS, applications, Areas temporary files and job
digitally signed firmware data by overwriting information
images, persistent data, overwriting information one or
and temporary data three times.
used for processing and 2. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
system functions. files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
3. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
Optional Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Optional Formatter HDD 500 500GB Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted
GB FIPS Encrypted HDD OS, applications, Disk – This changes the
digitally signed firmware Encryption keys rendering all
images, persistent data, data unreadable.
and temporary data 2. Secure Storage Erase –
used for processing and Areas temporary files and job
system functions. data by overwriting information
overwriting information one or
three times.
3. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
4. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities
ENWW Certificate of Volatility 1907
Figure C-3 Certificate of Volatility (3 of 3)
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected
channel in 2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n
Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
John Mast Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 9/14/2018
1908 Appendix C Certificate of Volatility ENWW
Index
A booklet finisher C
accelerator board removing and replacing 1562 C fold motor (M20)
after performing services 260 booklet finisher fold stopper unit removing and replacing 1620
before performing service 260 removing and replacing 1585 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
introduction 260 booklet finisher front cover panel 1147
post service test 260 removing and replacing 1560 card reader 297
remove the accelerator board booklet finisher PCA install 298
261 removing and replacing 1573 cassette 48
remove the formatter cover 261 booklet tray cassette lift drive 71
required tools 260 removing and replacing 1301 caster cover (finisher)
unpack the replacement bottom high-capacity input tray (HCI) removing and replacing 1304
assembly 262 unit caution for moving the scanner 87
accelerator board (GX ADF only) 260 bottom high-capacity input tray cautions iii
acoustic specifications 16 feed motor 990 CCDM PCA 129
ADF bottom high-capacity input tray certificate of volatility 1905
input tray 844 lift-up motor 998 Channel partners support
jam access cover 824 bottom high-capacity input tray HP Channel Services Network
ADF LX/du PCA 1004 (CSN) 144
PCA-ADF (LX/du models only) bottom high-capacity input tray checklists
794 pickup motor 993 after-service 148, 1259, 1701
ADF pickup roller 836 bottom high-capacity input tray preservice 148, 1258, 1701
ADF reverse roller 858 shaft motor 996 cleaning
ADF sGX bottom high-capacity input tray feed laser scanner assembly 150
PCA-ADF sGX (DN models only) motor 990 cleaning page 1148
909 bottom high-capacity input tray lift-up cleaning the flow ADF white bar and
after-service checklist 148, 1259, motor 998 CIS 156
1701 bottom high-capacity input tray PCA cleaning the paper dust stick 151
alienation motor 515 1004 cleaning the scan glass 154
APS sensor 935 bottom high-capacity input tray pickup clear paper jams 1151, 1627
motor 993 component test
B bottom high-capacity input tray shaft special mode test 1056
backup error motor 996 components
32.WX.YZ error 1038 bridge unit 327 diagnostic tests 1056
reset error 1038 remove the bridge unit 328 scanning system 81
restore error 1038 buffer motor, gear, and sensor (M3) configuration
blade motor (M19) removing and replacing 1472 configuration options 35
removing and replacing 1616 BYOD table connection diagrams 1235
booklet feed entrance motor (M13) card reader 298 connector error
removing and replacing 1597 NFC kit 298 65.WX.YZ error 1039
ENWW Index 1909
control panel 283 developer fan 320 drum drive 57
after performing service 283 developer unit 58, 178 dual cassette feeder 131
Backup/Restore menu 1147 diagnostics dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor
before performing service 283 adjustment 1187 952, 979
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 1147 component 1056 dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 970
Copy menu (MFP only) 1125 engine 1054, 1165 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
CPMD 1038 fax 1178 assembly 958
Fax menu (fax models only) image management 1193 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
1138 LED 1052 motor 956
introduction 283 print test patterns 1194 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
post service test 284 scanner 1183 units 960
Print menu 1142 diagram dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
remove the control panel 284 fuser 1236 door 946
remove the control panel bezel HVPS/LVPS/FDB 1241 dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
284 laser scanner assembly 1238 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Reports menu 1079 OPC 1240 motor 952, 956, 958, 979
required tools 283 scanner 1237 dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
Scan menu (MFP only) 1130 side/Tray 1/feed/registration/ 970
Settings menu 1082 pickup 1239 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
Supplies menu 1143 diagrams units 960
Trays menu 1144 finisher system 1641 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
troubleshooting menu 1145 diagrams, connection 969 door 946
unpack the replacement digital sending error (firmware) dummy feed guide
assembly 285 44.WX.YZ error 1039 removing and replacing 1355
USB Firmware Upgrade menu document conventions iii duplex 1 sensor 362
1150 document feeder duplexer error
control panel diagnostic flowcharts document feeder input tray (LX/du 69.WX.YZ error 1039
1047 models) 740
control panel menus 1079 document feeder error E
controller PCA (finisher) 31.WX.YZ error 1038 each unit functions
removing and replacing 1337 document feeder pick roller (LX/du finisher system 1254
conventions, document iii models) 768 ejector unit
Copy menu (MFP only), control document feeder pickup 836 removing and replacing 1385
panel 1125 document feeder reverse roller 781 electrical parts layout
copy specifications 23 document feeder skew (LX du finisher system layout 1249
CRUM connector 353 models) 1229 electrical specifications 16
CST lock diagram 1240 drive system 71 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 147,
current settings pages 1060 cassette lift drive 71 1259, 1262, 1701, 1704
drive motors 74 Embedded Jetdirect error
D engage transfer roller drive 78 80.WX.YZ error 1039
DC controller communication error exit drive 74 engine
55.WX.YZ error 1039 feed drive 72 diagnostics 1054
DC controller firmware error fuser release drive 74 engine error (LaserJet)
70.WX.YZ error 1039 main drive unit motor 76 46.WX.YZ error 1039
DCF 131 pickup drive 71 63.WX.YZ error 1039
decoding registration drive 73 engine error (PageWide)
message 1038 toner collection unit drive 78 61.WX.YZ error 1039
defeating toner reservoir drive 77 eraser PCA 126
interlocks 1054 toner supply drive 77 error
determine problem source 1043 drivers, supported 13 fault 1038
1910 Index ENWW
ESD electrostatic discharge (ESD) each unit functions 1254 formatter hard disk drive 272
147, 1259, 1262, 1701, 1704 electrical parts layout 1249 after performing service 269,
event log 1060 finisher sectional view 1244 272
clear using touchscreen control paper path 1248 before performing service 269,
panel 1061 PCA connection information 272
event log error (firmware) 1255 introduction 269, 272
42.WX.YZ error 1038 firmware communication error post service test 270, 273
exit 1 bin full sensor 372 49.WX.YZ error 1039 remove the formatter cover 270,
exit cover 605 firmware install error 273
exit drive 74 99.WX.YZ error 1039 remove the hard disk drive 270,
exit drive unit 508 hard disk error 1039 273
exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor remote firmware upgrade error required tools 269, 272
404 1039 unpack the replacement
exit unit 221 flatbed scanner system assembly 271, 274
duplex 1 sensor 362 overview 79 formatter hard disk drive (du
exit 1 bin full sensor 372 flow ADF models) 269
return sensor 414 contact image sensor (CIS) 862 formatter lights 1052
contact image sensor (CIS) fan front cover 590
F 895 open sensor 428
fan error document feeder PCA fan 883 front cover (finisher)
58.WX.YZ error 1039 front motor 889 removing and replacing 1284
Fax menu (fax models only), control rear motors 870 front cover open sensor 428
panel 1138 scan in lower assembl 901 front door (finisher)
feed 2 sensor 688 ultrasonic sensor with PCA 811 removing and replacing 1272
feed drive 72 white backing (GX) 213 front lower cover (finisher)
feed drive unit or motor 524 whole unit 806 removing and replacing 1292
feed entrance motor (M1) flow ADF PCA 127 front power cover 600
removing and replacing 1460 flow ADF skew (LX du models) 1229 front power switch 303
feed exit motor (M2) folding roller motor (M18) front tamper motor (M6)
removing and replacing 1466 removing and replacing 1610 removing and replacing 1480
feed roller formatter 279 front tamper unit
multipurpose 699 after performing service 275, removing and replacing 1410
Tray 1 699 279 front top inner cover 603
feeding system 43 before performing service 275, fuser diagram 1236
cassette 48 279 fuser drive assembly 121
main components and functions introduction 275, 279 fuser drive board 233
44 locating 3 fuser drive unit 508
overview 43 post service test 276, 280 fuser error
pickup unit 49 remove the accelerator board 41.WX.YZ error 1038
registration unit 49 280 laser scanner error 1038
rollers 44 remove the formatter PCA 281 paper path error 1038
sensor, motor, and solenoid 46 remove the hard-disk drive 276, fuser error (LaserJet)
Tray 1 feeder assembly 50 281 50.WX.YZ error 1039
feeding system information 43 required tools 275, 279 fuser fan 241
FIH unpack the replacement fuser out sensor 682
HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) assembly 277, 282 fuser PCA 126
solution, install 295 formatter (dt models) 275 fuser release drive 74
finisher sectional view 1244 formatter (du models) fuser unit 52, 230
finisher system 1244 remove the formatter PCA (du fuser unit drive 53
diagrams 1641 models) 277
ENWW Index 1911
overview 52 HP Jetdirect print server software version 1163
temperature control 53 lights 1052 supply status 1163
fuser unit drive 53 HVPS PCA 122 inner finisher
fuser unit temperature control 53 HVPS/LVPS/FDB diagram 1241 block diagram 1886
ejector assembly 1866
G I ejector motor assembly 1846
General Settings menu, control image creation 56 end fence home sensor 1883
panel 1082 drum drive 57 entrance motor 1709
general specifications 16 imaging unit 57 entrance sensor 1705
intermediate transfer belt unit 61 exit motor 1720
H overview 56 exit sensor 1715
hard disk drive (HDD) 248 toner cartridge 60 front jogger home sensor 1735
hard disk partition error toner reservoir unit 63 front jogger motor 1723
98.WX.YZ error 1039 transfer belt drive 62 main paddle 1864
hardware configuration 102 image quality main paddle home sensor 1862
CCDM PCA 129 black band, vertical 1202 main paddle motor 1860
eraser PCA 126 blank copy 1212 paper holding lever solenoid
flow ADF PCA 127 blurred image 1208 1817
fuser drive assembly 121 color registration, inccorect 1209 paper support home sensor
fuser PCA 126 duplex blur 1215 1834
high voltage power supply PCA flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du paper support motor 1825
122 models) 1229 punch dust full sensor 1878
low voltage power supply PCA foggy image 1206 rear jogger home sensor 1756
(Type 3R) 118 jitter image 1209 rear jogger motor 1747
low voltage power supply PCA light band, vertical 1203 remove and replace 1703
(Type 4) 120 light image 1207 stack beam sensor 1802
low voltage power supply PCA periodic black band, horizontal stack position sensor 1807
(Type 5) 116 1205 stacker encoder sensor 1788
LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 118 periodic black dot, horizontal stacker lower limit switch 1795
LVPS PCA (Type 4) 120 1205 stacker motor 1781
LVPS PCA (Type 5) 116 periodic light/dark band, stapler 1762
main controller 104 horizontal 1205 stapler position sensor
master system operation key periodic light/dark dot, assembly 1765
111 horizontal 1205 traverse motor 1776
scan joint PCA 128 poor fusing 1213 inner front cover 593
WLED IF PCA 129 skewed image 1210 input accessory error
WLED PCA 130 stain on back 1214 67.WX.YZ error 1039
hardware integration pocket (HIP) is uneven pitch 1209 input/output error
not functioning 1052 white band, vertical 1203 40.WX.YZ error 1038
HCI 135 white spot blur 1215 install
high capacity input tray 135 imaging drum unit 292 HP Foreign interface harness (FIH)
high voltage power supply (HVPS) imaging unit 57 solution 295
board 166 developer unit 58 interlocks
high voltage power supply PCA 122 overview 57 defeating 1054
home button is unresponsive 1051 individual component diagnostics intermediate paper transport unit
HP Channel Services Network (CSN) 1052 after performing service 327
Channel partners support 144 inductor unit 329 before performing service 327
HP Foreign interface harness (FIH), information introduction 327
install 295 general 1163 post service test 327
print reports 1164
1912 Index ENWW
required tools 327 job management error low voltage power supply PCA (Type
unpack the replacement (firmware) 1039 3R) 118
asembly 328 job pipeline error (firmware) low voltage power supply PCA (Type
intermediate transfer belt 1039 4) 120
cleaning 62 job parser error (firmware) low voltage power supply PCA (Type
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 47.WX.YZ error 1039 5) 116
cleaner 187 printer calibration error 1039 lower rear cover 614
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit lower shield assembly
191 K removing and replacing 1308
intermediate transfer belt unit keyboard (z bundles) 287 lower tray connector 316
overview 61 after performing service 287 LVPS 220 V 237
internal diagnostics error before performing service 287 LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 118
90.WX.YZ error 1039 introduction 287 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 120
video display error 1039 post service test 288 LVPS PCA (Type 5) 116
interpret control-panel messages and remove the control-panel 288 LVPS type 4 311
event log entries 1627, 1885 remove the control-panel bezel
IOD 266 288 M
IOD (du models) 263 remove the keyboard 289 machine cleaning for maintenance
island of data 266 required tools 287 150
after performing service 263, unpack the replacement cleaning the flow ADF white bar
266 assembly 290 and CIS 156
before performing service 263, cleaning the flow ADF white bar
266 L and CIS (LX/du model) 156
introduction 263, 266 laser scanner assembly 65, 170 cleaning the paper dust stick 151
post service test 263, 266 cleaning 150 cleaning the scan glass 154
remove the formatter cover 264, CPR adjustment 67 main board 252
267 laser scanning optical path 65 main controller
remove the island of data 264, laser synchronizing detectors 66 hardware configuration 104
267 maintenance 150 new model (IR/UI) 108
required tools 263, 266 overview 65 previous model 105
unpack the replacement laser scanner assembly diagram main drive unit 484
assembly 265, 268 1238 main tray moving motor (M11)
island of data (dt models) 263 laser scanner assembly fan 175 removing and replacing 1550
ITB cleaning 62 laser scanner error (LaserJet) maintenance 150
ITB unit 61 51.WX.YZ error 1039 laser scanner assembly 150
overview 61 52.WX.YZ error 1039 machine cleaning for
LED lamp module 922 maintenance 150
J LEDs. See lights maintenance counts
jam error (LaserJet) left cover 620 part replacement count 1164
13.WX.YZ error 1038 left rear corner cover 608 maintenance parts 26
jam error (PageWide) lights master system operation key 111
13.WX.YZ error 1038 formatter 1052 memory
jams troubleshooting with 1052 included 8
locations 1151 low voltage power supply (LVPS) memory error
Jetdirect print server LVPS type 5H 237 82.WX.YZ error 1039
lights 1052 low voltage power supply (LVPS) EMMC error 1039
job accounting error (firmware) fans 307 hard disk error 1039
48.WX.YZ error 1039 low voltage power supply (LVPS) type menu map 1060
4 menus, control panel
LVPS type 4 311 Calibrate/Cleaning 1147
ENWW Index 1913
Copy (MFP only) 1125 output unit booklet finisher 7 1654
Fax (fax models only) 1138 exit gate solenoid/motors/ cover 588
General Settings 1082 sensor 404 cover f bm (finisher) 1684
Manage Trays 1144 OXPd/Web kit error curl pawl (finisher) 1656
Print 1142 45.WX.YZ error 1039 curl pawl motor (finisher) 1656
Reports 1079 DCF frame 968
Scan (MFP only) 1130 P DCF main 944
Supplies 1143 page error DCF rear frame 973
motor error (LaserJet) 21.WX.YZ error 1038 DCF second pickup 983
59.WX.YZ error 1039 pages per minute 8 div cam (finisher) 1676
MSOK 111 paper dust brush 184 door (finisher) 1672
multipurpose feeder assembly 50 paper handling error (LaserJet) drive buffer (finisher) 1664
56.WX.YZ error 1039 drive system 482
N paper handling specifications 27 Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 944
Near Field Communication error paper jams entrance guide (finisher) 1660,
81.WX.YZ error 1039 locations 1151 1674
Bluetooth error 1039 paper path entrance motor (finisher) 1662
external I/O card error 1039 finisher system 1248 FD stopper unit (finisher) 1666
internal EIO error 1039 paper size sensor 480, 975 finisher sub 1 1890
wireless error 1039 parts and accessories 1259, 1702 finisher sub 8 1894
network and software specifications parts and diagrams finisher sub booklet 1686
33 2000-sheet HCI (department) Flow ADF (GX/sGX) 802
network interface 33 986 Flow ADF image scanner 918
networks 2K HCI cassette 1000 Flow ADF image scanner, lower
supported 8 2K HCI drive 988 930
NFC kit 297 2K HCI main 986 Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
install 298 2K HCI main pickup 1007 855
no control panel sound 1050 2KHCI frame 1002 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 841
notes iii 3000-sheet sHCI Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)
(departmentdepartment; 832
O E82540/50/60 onl) 1010 fold roller (finisher) 1668
OPC diagram 1240 3K HCI main 3 1017 front alignment (tamper)
OPE diagram 1238 3K HCI main 5 1029 (finisher) 1678
operating systems, supported 13 3K HCI main 6 1031 hb motor (finisher) 1676
option specifications 38 3K sHCI frame 1035 hb motor, floor standing finisher
options list 37 3K sHCI main 1 1010 1658
ordering 1259, 1702 ADF (LX/du models) 728 idle fold (finisher) 1684
other errors ADF exterior (LX/du models) 766 idle fold paddle(finisher) 1684
drive unit 1223 ADF main frame (LX/du models) inner finisher 1888
electrical circuit 1225 779 IPTU (bridge) 1688
feeding system 1223 ADF open cover (GX/sGX) 820 jam clear (finisher) 1666
flow ADF 1220 ADF pickup (LX/du models) 766 low exit, floor standing finisher
fuser 1218 alignment (finisher) 1662 1658
image system 1215 BKT main blade (finisher) 1666 low paddle (finisher) 1662
laser scanner assembly 1225 booklet finisher 1 1642 main assembly 158
scanner 1220 booklet finisher 2 1644 main blade (finisher) 1668
output accessory error booklet finisher 3 1646 main exit (finisher) 1674
66.WX.YZ error 1039 booklet finisher 4 1648 main frame assembly 426
booklet finisher 5 1650 main frame pickup 1 546
booklet finisher 6 1652 main frame pickup 2 546
1914 Index ENWW
main parts 158 pickup lifting and empty sensor 557, R
mid jam (finisher) 1674 574 real-time clock error
Opt feed drive (DCF) 977 pickup roller 11.WX.YZ error 1038
paddle motor (finisher) 1662, ADF 836 rear cover (finisher)
1676 multipurpose 699 removing and replacing 1279
PCA bm (finisher) 1684 Tray 1 699 rear tamper motor (M7)
pickup cover unit (sHCI) 1033 pickup unit 49 removing and replacing 1506
rear alignment (tamper) pickup unit 1 548 rear tamper unit
(finisher) 1680 pickup lifting and empty sensor removing and replacing 1435
rear frame assembly 478 557 registration assembly 442
registration assembly 440 prefeed sensor 1 392 registration drive 73
registration guide (finisher) 1672 pickup unit 2 567 registration drive assembly 537
right door 627 pickup lifting and empty sensor registration pickup diagram 1239
right door guide 722 574 registration sensor assembly 452
right door side exit 724 prefeed sensor 2 384 registration unit 49
right jam (finisher) 1676 plastic latches information 148, removal and replacement
SCU motor (finisher) 1660 1258 right top cover (finisher) 1265
shield (finisher) 1682 post-service tests 149, 1259, 1701 removal and replacement
STK motor (finisher) 1660 power precautions 147, 1257
Sub 7 - Inner finisher 1892 consumption 16 removal order
sub-inner finisher 1888 power subsystem 1043 removing order 149
sub-main frame pickup 582 power supply remove and replace
T2 transfer assembly 726 troubleshooting 1043 inner finisher 1703
three fold blade (finisher) 1670 power-on troubleshooting overview removing and replacing
three fold exit (finisher) 1656 1043 blade motor (M19) 1616
three fold motor (finisher) 1656 pre-boot menu options 1062 booklet feed entrance motor
toner reservoir (CMYK) 465 precations (M13) 1597
top cover (finisher) 1672 information 147, 1257 booklet finisher 1562
top door (finisher) 1672 prefeed sensor 1 392 booklet finisher fold stopper unit
top frame (finisher) 1668 prefeed sensor 2 384 1585
top guide, floor standing finisher preservice checklist 148, 1258, booklet finisher front cover 1560
1658 1701 booklet finisher PCA 1573
top jam (finisher) 1664 print bar error (PageWide) booklet tray 1301
top lower (finisher) 1664 62.WX.YZ error 1039 buffer motor, gear, and sensor
transfer buffer (finisher) 1676 print drivers, supported 13 (M3) 1472
parts, diagrams, removal and Print menu, control panel 1142 C fold motor (M20) 1620
replacement 143 print quality caster cover (finisher) 1304
PCA connection information test 149, 1259, 1701 controller PCA (finisher) 1337
finisher system 1255 print quality troubleshooting 1198 dummy feed guide 1355
PCA precautions 147, 1257 flow ADF skew adjust 1231 ejector unit 1385
PCA-ADF (LX/du models only) 794 image quality 1198 feed entrance motor (M1) 1460
PCA-ADF sGX (DN models only) 909 other errors 1215 feed exit motor (M2) 1466
pick roller print specifications 19 folding roller motor (M18) 1610
document feeder (LX/du model) Print Test Page 1095 front cover (finisher) 1284
768 printer memory error front door (finisher 1272
pick/feed separation roller 584 20.WX.YZ error 1038 front lowercover (finisher) 1292
pickup drive 71 Process Cleaning Page 1148 front tamper motor (M6) 1480
pickup drive (tray 2) 341 product number front tamper unit 1410
pickup drive tray 3 527 locating 3 lower shield assembly 1308
ENWW Index 1915
main tray moving motor (M11) fuser drive unit 508 Tray 1 paper length sensor 664
1550 hard disk drive (HDD) 248 Tray 1 solenoid 703
rear cover (finisher) 1279 high voltage power supply (HVPS) Tray 1 unit 629
rear tamper motor (M7) 1506 board 166 right door switch assembly 334
rear tamper unit 1435 inductor unit 329 right rear cover 611
SCU motor (M10) 1532 inner front cover 593 right top cover (finisher)
separate pawl motor (M17) 1607 laser scanner assembly 170 removal and replacement 1265
stapler unit 1343 laser scanner assembly fan 175
stopper moving motor (M16) left cover 620 S
1603 left rear corner cover 608 scan joint PCA 128
TE presser motor (M14) 1600 low voltage power supply (LVPS) Scan menu (MFP only), control panel
top cover (finisher) 1268 fans 307 1130
top jam access cover 1361 lower rear cover 614 scan specifications 21
top lower feed assembly 1372 lower tray connector 316 scanner
top output bin 1263 main drive unit 484 caution for moving 87
upper shield assembly 1321 paper dust brush 184 imaging unit 932
removing parts pickup drive (tray 2) 341 scanner glass 920
checklists 148, 1258, 1701 pickup drive tray 3 527 scanner assembly CDD and lens 932
replacement of maintenance parts pickup unit 1 548 scanner diagram 1237
ADF pickup roller assembly 836 pickup unit 2 567 scanner error
developer unit 178 registration assembly 442 30.WX.YZ error 1038
flow ADF separation roller registration drive assembly 537 scanner glass 920
assembly 858 registration sensor assembly scanning system
fuser unit 230 452 components 81
imaging drum unit 292 reservoir unit 467 scanning system components 81
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) right door 216 SCU motor (M10)
cleaner 187 right door switch assembly 334 removing and replacing 1532
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) right rear cover 611 security
unit 191 toner collection unit (TCU) drive dynamic secuirty 61
multipurpose (MP) tray pickup/ 530 dynamic security 61
reverse/feed roller 699 toner collection unit (TCU) security error
pick/feed separation roller 584 sensors 346 33.WX.YZ error 1038
toner collection unit 164 toner reservoir motors 500 sensor error
replacing the main toner supply drive unit 492 54.WX.YZ error 1039
fuser fan 241 toner supply motors 500 58.WX.YZ error 1039
replacing the main SVC part 252 top right cover 623 separate pawl motor (M17)
alienation motor 515 Tray 1 drive unit 524 removing and replacing 1607
bridge unit 327 tray closing assembly 435 serial number
CRUM connector 353 upper rear cover 617 locating 3
developer fan 320 Reports menu, control panel 1079 service and support information
exit cover 605 reservoir unit 467 WISE and CSN 144
exit drive unit 508 return sensor 414 service approach 147, 1257, 1701
exit unit 221 reverse roller service functions
feed 2 sensor 688 ADF 858 capture log 1195
feed drive unit 524 document feeder 781 debug log 1195
front cover 590 multipurpose 699 drain 1197
front power cover 600 Tray 1 699 envelope rotate 1196
front power switch 303 right door 216 main memory clear 1194
front top inner cover 603 fuser out sensor 682 transfer assembly control 1195
fuser drive board 233 Tray 1 empty sensor 646
1916 Index ENWW
service mode 1157 standard (LX/du model) document top lower feed assembly
diagnostics 1165 feeder (ADF) removing and replacing 1372
entering service mode 1157 document feeder (ADF) contact top output bin
information 1163 image sensor (CIS; LX/du removing and replacing 1263
maintenance counts 1164 model) 747 top right cover 623
mode menu tree 1158 standard (LX/du models) document touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no
service functions 1194 feeder (ADF) image) 1048
sHCI 139 document feeder (ADF) jam access touchscreen has an unresponsive
side high capacity input (sHCI) cover (LX/du models) 734 zone 1049
feed motor 1022 stapler unit transfer belt drive 62
lift-up motor 1026 removing and replacing 1343 Tray 1
pickup motor 1019 static, precautions for 147, 1259, jams, clearing 1151
rear cover 1012 1262, 1701, 1704 Tray 1 drive unit 524
sHCI PCA 1014 stopper moving motor (M16) Tray 1 empty sensor 646
side high capacity input tray 139 removing and replacing 1603 Tray 1 paper length sensor 664
size sensor 480, 975 supplies 1259, 1702 Tray 1 solenoid 703
software and solutions 34 supplies error (LaserJet) Tray 1 unit 629
specifications 8 10.WX.YZ error 1038 Tray 2
copy specifications 23 supplies error (PageWide) jams, clearing 1152
electrical and acoustic 16 17.WX.YZ error 1038 Tray 3
general specifications 16 Supplies menu, control panel 1143 jams, clearing 1152
maintenance parts 26 system error (LaserJet) tray closing assembly 435
network interface 33 62.WX.YZ error 1039 tray motor error (LaserJet)
network specifications 33 system requirements 60.WX.YZ error 1039
options 35 minimum 14 tray selection - use requested tray
options list 37 1096
paper handling specifications 27 T trays
print specifications 19 TCU drive 78 capacity 8
scan specifications 21 TE presser motor (M14) included 8
software and solutions 34 removing and replacing 1600 jams, clearing 1152
software specifications 33 tests Trays menu, control panel 1144
supplies 25 post-service 149, 1259, 1701 troubleshooting
standard (du bundles) document print-quality 149, 1259, 1701 checklist 1057
feeder tips iii control panel checks 1047
document feeder white backing toner cartridge 60 lights, using 1052
211 toner collection unit 164 power 1043
standard (du models) document toner collection unit (TCU) drive 530 process 1043
feeder toner collection unit (TCU) sensors
document feeder whole unit 730 346 U
standard (LX bundles) document toner reservoir motors 500 understand lights on the formatter
feeder toner reservoir unit 63 formatter lights 1052
document feeder feed motor main function 63 understand the lights on the formatter
788 troubleshooting 64 HP Jetdirect LEDs 1053
standard (LX/du bundles) document working mechanism 63 unit, bridge 327
feeder toner supply drive unit 492 upper rear cover 617
document feeder (ADF) PCA 773 toner supply motors 500 upper shield assembly
standard (LX/du model) document top cover (finisher) removing and replacing 1321
feeder removing and replacing 1268 USB diagram 1238
document feeder main motor top jam access cover Use Requested Tray 1096
759 removing and replacing 1361
ENWW Index 1917
W
warnings iii
Web-based Interactive Search Engine
WISE 144
WISE
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine 144
WLED IF PCA 129
WLED PCA 130
working table
card reader 298
NFC kit 298
WTB diagram 1240
1918 Index ENWW
You might also like
- HP Color LaserJet E87640 E87650 E87660 Service Manual 66abd4d625f22No ratings yetHP Color LaserJet E87640 E87650 E87660 Service Manual 66abd4d625f222,504 pages
- HP CLJ Ent m652 m653 MFP m681 MFP m682 RepairNo ratings yetHP CLJ Ent m652 m653 MFP m681 MFP m682 Repair1,816 pages
- HP Color Laserjet Managed MFP E87640 Series HP Color Laserjet Managed MFP E87650 Series HP Color Laserjet Managed MFP E87660 SeriesNo ratings yetHP Color Laserjet Managed MFP E87640 Series HP Color Laserjet Managed MFP E87650 Series HP Color Laserjet Managed MFP E87660 Series3,040 pages
- HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting ManualNo ratings yetHP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Troubleshooting Manual820 pages
- HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Service Manual100% (1)HP Color LaserJet Managed E877, E87740, E87750, E87760, E87770 - Service Manual3,778 pages
- Control Panel Message Document (CPMD)- HP LaserJet Pro M501HP LaserJet Enterprise M506, M507HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M527, M528HP LaserJet Managed E50145, MFP E52645HP LaserJet Managed E50045, MFP E52545No ratings yetControl Panel Message Document (CPMD)- HP LaserJet Pro M501HP LaserJet Enterprise M506, M507HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M527, M528HP LaserJet Managed E50145, MFP E52645HP LaserJet Managed E50045, MFP E52545312 pages
- Epson Stylus Pro 7900 7910 9900 9910 PDFNo ratings yetEpson Stylus Pro 7900 7910 9900 9910 PDF356 pages
- HP Color LaserJet Managed E786, E78625, E78630, E78635 - Service ManualNo ratings yetHP Color LaserJet Managed E786, E78625, E78630, E78635 - Service Manual3,247 pages
- HP CLJ Ent m652 m653 MFP m681 MFP m682 TroubleshootingNo ratings yetHP CLJ Ent m652 m653 MFP m681 MFP m682 Troubleshooting418 pages
- Service and Supporting Training E786-E73130No ratings yetService and Supporting Training E786-E73130168 pages
- HP PageWide Enterprise Color MFP586 SeriesNo ratings yetHP PageWide Enterprise Color MFP586 Series4 pages
- Pantum M5000-6000 Series Maintain Manual - EN100% (1)Pantum M5000-6000 Series Maintain Manual - EN114 pages
- Updated Error Codes m607 m608 m609 CPMD 3.2020No ratings yetUpdated Error Codes m607 m608 m609 CPMD 3.2020242 pages
- HP Designjet Z2100 Series Service Manual Toc PDF100% (2)HP Designjet Z2100 Series Service Manual Toc PDF7 pages
- Subject: Bulletin Index 09/13/21: Technical Bulletin Taskalfa 4004I/5004I/6004I/7004INo ratings yetSubject: Bulletin Index 09/13/21: Technical Bulletin Taskalfa 4004I/5004I/6004I/7004I43 pages
- 1182 imageRUNNER ADVANCE DX C5800 PC r0 210301No ratings yet1182 imageRUNNER ADVANCE DX C5800 PC r0 210301211 pages
- ECOSYS M2030dn M2530dn M2035dn M2535dn SM UK60% (5)ECOSYS M2030dn M2530dn M2035dn M2535dn SM UK273 pages
- HP PageWide Managed Color MFP E776 P779 P774 Service Cost Data c05836998No ratings yetHP PageWide Managed Color MFP E776 P779 P774 Service Cost Data c0583699824 pages
- HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Repair Manual 1100% (1)HP LaserJet Enterprise M855 M880 Flow MFP Repair Manual 1760 pages
- Efi Fiery Xerox Exi c60c70 v2 FPP Ds en Us PDF100% (1)Efi Fiery Xerox Exi c60c70 v2 FPP Ds en Us PDF2 pages
- ImageRUNNER ADVANCE DX C3900 Series Installation Manual - en - 6.0No ratings yetImageRUNNER ADVANCE DX C3900 Series Installation Manual - en - 6.0495 pages
- Bizhub c554 c454 c364 c284 c224 - Quick Guide - en - 1 1 0No ratings yetBizhub c554 c454 c364 c284 c224 - Quick Guide - en - 1 1 0138 pages
- HP LaserJet Managed MFP E731 Series CPMDNo ratings yetHP LaserJet Managed MFP E731 Series CPMD942 pages
- HP LaserJet Enterprise M607 - M608 - M609. MFP M631 Repair Manual - EnWW.1100% (1)HP LaserJet Enterprise M607 - M608 - M609. MFP M631 Repair Manual - EnWW.1500 pages
- CLX-6260FD SEE Exploded View Parts List PDFNo ratings yetCLX-6260FD SEE Exploded View Parts List PDF31 pages
- 08 - 2018 Printing - Premiere Support NewsletterNo ratings yet08 - 2018 Printing - Premiere Support Newsletter9 pages
- HP LJ Managed MFP E82540 82550 82560 Series Service Manual67% (3)HP LJ Managed MFP E82540 82550 82560 Series Service Manual1,568 pages
- HP Color Laserjet MFP E77822, E77825, E77830 HP Color Laserjet MFP E77822, E77825, E77830No ratings yetHP Color Laserjet MFP E77822, E77825, E77830 HP Color Laserjet MFP E77822, E77825, E778302,134 pages
- HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535 - Service Manual c05409827 PDF50% (4)HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535 - Service Manual c05409827 PDF1,522 pages
- E87640 60 HP Color LaserJet E778xx Service EnwwNo ratings yetE87640 60 HP Color LaserJet E778xx Service Enww1,572 pages
- HP LaserJet Managed MFP E8XXXX Service and Support TrainingNo ratings yetHP LaserJet Managed MFP E8XXXX Service and Support Training592 pages
- HP LaserJet Enterprise M610-User Guide - EgNo ratings yetHP LaserJet Enterprise M610-User Guide - Eg153 pages
- Weight-For-Age BOYS: 6 Months To 2 Years (Percentiles)No ratings yetWeight-For-Age BOYS: 6 Months To 2 Years (Percentiles)1 page
- Answer Key NID Latest Mock Test Papers - 23306606 - 2023 - 12 - 15 - 19 - 26No ratings yetAnswer Key NID Latest Mock Test Papers - 23306606 - 2023 - 12 - 15 - 19 - 2684 pages
- Liver Function Test and Renal Function Test-Final1No ratings yetLiver Function Test and Renal Function Test-Final18 pages
- Pilih Jawapan Yang Terbaik Untuk Melengkapkan Ayat BerikutNo ratings yetPilih Jawapan Yang Terbaik Untuk Melengkapkan Ayat Berikut9 pages
- Pedestrian Stackers: 1 000 - 1 200KG S1.0 E, S1.2 ENo ratings yetPedestrian Stackers: 1 000 - 1 200KG S1.0 E, S1.2 E3 pages
- Microbiology-Course Module Revised 9.9.23No ratings yetMicrobiology-Course Module Revised 9.9.2312 pages
- MATLAB Solution To Microwave Engineering Pozar 4th Ed. Example 1.5No ratings yetMATLAB Solution To Microwave Engineering Pozar 4th Ed. Example 1.55 pages
- Anatomy Quiz: Arteries, Nerves, and MoreNo ratings yetAnatomy Quiz: Arteries, Nerves, and More11 pages
- Different Types of Pollution, English Essay, Project 2No ratings yetDifferent Types of Pollution, English Essay, Project 23 pages
- Biology 12 Unit 9 Assignment 2 Blood Type and Immune Response Virtual Lab0% (1)Biology 12 Unit 9 Assignment 2 Blood Type and Immune Response Virtual Lab2 pages
- Basic Marine Engineering For Maritime Students100% (5)Basic Marine Engineering For Maritime Students55 pages